Home

GSK96 Multi-function Position Control System User Manual(2013-3-2)

Contents

1. se pajoauuo3 9q UeD 3ulel T ial 7 u y o q BU u p9QINIDSIP JU9 UOD JON ES E e O UOTSS TWSUBIY VOTS TUBURI UOTSSTWSUBIY eolueyoayy er SES eo 1UB yo 3sod 00 9DIASP 9INSSIAH Ire Sotas 070 107 0W AULON l a 1090 yorss tusuer7 TPO os Tp i ISTP ISIP sTxe poo 9T Ne1pA4y arde E STXB pooy IST Peed ere Peed eed Tei ae dd 4c Putas qpporugyopW uoTsstusuery SULpOduy sutpooug suLpooug uolarsod u 280d TOOL 38M putds reyon i CJT L iii AA J1ed TeusTS 19949 YO TMS UIN eT O19Z y TUI eus Ts y9eqpasy ad A A PURIS LUSTS 9S Tp N Id qed ped euru SUTIIM I A VET Te PUT 99 OUT I i JOR JEFSJUT UQT STUSUB IA UPE SSTUSULI 498 QP99 H 1010 oeqpasy 10204 sod Oo 1930u etpurds W IO OW IOJVOW 4ed orso WOO Teutu peuruoy 4d ri Ied 01 U09 pPT1I99TH y1ed O1JU09 Agy TO1JU09 a3e3T0A A0 10F0tM sod 00 X1030u a putdg ditt uoTye LOL gl a MOO HO NCEE AO Soleuy o Jeug T S qeus I S eys S Uguo 197194107 puepwwo B 3 puemu AATA 19A TA T9ATA 9poul 01 U09 l Joyewexed y uo T S remata ou fq 198 ST YX sey STxe Aq 108 ST A sey stxe pa 013u09 ey 19419Ym
2. System A GSKDA98 drive at PE 7 ree phase 13 T ypu PULS 1 a T on 14 i Ydir o SIGN m Encode feedback signal C220V 15 A Ydi SIGN 7 de O Yen SON 1 24V COM y Motor power supply 10 O 8 5 e 93 db Yalm AIM Ay 15 D le COM D f R AC servo motor 110 OV COM i J RSTP a ee Metal shell gt Lol gi 4 D6 G FSTP ds Y 22 Metal shell 24 YO Zero 9 Connection table between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit GSK96 Y DA98 drive unit Signal interface F Y direction e e e t raon O ES E oa 1 EE ete EJ ype Metal shell Metal shell Note When the spindle and Y are switched P410__d4 1 Y is connected with the drive unit the connection method between Y and other drive units is referred to that between Z X and other drive units Note When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode 278 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because
3. The positive sign must be omitted but the negative sign must not be omitted 135 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 3 Block Number Block number is divided into two formats i e it is with line number and without line number block number is a line number of block number which is automatically created and also manually input and modified A block number consists of the letter N and the following 4 digit integer range 0000 9999 Block sequence can be at will its interval also can be unequal lt is suggested to increase or decrease the block number progressively based on programming sequence in order to conveniently search or analyze programs beginning of program line When the integer following block number N is modified please refer to the block content modification mode in OPERATION 4 1 Edit Operation Mode to modify the integer of block number When automatically creating a block number is executed and P333 is not set to 0 the line number can automatically create otherwise it cannot create automatically the line number Please refer to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Operation Mode about parameter setting each program includes many blocks and each block begins with block number N P After a new program is created the system automatically creates the first block number N0000 P and after each block is input to press ENTER the system automatically creates the next block number The pro
4. XX GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Chapter One Overview OPERATION CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW GSK96 is a newly developed multi function position control system with the precision control function of um level for Z X Y axis The single axis double axis or three axis control can be set by parameters This system can realize motion functions such as positioning and feeding two axis or three axis linkage taping and threading rotation indexing and servo spindle control and has plenty of input output signal control functions which can realize complicated control of multi signal detection and output GSK96 control system is applicable to the control like indexing drilling grinding taping and feeding cutting and welding rather than the control of the turning machine This product is easy to operate and has a visible lattice true color LCD interface with resolution of 800X480 It is characterized by its powerful functions stable performance full screen program editing Chinese operation interface outstanding safety machining precision and machining efficiency as well as the high cost performance In addition it employs the international standard CNC language ISO code to write programs Technical Specifications Y X Z Y single axis motion which can realize the linkage of any two axis three axis linkage interpolation precision 0 001mm the Max rapid traverse speed 30m min Any of X Z Y axis can be set as the r
5. G22 L Local cycle start One shot G A current G66 coordinate point One shot G G67 Return to coordinate point command G67 WO UO VO single 2 or 3 axis memorized by G66 G81 G81 Z W R D F L X YorZsingle axis Drilling One shot G G83 Z W R Q D F L X Y orZsingle axis Peck drilling command EN G0681 Y V R D F L Yaxis Drilling in the G06 mode One shot G command G06 Peck A in the G06 83 GO683 Y V R Q D F L axis One shot G A command G97 G97 oe surface speed Initial G G98 F Feed per minute Feed per minute minute Initial G G99 GID F Feed per revolution Modal G 192 G96 S Constant surface Constant surface speed ON ON Gonen seer eT o Modal G Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Note the system is in G00 G97 G98 when it is switched on and reset 4 24 Appendix G Code and its Relative Parameter Explanation Table 4 3 Relative parameter explanation Remark G00 Rapid traverse P100 P108 P112 P114 P400_d3 i Linear interpolation P112 P113 P114 P401_d5 P401_d4 Pp l P419 d0 P419 d3 P402_d7 Refer to GOO for G06 motion mode C others G06 G06 automatic stop Enable disable G06 Tappingeycle cycle P100 P108 P112 P113 P114 P108 P112 P113 P114 e saa aaa P108 P113 P116 P117 P209 P306 P307 Constant thread cutting P403 dO Variable pitch thread The same as G33 Rigid tapping threading Same to G32 Program reference point r
6. Operation method as follow 1 Press continuously 9 twice and the system pops up the brightness regulation window any key except for the brightness regulation is pressed and the system closes the window 2 The brightness regulation window has 0 10 grade O grade is the darkest 10 grade is the brightest press the brightness regulation key increases LCD brightness press to reduce LCD brightness Note 1 When the LCD has LED backlight the brightness adjusting function is valid for the LCD screen when the LCD has CCFL backlight the function is invalid for the screen 2 There is no operation in it when the brightness regulation window closes automatically in 10 seconds 3 LCD brightness can be regulated in JOG working mode and its regulation method is the same as that in AUTO working mode 4 5 12 Display of M Command Execution State in AUTO MANUAL Mode The displayed M commands are divided into following 11 groups M21 22 M23 24 M51 52 M53 54 M55 56 M57 58 M61 62 M63 64 M65 66 M67 68 and other M commands M50 M59 M60 M69 M74 M81 M82 M83 84 M13 14 In MANUAL AUTO mode when the above mentioned M commands are executed corresponding prompts will be displayed on the screen Red means M command is being executed green means finished yellow means suspended 4 5 13 Operations in AUTO Mode In AUTO mode when spindle and chuck are interlocked if M3 is executed to turn ON the spindle there are two choices after al
7. 113 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 6 5 3 Transmission Parameter List Parameter Paramete Parameter ame Range User backup No level P200 Z backlash mm P201 X backlash mm P202 2 P203 P204 Z command multiplication ratio Z command pulse division coefficient P206 P207 P208 multiplication ratio Y command pulse division coefficient P209 Spindle encoder lines 100 5000 4 6 5 4 Auxiliary Parameter List Parameter Paramete Initial User Parameter name Range No level value backup P300 Max speed of spindle M41 3000 P301 Max speed of spindle M42 3000 P302 Max speed of spindle M43 3000 199999 X command pulse division coefficient 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 C A CN A multiplication ratio 19999999 MN Lowest speed limit of constant surface speed Max speed limit of constant surface speed P306 Thread smooth speed borderline 1 9999 P307 Thread spindle wave alarm 1 99999 P308 Spindle JOG time 1 ms ms O 1 99999 P309 Speed in spindle JOG 0 99999 P310 Covered line of spindle gear control 4 0 4 time 1 ms time 2 ms time ms Output voltage in spindle gear 0 10000 shifting mV Pa 2 Spindle max speedimt emi 6000 19000 este 1 Toolpostiypea_9 Y Jo Jo 9 festa 1 Max tootnumber_ p Cd Cd ST e326 2 Spindle controling pulse tmetms ms 10 10000 e327 2 Chuck controling pulse tme ms ms 10
8. 120 Chapter Four System Operation 6 The data which has been modified has before it which means the modification is successfully executed Relative input of tool offset data 1 Select the OFFSET working mode move the highlight to the required changing data 2 Press INPUT or directly input the required data 3 Input data by keyboard Press to cancel the mistaken input data and input the correct Press ALTER and the system operates the input data and the previous number value of the selected parameter When the input is positive the system adds the input data to the previous number value of the selected parameter to save the parameter area 4 7 3 Tool Offset hp1 Function Press hp1 in OFFSET working mode and the system displays the directory of the tool offset function prompts 4 1 3 1 Communication of Tool Offset Data Press hp2 key to transmit data through USB communication mode The user can select the transmission direction as required 1 USB interface transmitting offset data U disc root catalogue needs to create the file COO1OFT the tool offset file name rule OFT file number 3 digit TXT ten characters The file number cannot be more than 254 otherwise the system does not list it when it reads U disc The tool offset file must be placed in CO010FT file folder If there is no such a folder in the root directory of the U disc the system prompts No offset file in the directory after d
9. 2 The maximum displayed duration is 99999 H 59 Min 59 Sec the largest displayed times of power on is 999 3 The current alarm record is highlighted and the scroll bar on the right side of the screen shows the current position among all the alarm records 4 Alarm record is a special search function do not use it in normal circumstances 4 8 7 2 Alarm Record Search The alarm record search is to find a specified alarm record to view some identical alarms and to count the total number of record that is equal to the current alarm number There are three ways to find specified alarm record Method 1 Scan D y View the record details in alarm record screen Press or to view last or next record Press or to view the last page or next page There are 8 lines in one page at most Method 2 Positioning 126 Chapter Four System Operation P record number Enter record number is the sequence number of alarm record Method 3 others F search type number Enter The search type includes E through error number M through spindle command T through too change number P through program number Press E M T P respectively to enter different search types gt You can also view the identical alarm records by pressing or Press a to count the quantity of records that are identical with the current alarm records the display window will disappear immediately if other keys are controlled within 5 seconds Related para
10. Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the provided information and advice for the users User s Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system and familiar with the safety operation procedures Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing or altering on original CNC systems and the accessories Be responsible for the failure to observe the provisions for operation adjustment maintenance installation and storage in the manual All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without further notice This manual is reserved by end user We are full of heartfelt gratitude for your support by using GSK s products Chinese version of all technical documents in Chinese and English languages is regarded as final Preface Operation Introduces operation methods technical specifications and parameter settings of GSK96multi function position control system Programming Introduces command codes and program format of GSK96multi function position control system Connection Introduces installation and connection methods of GSK96multi function position control system Appendix Introduces supplementary information to installation and connection of GSK96multi function position control system XI GGSK JJ 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual XII Contents CONTENT
11. DN waning eOnly qualified operators can operate the system eEnsure the switch is OFF before connecting the power supply LN oso elhe operator cannot leave the system to work alone eDo not switch on the system until making sure the connection is correct elhe emergency stop button is able to disconnect all power supplies when the system breaks down Do not switch on off the system frequently Caution ePrevent the system from the environmental interference 7 Troubleshooting Warning eUndqualified persons cannot repair the system Caution eAfter alarms do not restart the system until the breakdown is fixed Vi GGSK P 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Ill Safety suggestions for programming VIII 1 Setting a coordinate system 2 3 4 Incorrect coordinate system may cause the machine not to work as expected even if the program is correct which may injure the operator and damage the machine as well as its tool and workpiece Rapid traverse positioning When GOO rapid traverse performs the positioning nonlinear motion to position between its starting point and end point make sure that the path for the tool is safe before programming The positioning is to perform the rapid traverse and when the tool and the workpiece are interfered the tool the machine and the workpiece may be damaged and even the operator injured Applicability of user manual The m
12. There is no repetitive command in one block otherwise the system alarms E202 Repetitive command Mistaken example N0200 G00 G00 Z30 The command character must be followed by the valid digital command otherwise the system alarms E201 Illegal command Mistaken example NO200 G23 Z30 no the command There must not be the repetitive data field in one block otherwise the system alarms E234 the data field is repetitive Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z20 Z30 There must not be the mutually contradictory data field otherwise the system alarms E210 the excessive fields Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z20 W30 5 The command character and field character must be followed by the valid digit without the blank 6 7 8 9 space otherwise the system alarms E204 the command format error Mistaken example N0200 G00 Z 20 i N0200 G 00 Z30 there is no blank space between G and 00 The required data in the block cannot be omitted otherwise the system alarms E206 leakage message Mistaken example N0200 G90 X100 There must not be the fields letters and digits unrelated to the command otherwise the system alarms E203 illegal message Mistaken example N0200 G00 XW 100 surplus character W The number of the data field must be in the valid range otherwise the system alarms E211 the data exceeds the range Mistaken example N0200 G00 X100 Z99999 _ the data 9999 exceeds the
13. 199999 e328 2 Tallstock controling pulse time ms ms 10 199900 1329 2 Mrespond check time ms ms 500 199999 P330 3 Automatic lubricating start times s 60 o 9999999 P331 3 Automatic lubricating interval E 0 99999 999 MIN time s P332 S 0 001 aa Durable pressure low alarm time s eo 99999 999 aa 114 Chapter Four System Operation P333 Program line number automatic TS A O interval P335 3 dvalueinGss mm 2 0 999999 P344 Cutting enabled when a percentage 0 90 of rotation speed is reached M87communication delay ms ms 2 P343 M87 communication 0 99999 address decimal P344 2 cal mso 72 before machining o os 2 cains0 r2 ater machinng 0 os M50 M72 ms o uN m o P350 Spindle clamping releasing time 0 9999 ms Servo OFF delay time ms 0 9999 P351 4 6 5 5 Bit Parameter Set the corresponding bit to O or 1 to realize the different control functions and to meet all kinds of requirements of different machines Parameter Parameter Initial User Parameter name Range number level value backup Debugging setting a Zero settingi 00000000 a ___ Zero setting2 00000000 DNI A 3 Display window 10001000 Paie s Functional switch 00000000 Pay 2 Recordalarm 00000000 f NIJO 4 6 5 6 Variable Initial Value List Parameter number Parameter Parameter Initial User level name value backup
14. 4 When the rapid trans block executes specially note that the distance between the tool change and workpiece should be adequate during programming prevent from impacting the workpiece during tool change 198 Chapter Six Alarm Message CHAPTER SIX ALARM MESSAGE The overall warning information in this CNC system are simply prompted in the screen by Chinese characters making corresponding disposal according to the prompting content Each alarm meaning is shown in the following table Workpiece program is also named as machining program in the following table The alarm number starts by uppercase letter E and the following is three numbers The classification is as follows E001 E009 Alarm in PARAMETER OFFSET working mode E100 E199 Alarm in EDIT working mode E200 E299 Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND E600 E699 Alarm in PROGRAM CHECK E300 E399 Alarm in JOG AUTO working mode executing relative operation E400 E499 Related Alarm in JOG AUTO working mode executing relative statement 6 1 Emergency Alarm The stop operation in system emergency please refer the details in OPERATION 4 1 4 3 Emergency Alarm 6 2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER OFFSET Working Mode i e E001 E009 Not support USB USB device isn t supported by Use USB device supported by the this system software system Device is removed suddenly in l E Remove USB suddenly making USB device check so on EPeraten APIBIO Mils No insert USB
15. Go to keyboard test to test the keyboard Key 3 See CPLD pulse number Display X Z Y pulse number Key 4 See version information display system version information including software CPLD version and software version loading Key 5 Memory import export The system memory is transmitted through U disc 1 USB interface transmits memory data It is required to create a folder with name C001RAM in the root directory of U disc The naming rule of the system RAM file includes 10 characters which are RAM File number 3 digits TXT The file number cannot be greater than 999 or the system does not list the file when reading the U disc The memory file must be placed in the folder COO1RAM If there is no such a folder the system prompts No RAM file in the directory after detection After opening the RAM directory page the system can only send the RAM files Note 1 Key hp2 is not advised to use 2 For safety the memory and version updating can only be done when the password level is above 2 4 8 7 1 Alarm Record Display In DIAGNOSIS mode press key hp2 then press 0 the alarm record is displayed shown in fig 4 9 Alarm record function Record alarm information Every operation corresponds to a prompt Meanwhile you can press key hp1 to see details 4031 alarm messages can be recorded at most when the number exceeds 4031 the new alarm will replace an old one So you need to download the alarm re
16. N0050 r203 r200 r201 The rotation numbers of each frequency NO060 r204 r151 The desired revolving speed K installed into the corresponding variable N0070 r205 r204 r203 Count the frequency to be output N0080 r205 r205 1237 Frequency adjustment NOO90 r5 r205 100000 Whether it is to be calculated according to frequency N0100 r5 abs r5 N0110 if r204 lt 0 then P120 else P150 Perform downward if the negative rotation speed is input otherwise skip to P150 NO120 if r20 0 then P260 If the original address is stop signal 0 and then deliver the reverse signal 1 and rotation speed N0130 if r20 3 then P240 If the original address is positive signal 3 send a stop signal 0 firstly and then deliver a reverse signal 1 and rotation speed after delaying 150 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions N0140 if r20 1 then P310 Directly send a rotation speed to renew if the original address is reverse signal 1 N0150 if r204 0 then P300 Deliver a stop signal and O rotation speed if the speed input is O NO160 if r204 gt 0 then P1 70 lt is downward performed if the positive speed inputs N0170 if r20 0 then P280 If the original address is stop signal 0 then send a positive signal and rotation speed NO180 if r20 3 then P310 Directly deliver a rotation speed to renew if the original address is positive signal 3 N0190 if r20 1 then P200 Firstly send
17. P600 P639 r001 r040 o 99999999 99999999 115 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Interface Parameter List Parameter No level name P500 210 User command output P501 User command output P502 MP3 Program run signal Applied to three color indicator 3 light control green MP2 Alarm indicator control Applied to three color signal 2 light control yellow MP1 Alarm indicator control Applied to three color signal 1 light control red DLY Machine electricity delay Power on control signal Ld SD P506 320 Lubricating control Control lubricating switch switch on machine Standard definition Initial i Range E and function lt A el el el el ejeje a cls P503 P504 _ P505 lt lt P511 0 AGT Safety door check Check the machine safety door state Dalm Feed device alarm Check feed device state check in M20 M411 Gear shifting in position Use frequency spindle signal in position check signal M41 M421 Gear shifting in position Use frequency spindle signal in position check signal M42 P515 1 M43 Gear shifting in position Use frequency spindle signal in position check signal M43 signal in position check signal M44 fo M911 User command input_ ______ P518 1 M93I User command input 0 a A e ar co in position check tailstock 20 ll Ped Fal in position check tailstock Pert LL ESPA Ica E emergency stop select
18. Workpiece count ms gt me Galleys execution MOS POT TT Transfer entry block number specified by P M21 M234 Set No 1 user output to be valid M21 D Output signal keeps the time specified by D and the signal will be cancelled after the time arrival Set No 1 user output to be invalid M22 D SeiNo 2 user cupula Be val 28D SetNo 2useroutputtobeinvaid w2 0 o o M91 NO user input is invalid until input is M91 P Transfer entry block number specified invalid by P Wait till No 1 user input is valid M92 P Transfer entry block number specified 139 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual ee A LO try block b ified aaa Wait till No 2 user input is valid M93 P me er entry block number specitie T f try block b ified ms Wait till No 2 user input is valid M94 P a er entry pioc NUMDET Specie M47 M48 Set the permission or forbiddance M47 M48 state of Y Send an information based upon the M86 PJQH ModBus communication agreement M87 Spindle orientation control Refer to the Spindle Orientation Control in Section M88 Retract the spindle orientation control 4 4 3 5 of OPERATION for details Refer to the M81 M82 M83 M84 command M81 M84 User input output condition control introduction in Section 3 2 of PROGRAMMING for details Refer to the Self defined Command Programming in M50 M74 Self defined d Mso m7a Seltdeined command Chapter Eight of PROGRAMMING for d
19. behind the axis number means the axis is in Enable disable G06 mode Cominand G06 mode and 0 means G6 is forbidden G09 YO Allow to move the Y axis in Manual and programming instead of performing G6 in monitoring G09 G09 Y1 Prohibit to move Y axis in the Manual and programming allow performing G6 in monitoring One shot G command Y axis working state shift G32 Z W P E H Z X Ysingle axis allowed Tapping cycle G33 Z W P E Q H canbe X Zand Y axis Constant thread Constant tead outing One shot G command G34 Z W P E Q R H canbe X Zand Variable Dunnan thread Y axis G38 Z W PCE H_ Z Y single axis G38 allowed Rigid tapping threading PAA G38 Y V PCE H_ Y axis tapping G26 X U Z W Y V single 2 or 3 axis Cross the middle point and return to the program Program reference point reference point rapid traverse in GOO return G28 G28 XU orG28 ZW or G28 YV or G28 Z W or G28 Y V Machine zero return zero return 3 c30 G30 P2 X U Z W Y V single 2 or 3 axis 2 3 program reference G30 P3 X U Z W Y V single 2 or 3 axis point return One shot G command l l Workpiece coordinate G50 G50 X Z Y single 2 or 3 axis system setting Workpiece coordinate G51 system recovery G52 G92 Y V Rotary axis coordinate clearing integer e G31 X U Z W FH X Y Z single or 2 axis Skip function e35 635 1 KOO I O signal display One shot G command
20. program command 205 CGSR IT Hist Alarm prompt The M10 function is set to be invalid The M10 function is set to be invalid Illegal use M10 Command invalid Illegal use M11 Command invalid The input chip pin by variable is occupied by other function or the parameter forbids to use the input chip pin statement program The input chip pin by variable is Illegal use r10xx No program pin Illegal use r20xx No program pin occupied by other function or the parameter forbids to use the output chip pin statement program or used the user defined changing tool method No traverse command in The parameter setting the M61 M61 program program forbids the motion command axis is not axis is not be without Tool type is 9 T command need single block When the tool post type is 9 the T command doesnt have separate section Illegal use Y command The control axis is set to be Y axis Cut NO exceed In the program the tool number is over the setting range Illegal use G96 When the spindle S control is set to be gear shifting mode the constant line speed cutting No define G31l input Dont set the G81l_ interface interface invalid parameter or the setting is wrong Illegally use the X The controllable axis is set to any command one other than the X axis Prohibit X axis GO6 mode Parameter P419 d2 0 Prohibit Y axis GO6 mode Parameter P419_d1 0 Prohibit Z axis GO6 mode Parameter P419 d3 0 Pa
21. 00000 000 is the parameter content is the parameter annotation 5 The file content can be some of all parameters 6 Standard format of parameter file communication on PC 84 Chapter Four System Operation TXT file format o Remark CNC_GSKCOO1 Reference coordinate Mark for checking parameters which POOO 00200 000 Z program reference point cannot be omitted 0 Y zero offset The contents behind is the comment motion parameter which can be omitted EO 9009 ME a MAVENSE SPERE PXXX parameter number P000 the first parameter is necessary P209 1200 spindle encoder lines 0 the parameter content is necessary miscellaneous function PXXX parameter number and colon P300 1000 max speed of M41 gear which cannot be separated means other parameters and the Bit parameter table does not list all parameter The P400 00000000 running setting parameter receiving can be some of all parameters interface parameter O feed device alarm check Dalm variable initial value O variable r01 4 6 3 2 Parameter Draw and Solidifying The parameter seen in the window are saved to the system SRAM storage which has the power down protection function when the main board battery has problem the parameter loses The system has the parameter initialization function according to the differences of the matched motor drive unit the system can execute the different ini
22. 162 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Field and range X Z Y absolute coordinates of end point U W V relative move amount from starting point to end point F cutting feedrate F value is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed At the same time it is controlled by the feedrate override Range of X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm F range 0 001mm min 15000mm min Explanation Z XIY can execute single axis two axis or three axis feed simultaneously G01 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override Actual feedrate F x feedrate override G01 is the modal command and can be omitted in the next block GO1 can be abbreviated to G1 and G1 and G01 are equivalent Relative parameters Parameters related to G01 P112 P113 P114 P401_d5 P401_d4 Interpolation traverse execution as follows 1 Raising speed stage raises speed at the initial speed of P112 2 The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114 at the same time the system checks whether the feedrate Fx feedrate override exceeds P113 limit if it does the feedrate is P113 P401_d5 P401_d4 set in the cutting machining the system uses high speed connection mode continuous smooth transition or reducing speed to zero Example 60 DS Fig 4 2 G01 linear interpolation The tool traverses from A to B in G01 at the speed 150 mm min as Fig 4 2 Absolute programming N0100 G01 X22 5 2Z 35 F150 R
23. 26LS31 300 Q 26LS32 CNC side Drive unit side 266 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 5 4 Connection Between CNC System and Drive Unit of Compound Stepper Motor Connection layout between CNC and GSK DY3 X connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable System DY3 drive unit llc Xput CP 1 L eae 0 Single phase Oo e N AC220V 19 kdir Di A 49 U 3 ira 5V EN l E V Motor power supply O O W ii LS a Ou P E 14 Xalm 7 RDY1 4 6 D 0 ON ppv Ty Hybrid i T R _ stepper motor Metal shell gt z D Metal shell T Pe Z connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable System DY3 drive unit L Single phase 12 0 2put_ 11 Pr da e ACION Zp c A 6 Zdir o PEL Zdir Dir U ee E l i a 7 y Motor power supply O O y t 9 4 Zalm RDY1 4 6 D 10 OV o RDY2 ya Hybrid stepper ii Y T R motor Metal shell lt gt Metal shell T 267 CGSN I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Connection table between CNC and GSK DY3 GSK96 X DY3 drive unit Signal interface X enabling DY3 drive unit Signal interface Z enabling When other stepper drive unit is connected with the CNC system the system can uses the corresponding control switching and its de
24. 45 Program remaining space 792KB Towern Fig 4 2 program catalog search 17 CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Display content in window area Upper top Program number and capacity of current program program length the system function operation method prompt key hp1 Middle top The system will arrange the program sequence according to the name size remark and new Middle Display program name capacity and remark Middle bottom Operation prompt message Lower bottom Display current stored part program quantity up to 255 and surplus stored space Pop up window Display operation prompt message Note Press hp1 key and the system prompts Program catalog window message prompt introducing the used press key functions 4 3 1 Part Program Catalog Search Program catalog search window displays the current stored program quantity and all programs sorts as follows 1 Name program number from top to bottom from left to right 2 Size program stored space from top to bottom from left to right 3 Remark the first 12 characters of the first line of the program from top to bottom from left to right 4 The latest Input time sequence from top to bottom from left to right V Press and E B the system searches all part programs displaying 12 program on each window press to the first page of program to the last Press Gq to sort all programs according
25. COM W otor power supply al s G37 D CCWL 5 TE oL o AC servo motor e L3c INH OO 33 COM SD A FG A4 ao O 50 O Metal shell CZ O 19 273 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 5 8 Connection Layout Between CNC System and Japanese Yaskawa Drive Unit X connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable System A YASKAWA drive unit LIC a E 11 A 2put_ PULSE 7 i Three phase Xpu PUS oe 3 Oo E Os Encoder fe ignal AC200V J Xdir SIGN y lt 13 ae SIGN 40 E E _ ON a 7 oO SNS 40 7 Motor power supply 24V 24V 47 d 1 Xalm AE 3 g L1 L2 _ AC servo motor io POTS 49 L3 N OT O 43 J ALM Metal shell gt ES A A 41 Metal shell Z connection layout 274 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Less than 15m shielded cable YASKAWA drive unit System pee fs gO 6 5 Zdir 144 Zdir 15 Zen o 24 9 fai i Metal shell gt AS e L1C PULS y om SIGNE 44 SIGN AP AZ aUn 244 1 47 ALM O 31 L1 L2 E L3 E Ee omy om 41 O Metal shell Three phase AC200V E AC servo motor 3 6 X4 Spindle Interface and Y interface The CNC system controls the connection between the voltage SVC
26. Eg 6 INPUT nput key The program edit state is switched into the program catalog search state and the system prompts Input program number 7 Page Up Page Down Paging to display the program content In hp1 the cursor directly moves the home the end window1 24 Chapter Four System Operation 8 ENTER Enter key When the cursor is in the first line or the last line press ENTER it will locate to the new line BZ 9 DELETE delete key Delete all blocks or characters in the block hp 10 d hp1 key Program edit help message prompt 11 Ahp2 key Current program compiling Multi function definition key input must obey the following rules 1 When the first letter is capital in the line the first key value is prior when it is the lowercase the 3 or 2 key value is prior 2 The system automatically creates the blank space when the letter or character following the digit 0 9 is input 3 The cursor stays the position where the input is convenient after the character string is input 4 3 4 1 Inputting Program Content Note P333 is set to 10 the system automatically creates the block number and the following is the same In program edit window inputting the part program content is as follows create a new program according to the operations of creating new part program input one line content after the block N0000 is displayed press ENTER key after inputting one line programs to en
27. IAEA o ne a d 7 Example 30 20 x Fig 4 6 Tapping Example Single thread with 1 5 mm lead N0010 GOO XO Z20 rapidly positioning the starting point of workpiece N0020 M3 S01 spindle CW N0030 G01 Z2 F500 Z approaches the workpiece N0040 G32 Z 30 P1 5 Z infeed tool tapping N0050 G00 Z20 leave the workpiece and return to program starting point NO060 M02 end of program 4 7 G38 Rigid Tapping Threading Code format G38 Z W _ P E _ H_ Z axis tapping G38 Y V _ P E _ H_ Y axis tapping only feed with single axis Field meaning Wherein Z W Y V from tapping to the specified place by the command ZIY is separately regarded as absolute coordinate along with the Z axis Y axis W V is separately treated as the relative coordinate along with the Z axis Y axis one of them can be used the relative one equals to the offset value based upon the current position P Metric thread leading E Inch thread leading H H_d0 0 means MO3 tapping H_d0 1 means M04 tapping Field range Y Z V W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm P 0 001mm 500 000mm E 0 060 25400 000 tooth inch H 00000000 11111111 Explanations G38 The execution procedure of Z axis tapping cycle 174 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions i If the spindle is being rotated and then perform the MO5 the spindle will absolutely stop li The Z axis is always moved along with the spindle after entering t
28. Ifthe No UO8 pin is LOW of current state the No UO17 pin is output 154 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions LOW and then perform the next one otherwise it keeps waiting M83 R8 0 Q17 0 D3 If the No UO8 pin is LOW of current state the No UO17 pin is output LOW and signal keeps D3 and performs next one otherwise it Keeps waiting 3 2 4 M84 Input Signal Inspection in the Specified Time Code format Example M84 18 0 If the input No UI08 pin is LOW then perform the next one otherwise keep waiting M84 18 1 If the input No UI08 pin is HIGH then perform the next one otherwise keep waiting M84 18 0 D3 Keep inspecting within D3 if UlO8 0 then perform the next one otherwise it will Keep detecting If it does not inspect when the time is used up the E388 M84 inspection 18 0 signal overtime alarms and then the program is ended 3 3 S function Spindle Function S and the following data are used to control the spindle speed and there are two modes as follows 1 Spindle speed switch value control mode Sx or Sxx the system outputs the gear signal to the machine to realize the gear shift of spindle speed 2 Spindle speed analog voltage control mode Sxxxx specifies the actual speed and outputs 0 10V analog voltage signal to spindle servo device or converter to realize the spindle speed change According to the machine s configuration with P410_d6 setting the spindle function is used to control
29. M42 M43 M44 Spindle gear shifting gear 1 2 3 4 Function interlock Operator customized M50 M74 state keeping command Output control and check E g M82 Q17 0 D3 or M82 Q17 0 Set the spindle working M47 M48 mode Spindle orientation control M87 M88 Note When the operator inputs M command and the first digit is 0 it can be omitted The command functions are the same those of AUTO Working mode The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING 4 4 12 Spindle Turn Function Manual tapping function is to manually turn the spindle and the selected coordinate axis links along the spindle to realize the tapping and thread run out when the spindle stops In JOG working mode the spindle stops stably Press and the system enters the spindle turn function state and prompts Inputting tapping axis X Y Z After the movement axis is selected by X Y Z key the system prompts Input the tapping pitch mm and then enter the manual tapping state after inputting the pitch by ENTER In this case the spindle can be rotated manually and the tapping axis can be performed axis movement depending on the spindle rotation In manual tapping state press ESC to exit the manual tapping state the motion axis decelerates to stop when the tapping axis exits from the motion state Functional description The function is valid in JOG working mode the tapping in manual tapping state moves along the spindle rotation The axis m
30. X axis thread cutting G33 Y V PCE Q H Y axis thread cutting Field P metric thread lead Prange 0 001mm 500 000mm E inch thread lead E range 0 060 25400 000 teeth inch X U Z W Y V The Absolute Relative coordinate of thread end X Z Y U W V range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Q Initial angle which is 0 if not specified it is used to thread part Q range 0 360 000 H Command bit parameter H_d7 H_d2 reserved H range 00000000 11111111 168 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions H_d1 It selects the continuous thread machining raising reducing speed mode and is O by default H_d1 0 In continuous thread cutting between two neighboring threads the long axis has a process of reducing the speed from machining speed to initial speed and then raising the speed from initial speed to thread machining speed The thread pitch length changes in the transition stage of speed raising and reducing H_d1 1 In continuous thread cutting between two neighboring threads the machining speed of the current thread suddenly changes to the one of the next thread without the process of reducing the speed from machining speed to initial speed and then raising the speed from initial speed to thread machining speed Therefore this mode is not suitable if the pitch difference between the two threads is too big Otherwise the motor may step out Relative parameters Parameters related to G
31. are used together When the setting is the direct output each control line controls one gear and the all gear quantity and P310 quantity are consistent when the encode output is according to the used control line quantity the controlled total gear quantity is 27 max setting 4 channel control line output is taken as the gear control signal d4 switching the spindle and Y 0 Do not switch the spindle does not work in the position control mode forbid M47 M48 1 Switch the spindle switches between the position control mode and the speed control mode use M47 M48 d3__ spindle brake signal output 0 Use output the brake signal MSP in executing M5 1 Do not use do not output the brake signal MSP in executing M5 MSP signal interface is used to other interfaces control d2__ spindle CCW signal output 0 Use output the spindle rotation CCW signal M04 1 Do not use forbid outputting the spindle CCW signal M04 d1_ YM will be cleared when M47 performs 0 Cleared The machine coordinate YM will be cleared when performing the M47 1 No clear The machine coordinate YM will not be cleared when performing the M47 max speed of M41 M42 M43 M44 __ auxiliary parameter P300 P301 P302 P303 The parameter is max spindle speed of M41 M42 M43 M44 When the system uses the converter controlling the spindle and the spindle gear is M41 M42 M43 M44 and the system outputs 10V analog voltage it corresponds to
32. current point without changing the offset and the machine coordinates The operation result is that the offset between the workpiece coordinate system and the machine coordinate system is set again 2 Setting the workpiece coordinate system operation is executed once and is not set later after the system is initialized or the workpiece type is changed all offset values are cleared to zero Note When the actual position of the tool is inconsistent with the one of the workpiece coordinate system due to the step out caused by some special causes it is inappropriate to use the method of resetting the workpiece coordinate system because both workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system are changed after step out In this case if only the workpiece coordinate system is corrected without correcting the machine coordinate system an unexpected machine coordinate soft limit alarm may occur Proper operations after motor stepping out as follows 1 Select the reference point The tool nose easily reaches and the operator can conveniently observe it for one couple of tool measure Z X coordinates of the point 2 Move the tool nose to some reference point the Known reference point coordinates 3 Continuously press the DELETE twice and close the drive unit when the tool nose coordinates are not consistent with the reference point coordinates 4 Input the field to move and make the tool nose coordinates be consistent with the
33. field position and number in the line of the source program prompting the operator to modify till the mistaken is corrected 4 3 6 1 hp2 Compiling Command In program edit window press hp2 and the system orderly compile the current program The system pops up a window Program alarm when it finds out a mistaken message The system displays when all command compiling are correct Program alarm message includes as follows Error mistaken command refer to PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Alarm Message according to the commands Program content of mistaken block Position mistaken letter or field of mistaken block Explanations 1 Program which is compiled successfully by hp2 can run in AUTO working mode 30 Chapter Four System Operation 2 The system automatically completes the compile when it switches from EDIT working mode to other working modes 3 Press hp2 to complete compile to appear Program alarm and then press any keys and the edit cursor automatically points to the mistaken block 4 Executing hp2 compiling the system assumes that the machine coordinate axis takes the current workpiece coordinate position as the starting point starts the execution from the first block of the current program So for some special programs each axis stopping position has effect on the compiling it is suggested that each coordinate axis should stop in advance in the starting point of the machining 4 3 6 2 Program Compiling Result Anal
34. for the operation of tool offset transmission see Section 4 7 4 Tool Offset Operation Mode in Part I For detail operation of receiving alarm record see Section 4 8 7 3 Diagnosis Operation Mode 5 1 USB Communication The system supports USB communication mode exchange the data between CNC and U disc by USB interface 5 1 1 USB Operation For the USB operation the user directly inserts the U disc into the USB interface of the system panel and the system automatically identifies and opens the U disc when the U disc requires creating the file and the file name in the root catalog according to the system file catalog At the same time the system window displays USB icon Note 1 After the U disc is used the user must firstly press ESC to close the U disc before pulling out it at the moment the system displaying USB icon disappears and then the user can pull out the U disc from USB interface otherwise the mistaken operation damages the system hardware and the U disc 2 Must not pull out the U disc when its indicator flashes because it is reading or writing the data otherwise it can cause hardware damage or data loss 3 The U disc has the write protect switch and the user switches it before inserting the U disc and cannot do it when the U disc is working 4 The user should reduce the storage content in the U disc otherwise it influences the communication speed between the system and the U disc It is suggested the use
35. function is applicable to some special machine parts under the requirements of keeping some output signals ON while turning OFF some others If any similar alarm occurs during the execution of M74 the execution stops During emergency stop if the M74 command is executed and axis movement or tool change is being carried out the system will stop M74 execution automatically 2 In MANUAL AUTO mode when the parameter sets that M74 can be executed during emergency stop P412_d1 1 the pop up window displays M74 When there is already a solidified M74 command in the system 3 For more details about M74 please refer to Chapter 8 Chapter Four System Operation 4 Please be careful when executing M74 function It is only suitable for some special machine tools Relative parameters The external emergency stop signal function is valid when P404_d7 is set to 0 The external emergency stop signal function is invalid when P404_d7 is set to 1 P403_d3 0 When the emergency alarm is valid the system only turns off the signals of spindle cooling and lubrication P403_d3 1 When the emergency alarm is valid the system turns off all the output signals of the auxiliary function P404_d7 is for debugging the system and must be set to valid in the power on state otherwise it cannot provide protection P412_ d1 parameter sets whether to execute M74 self defined command during emergency stop 4 144 Drive Unit Alarm When the system
36. it means the system is waiting for the spindle to reach the preset speed Spindle Clamping Releasing Time ms __ Miscellaneous parameter P350 Spindle clamping releasing time Parameter range 0 9999 Servo OFF Delay Time ms _ Miscellaneous parameter P351 Servo OFF delay time Parameter range 0 9999 4 6 4 6 Parameters Related to Tool Post P318 P319 Tool post type __ auxiliary parameterP318 max value is 9 The parameter is defined by the tool post type installed on the machine and the system executes the tool change mode according to the parameter P318 0 8 the line up tool post installed on the machine does not cover any input output P318 9 use M60 customized command tool change refer to examples in CONNECTION 3 4 Tool Change Function and Connection Max tool selection number __ auxiliary parameter P319 The parameter defines max tool selection number of the tool post The standard configuration of the system CNC is 8 tool selection electronic tool post The tool selection signal can extend to 12 16 tool selections tool post according to the special encode input Refer to CONNECTION 3 4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection 4 6 4 7 Parameters Related to Chuck and Tailstock _P327 P328 P409 Chuck control pulse time ms 1 __auxiliary parameter P327 When the chuck is pulse control mode the parameter defines the durable time of the chuck execution command M10 M11 outputting pulse signal Unit ms Tail
37. negative mechanical software limit P017 P018 max travel of X positive negative mechanical software limit P019 P020 max travel of Y positive negative mechanical software limit Bit parameter P404_d4 P404_d3 separately sets whether the mechanical tool nose software limit alarm are valid 4 1 4 3 ESP Alarm Emergently Stopping the System When there is the external emergency stop input terminal ESP in the system input interface the operator should connect the emergency stop button Normally closed contact on the machine panel with the emergency stop input terminal Press ESP Button then the system enters the emergency stop state The system stops all feed and sets the output of all the switch value control such as the spindle and the cooling to be invalid displaying ESP Alarm If the system interface is sprung out other window by chance and then perform the ESP function in advance the ESP alarm will display later After the emergency stop condition is released the operator should rotate the emergency stop button clockwise based on the up arrow the button automatically releases to cancel the emergency stop signal When the system is in the emergency stop alarm state and the external emergency stop signal is cancelled you can press the RESET key to return the previous working mode When the system is in the emergency stop state if the external emergency stop signal is not cancelled it is forbidden to opera
38. pa 013u09 y 19419YA asf dN SX sod 001 ZX yndur 3nd3no TX jpurds px 1070W EX JNO 288 Appendix Appendix5 CNC system appearance installation dimension az LY T b li E E Xx 5 S 2X S i J YS ASE 1 T J gt H L wer E el Ir N F 3 s E D l a na Co CO S Y on y ms AS OD Dz E ON A 7 N 4 3 la A O Lx HACI A Z kat We Z A i gt A FLA YS ll he N E aan cy Aad 5 eS lt LOL 289
39. releasing S04 as other use P310 2 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 releasing S04 S03 as other use P310 1 actual output controlling points is S01 releasing S04 S03 S02 as other use P310 0 S does not output releasing S04 S03 S02 S01 as other use 2 When the gear controls the signal code output P410_d5 is set to 1 and the controlled lines specified by P310 are less than 4 only the low gear control is valid and the high code control is released and is not controlled by the gear 46 Chapter Four System Operation 3 When P410_db5 is set to 0 the gear control signal directly outputs by the bit S range is SOO S04 One gear signal corresponds to one gear signal SO means all output is invalid 4 When P410_d5 is set to 1 the gear control signal outputs in code S range isS00 5S15 The detailed code output is as follows S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 510 S11 S12 513 S14 Output point s ES AE IM ALA Note x in the above table means the output of the corresponding output point is valid Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle S gear shifting When the system is turned on it defaults S00 SO1 S04 output are invalid When the system executes any one of S01 S02 S03 S04 the corresponding S signal output is valid and keeps and at the same time the output of other 3 signals is cancelled When the system executes SOO it cancels S01 S04 output and one of S0
40. state When the signal meets the condition the coordinate axis stops the feed and continuously executes the next command otherwise the coordinate axis feeds to the end point and then the system goes to the next command Command format G31 Z W X U Y V _ F_ H_ Z XN 3 axis feed simultaneously G31 ZW X U _ F_ H_ ZIX two axis feed simultaneously or Z X Z Y XN two axis feed simultaneously G31 Y V _ F_ H_ Y single axis feeds Field and range X Z Y End point coordinates after the command ends U W V Incremental value counted by the theory end point F Feedrate F is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed it is controlled by the feedrate override H The mark of execution method each one means different meaning H_d H_d1 Reserved it is 00000000 by default H_d0 0 G31 LOW meets the skip condition H_d0 1 G31l HIGH meets the skip condition X Z Y U W V 9999 999 9999 999 mm F 0 001mm min 15000mm min H 00000000 11111111 Explanation Z XIY can execute single axis two axis or three axis feed simultaneously G31 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override Actual feedrate F x feedrate override 186 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G31 is non modal command and can be omitted in the next block when it is the same Note 1 G31 input check function is non standard pin input control when the function is needed the user can define its pin in the interfac
41. window after the program operation is ended d4__Monitoring closes when resetting 0 Close When it is set to O the monitoring close is viewed when opening the window after pressing the resetting button 104 Chapter Four System Operation 1 Do not close When it is set to 1 the monitoring is still performed when the window is opened after pressing the resetting button d3_Zaxis allows G06 mode 0 Forbidden Z axis prohibits G06 movement mode 1 Allow Z axis allows G06 movement mode d2_ Xaxis allows G06 mode 0 Forbidden X axis prohibits G06 movement mode 1 Allow X axis allows G06 movement mode d1_ Yaxis allows G06 mode 0 Forbidden Y axis prohibits G06 movement mode 1 Allow Y axis allows G06 movement mode d0Q__G06 movement mode during resetting 0 G06 Stop Press resetting button GO6 stops feed when system performs the standard resetting function 1 Without affection Press resetting button the GO6 does not affect while the system performs the standard resetting unction Debugging setting _ bit parameter P404 password level 2 ALA ee ee The parameter is set for being convenient to the system being debugging must be set to the valid state in power on otherwise it cannot play a role in protection d7 emergency stop alarm 0 Check the external emergency stop signal function is valid 1 Shield the external emergency stop signal function is invalid d6_ ha
42. 18 pin of the X4 are regarded as signal spindle analogue voltage grounding AGND which are shared with the identical function Both the No 33 pin of the X1 interface and the No 6 pin of the X2 are regarded as signal tool post clamping in position signal TCP which are shared with the identical function The definitions of 23 channel digital input signal and 18 channel digital output signal are as follows Table 3 1 Emergency stop emergency stop Interface Antara Venere Variable Signal function Signal name signal name O E a 254 X1 signal DecZ UI28 ri028 Z axis deceleration signal DecX U29 r1029 X axis deceleration signal 4 DecY UB0O r1030 Y axis deceleration signal meree E me e Hos Spinone hold signet e mza ue roe Feed hold signal SS 7 fov avendy OA sing e EVA IE O E A Spindle gear output 1 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection UO02 r2002 Spindle gear output 2 11 S03 U0O03 r2003 Spindle gear output 3 UO04 r2004 Spindle gear output 4 a mo uoa o4 Chuck clamping E E ET m weny O OA sang O O ZXY negative cnt w pe m 082 postie iit veen OA wathing O 21 Rm ums rons Chuck releasing in position check 2 foviaaveny froze eating a ba A ESE AS rr 25 we 105 20 taisogagtmad UO16 r2016 aoe going backward aS E E RA Ooo M210 UO17 12017 550 set as user defined command output M230 UO018 12018 P501 set as user defined command dal Spin
43. 236 Chapter Seven Statement Programming What is called pulse monitor it belongs to process monitor too its description mode open close mode all rules are absolutely same to process monitor In the machining process when the pulse monitoring is started the right of process status bar will display P n it also can check the state of system current used pulse monitoring Such as P 1 expresses one pulse monitoring is started The explanation of pulse monitoring 1 At first make the description to pulse monitoring variable all assignment statement for r7100 are description Such as r7100 r1001 r7100 adds 1 for the pulse signal of interface UlO1 2 Then make the description to pulse monitoring condition Such as if r7100 gt 50 then P1500 if the r7100 count value is greater than fifty then turn P1500 3 And then start the monitor through the assignment of pulse monitoring manager Through the assignment of pulse monitoring management register r7110 r7113 can open or close the monitor Among them when the assignment 0 1 2 are same to process monitor When the assignment is 5 the pulse monitor counter is cleared to 0 When the assignment is 6 or 7 the operator should set the pulse monitor count mode Troubleshootings 0 Close the opened monitor just the same to process monitor Open the monitor the process method is absolutely same to process monitor Open the monitor the process method is absolutely
44. 285 CGSR P Hist Interface circuit method layout 2 output U202 ULN2803 a Yo PARARAA PARRA E 1024V v20 ULN2803 10K OUT L EEN OUTI4 17 M8 T g mem ous Re 3 gt 16 M at ff gt y OUTIS 4 15 M9 7 a7 wui E OUTS 5 4 M aan gt ae ee gi ee Deg 13 MSP mom l a KY OUTS 7 2 M an g awi Hii e KY our RU gt or Il M 10 1024V R223 2K U201 ouri3 R208 10K ipi 18 MLO a oun PP gt 17 U am Pa OUT 3 16 Ml a gt g R211 OUTI6 il 4 LY 15 UOl a g ani E on 2 5 gt 14 S asi ee our Dey 13 03 mem Hii a Y a ES 7 Dey 12 S02 msm OUTO Sol E Pg a 1024V 9 R228 R235 2K2 2K2 JOGND 286 024V OD8 y 0208 o ODIO A y7 0210 u 4 on E OT 0D13 o4 i os J Os is 0216 0D17 Ay AR 0217 000 a MA Oo D A gt 4 ZA 0202 wo INEA o O O O E R ODS WG 0205 OD6 es 007 0 1 YX wn 5VGND OUTS OUTY OUTIO OUTII OUTI2 OUTI3 OUTI4 OUTI5 OUTI6 OUTI7 OUTO OUTI OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUTS OUT6 OUT SVGND SVGND ODI16 5 VGND OD18 SVGND 0D20 SVGND 0D22 SVGND 0D24 3VGND 0D26 SVGND 0D28 SVGND 0D30 SVGND Al Bl Cl A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 AS B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 Al B7 C7 A B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 Ald B10 C10 All Bll Cll Al2 B12 C12 Al3 B13 C13 Al4 Bl4 C14 AlS BIS C15 Al6 B16 C16 Al7 Bl7
45. 3 The following programs are introduced the explanation of process monitor In the following program if the UlO5 UIOG pin are connected to detection signal output signal UOO5 107 N0010 r7000 r1005 or r1006 N0020 if r7000 0 then r2005 0 N0030 r7010 1 N1000 GOO 2300 X200 pin in the machining process when UlO5 UIO6 are 0 the system is required to output 0 from UOO5 pin and output 1 in other instance O monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 r1006 If two signals r1005 r1006 are zero at the same time UOO5 outputs zero Opening 0 monitor by mode 1 when it meets the requirement UOO5 outputs zero Orientate to the initial point N1010 GOO X180 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 N1030 G01 X0 N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Cut outer circle Cut off Back to initial point N1060 M97 P1000 z N1070 M02 7 3 4 Multi statement Global Monitoring Function The execution function of multi statement global monitoring is mainly used for controlling the feeder machine lt can be carried out the feed preparation instead of wasting time while the workpiece is machined so that the working efficiency is enhanced The new version is not only performed the more complicated global monitoring program but also increased several subsequent execution statements with gt The following program are described the usage of the multi statement global monitoring It is supposed that the system will ou
46. 3 Program Reference Point Return Command format G30 P2 Z W _ X U Y V _ Z X Y axis rapidly traverse to the 2 reference position of program return by a middle point simultaneously G30 P3 Z W _ X U _Y V _ Z X Y axis rapidly traverse to the 3 reference position of program return by a middle point simultaneously G30 P2 Z W X U _ Z X axis rapidly traverse to the 2 reference position of program return by a middle point simultaneously G30 P3 Z W _ X U _ Z X axis rapidly traverse to the 3 reference position of program return by a middle point simultaneously G30 P2 Z W _ Zaxis returns to the 2 reference position by a middle point the other axes disabled G30 P3 Y V _ Y axis returns to the 3 reference position by a middle point the other axes disabled Field and range X Z Y Absolute coordinates of middle point U W V Relative movement from starting point to middle point P2 specifies QM program reference point P3 specifies gr program reference point X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm P 2or3 Relative parameters Main parameters related to G30 P003 P008 Explanation 1 The execution mode of the command is the same that of G00 Relative parameter is referred to GOO 2 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 3 Z XIY can select single axis two axis or three axis simultaneously to execute 2 3 program reference point return 179 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Contro
47. 4 11 Motor Drive Bit Parameter _ _ P405 Motor drive __ bit parameter P405 password level 2 ee lS The parameter sets the motor working state and whether there is X or Y axis control d7__Z motor direction d6__X motor direction d5_ Y motor direction 0 Positive 1 Negative setting the motor direction parameter can change the motor rotation direction without changing others The tool post actual movement direction is the same with the system defining direction d4 Z drive unit alarm level d3__X drive unit alarm level d2 __Y drive unit alarm level 0 LOW Drive unit alarms when Z X Y drive unit alarm input signal is LOW 1 HIGH Drive unit alarms when Z X Y drive unit alarm input signal is HIGH d1__ controllable axis Y 0 Without Y forbid using Y movement command 1 With Y the controllable axis has Y permits Y movement command d0__ controllable axis X 0 Without X forbid using X movement command 1 With X the controllable axis has X permits X movement command 106 Chapter Four System Operation 4 6 4 12 Parameters Related to Other Interfaces P412 P330 P332 Relative interfaces _ bit parameter P412 password level 2 PEPE A AA d7 external start pause signal 0 None the external start and pause signals are invalid 1 Have the external start and pause signals are valid d6__external feed hold knob 0 None the system external feed spindle hold knob interf
48. 5 6 The value format of G98 G99 must be matched with that of F word Otherwise the system issues Missing information G98 G99 is the modal command and it keeps valid before being changed The single F command can be taken as the new feedrate G98 is the initial state of the system and the system automatically sets to G98 during initialization mm min When F 0 the system suspends and prompts an alarm message when executing the machining the program In G99 when the spindle speed is 0 the feed automatically pauses and the system displays Pause the spindle speed is 0 It keeps the state till the spindle speed is not zero then by pressing CYCLE START key again the system recovers the execution In G99 generally when the spindle is just started the system should delay a proper period of time to wait the spindle speed to become stable and then executes the cutting Otherwise the 185 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual system fails to detect the spindle speed displaying Pause the spindle speed is 0 Example N0100 G98 F800 define the feed per minute F feedrate 800 mm min N0160 F50 F feedrate 50 mm min N0200 G99 F2 1 set the feed per rev F feedrate 2 1 mm rev N0250 F0 56 F feedrate 0 56 mm rev 4 17 G31 Skip The execution of G31 is the same as that of G01 and the difference is that G31 constantly check the external input interface signal G311
49. AUTO and JOG 0 Yes 1 No Note Alarm record is just a look up function in special occasions do not use it in normal circumstances 110 Chapter Four System Operation 4 6 4 14 Interface Parameter__ P500 P566 The system has the main devices including the spindle the chuck the tailstock the tool post control and function and the additional device control and check function The former has the fixed signal pin and the system does not set the fixed signal pin for the additional device determined by the manufacturer according to the actual condition of the machine When the unused signal of the main device has been released the system adds the signal required by the additional device by setting the interface parameter so the system can control and check the additional device The system judges whether the interface parameter covers the input and output interface P500 P510 are output interface parameter and P511 P540 P557 P566 are input interface parameter Parameters P541 P556 are used for the multiple station tool number signal encoding and for setting the tool number check signal The interface parameter value is not O i e covering the input or output interface the setting value is the serial number of Common signal name e pin corresponding to the covered input or output Common signal name The interface initial value is O e the system does not use the parameter function i e does not cover the pin Whe
50. C gt 18 PULS SIGN 19 SIGNI y C gt 21 COME g COM _ RTPI y 10 rstp tf O 99 Metal shell Zero 29 GSKDA98 drive unit O i lt jk Encoder feedback signal PE a V Motor power supply P pil AC servo motor t PULS Zpu PULS I Zdir Zdir SIGN 14 15 C Zen SIGN SON 24 COM Zalm AIM L ov COM 10 Metal shell gt RSTP DG DG LO xo 130 gt 18 pal O 8 y E com rstp 1 O Metal shell Zero 2 6 19 7 D 10 GSKDA98 drive unit AC 220V _ Encoder fe edback signal H i Motor power supply AC servo motor Three phase AC200V 271 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Connection table between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit GSK96 X DA98 drive unit Signal interface SON Alm DG pc GSK96 Z DA98 drive unit Signal interface zas eos X2 tool post socket Notice When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation
51. Don t insert USB device Insert USB device Fail to find valid content USB device doesn t create the Create the valid catalogue and file in or file specified catalogue and file USB device USB save file fail USB saving failure Save again or check USB device No enough memory in No enough U disc rest room Change the bigger U disc or check U USB disc to release more space Create content fail U disc failure in creating the Check USB device and create the specified catalogue appointed catalogue again Create file fail l T Check USB device or create the Failure in creating file dE l specified format file again USB read file fail USB is failed in reading file ssi the USB device or read file Fail to find dedicated USB is failed in reading catalogue Check the USB device or create this content or file list catalogue again File is too big Too large file File is too large modify the file Fail to open file Can t open the file in specified Check the file name suffix if they can catalogue or file is destroyed match the rule or check the USB equipment create the file again No dedicated file The file in specified list does not Create the file in specified file exist or has been destroyed 199 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Alarm Parameter number exceeds the Change the parameter number into range Invalid character in parameter Delete the invalid character in the E015 Para NO not sta
52. E240 Too many program Excessive nested call in the program Modify source program nested calling layers E241 254 not use traverse 254 program has used motion command Modify command or system com parameter E243 The data behind the decimal point decimal exceeds the limited range the decimal point data decimal followed this field the data front E252 No replacing variable in Commands such as M81 Ir1 are used Modify source command M command E254 Forbidden M3 M4 com The M3 M4 command is used in M47 Using the command after in M47 state change the state E255_ Undefined A E E257 No using the type of In the special situation this kind of Modify source command variable variable is used in illegal E258 Beveling data is too big So large chamfer data can t be carried in Reduce the chamfer data this path E259 E260 No Y axis traverse in When the Y axis has exchanged the a the program according M48 spindle the moving command can t be to the real situation used in Y axis wrongly explanation it must be used carefully Modify program E265 No calling in monitor Call command is used in process monitor Using jumping P or other macro r7000 r7009 commands method to control E266 The pointer variable points to the Check the program then invalid NO forbidden variable modify it E268 Traverse is 0 retract too When making the G90 and G94 command Modify program big traverse amount is program the starting point and end
53. Forbid starting the Perform the M14 to retract the spindle E391 spindle in M13 Start the spindle in the M13 state clamping signal and then start the state spindle Fail to perform the M13 M14 because Perform the M13 M14 after the spindle movement is completed EnaA the spindle is PER o state execution is completed performing now Ele ee at Denon Me e ueo Modify the programming correct the E393 monitoring y prog 9 command in G09 error G09 Y1 forbid to move Y axis state 210 Chapter Six Alarm Message No Forbid the Y axis movement command in M13 The spindle start and Y axis is interlocked with the spindle Set the bit parameter P410 d4 0 or clamping when P410_d4 1 Try to perform the M14 firstly and then the Y state perform the Y axis movement in axis movement command M13 spindle clamping state Forbid the Y axis movement command in M47 state The system output API LEVEL signal is System in the M47 H1 state g 6 5 2 Relative Alarm in Executing Statement i e E400 E499 Alarm in statement program means in the program by statement the alarm is made by the wrong statement command in executing the workpiece program the alarm can be resolved by inputting the correct command d Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting E400 E l The system doesnt evaluate and set the Monitor variable not fe l T judgment condition to the process monitor Modify workpiece program initi
54. Four System Operation 4 3 2 5 Copy a Part Program Copy the current program content to another one new and the new becomes the current program as follows 1 Press INPUT key 2 Inputting the program name which is not in the program list press INPUT key and the current program content is copied to the new program The new program is taken the current one Note When the input program name exists the system prompts already exists and waits the prompt losing to input a new one Example Example copy the current program 000 to 005 as follows Press key input INPUT 5 INPUT The copy operation is completed 4 3 3 Part Program Communication The communication of part programming includes the sending and receiving the part program The sending mode is the system outputs to U disc CNC USB the receiving mode is U disc inputs to the system USB CNC Press hp2 in the program catalog search window the system opens the U disc to enter the communication interface 4 3 3 1 Sending Part Programs CNC USB USB communication 1 After entering USB communication mode the system first checks whether a U disc has been inserted If no U disc is inserted the system displays a prompt message box prompting If a USB disc containing a folder named C001PRO has been inserted and there are CNCxxx TXT files in the folder the files will be listed on the USB file directory box If there are no CNCxxx TXT files in the COO1PRO fol
55. Group ge Offset Brecher ee error 121 4 7 3 3 Clearing Cisse Dala pe ee ee ee eer ee errr nce errr or 122 48 Diagnosis Working Mods ni di AAA 122 4 8 1 Interface Signal Search a er er eee er rr cr er err rer rere te 122 4 8 2 Interface Signal Name Display Explanations a ee ee er rer re rer ree 123 4 8 3 Input Interface Diagnosis Explanation Tec eee ee er rT eT ee ee eer tr ee er re re rere 123 48 4 Output Interface Diagnosis Explanation oer ee ae 123 48 5 Output Interface Operation Function PF 124 4 8 6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Check r a ee eee 124 4 8 7 Diagnosis hp2 Function O 125 4 8 7 1 Alarm Record Display o E O A E 125 A8 1 2 Alarm Record SOAarc h eiii iran rE rA EE IEEE LEAR 126 4 8 7 3 Alarm Record hp2 FUNCION riada dd iba 127 48 14 The Deletion of Alarm Record riscos ida iii 127 4 8 8 Machine Miscellaneous Function Control o ELLE 127 CHAPTER FIVE USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION c gt 00cocorocccccncococononcocococoocococococcocococcccocococosoos 129 BA USB COmmuniCAtiON eiii daneedeeispiavesssesawnrderbatebcscueeswar eneseierawsedas 129 5 1 1 USB Operation Sorte et ee Tr eT Ore rere re Tr eT ee Tr eer ree rr er ee ee er 129 5 1 2 USB File Catalog Requirements errr Ti ie eee eee eee rere ere re reer eee eee 129 PROG PUA III Guess cere eee eee eee 131 CHAPTER ONE PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL ceeeeecreccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccccccocs 131 1 1 Coordinate Axis and lts DIFECtION eissicsrir rr ir 131 12 Machine Coordinate Syst
56. Jog working mode without using G50 After the corresponding axes execute the reference point return the fronts of their machine coordinates have the blue icons as the prompts 2 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 3 The execution mode of the command is the same that of G00 Relative parameter is referred to G00 G50 4 Z X Y can select single axis two axis or three axis simultaneously to execute the program reference point return 177 GGSK I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Example G26 Z150 X100 Y100 return to program reference point through the middle point 2150 X100 Y100 G26 U0 X directly returns to program reference point and other axes do not move 4 11 G28 Return to Machine Zero Machine Reference Point Command format G28 Z W _ Zrapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 X U _ X rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 Y V _ Y rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move Field and range X Z Y Absolute coordinates of middle point U W V Relative movement from starting point to middle point X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Relative parameter Main parameters related to G28 P021 P026 P109 P110 P111 P406 and P407 Explanation 1 When the machine zero check devices zero switch and deceleration switc
57. M02 N1000 M51 The start sign of M51 command N1010 r2031 0 Loader forward N1020 if r1005 1 then P1000 If it detects that UIO5 is 1 then start the cycle check N1030 M99 M51 command is end N2000 M52 The start sign of M62 command N2010 r2031 1 Loader backing N2020 if r1006 1 then P2000 lf it detects that UI06 is 1 then start the cycle checking N2030 M99 M52 command is end 8 1 1 Customization Command Program Format In No 254 program the system customization command program format is input a set program which starts from M50 to M99 in the program this block is formed M50 command The other block 241 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual which start by M51 M74 and end by M99 is formed M51 M74 command Format N1000 M51 N1010 r2031 0 N1020 if r1005 1 N1030 M99 Explanation The start sign of M51 command Loader forward then P1000 If it detects that UlO5 is 1 then start the cycle checking s M51 command is end The customization command is mainly formed by statement when G code want to be added in it the position parameter P404_d2 1 must be set it also is to say M51 command allows the G motion code otherwise the system alarms 8 2 Customization Command Store P254 The customization command harden is in No 254 program So No 254 program also is called the user defined command store
58. Modal and Safe Protection oooorccconccnnnonccanonoconononocaconaconannncnnannn os 9 AAA Power Onain ad 9 AAD Powar O fa aa 10 4 1 3 System Program Initial and Modal sererrreerenencnnnnnnnnononnncnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnenrnnnnss 10 4 1 3 1 The Initial State and Modal of the System A Is 10 4132 Initial Mode and Modal of Program AN O 10 414 Safe Protection esas att idad 41 AeA Hardware Limit Protection sisi ea Rha ors calgon N IREA 11 4142 Software Limit Safe POLO ClO hy misas ami 12 4143 ESP Alarm Emergently Stopping the System ES 13 ATAA Drive UNICA Mt E AAA 15 ASAS COMER NS A AAA AA AA 15 4146 Switching off Power Supply ta rl odo e ca os 15 4147 Reset Operation A 16 42 CNC Working MOTO SOCIO CUOTA AA RA AAA aaa 17 4 3 EDIT Working MOE errena a A AS AA E A 17 4 3 1 Part Program Catalog Search cc nn 18 4 3 2 Selection Creation Deletion Rename and Copy a Part Program rrrrerecececennnnnnnnnnnnss 18 4 3 2 1 Selecting and Creating a Part Program idad ones 19 4322 Delete a Part Program o A ER 19 4 3 2 3 Deleting All Part Programs EESO ESETE E caco 20 4324 Renaming a Part Program AR RR 20 4325 Copy a Part Program Dd 21 43 3 Part Program COMMUNICAtION erre enn 21 4 3 3 1 Sending Part Programs CNC USB iS 21 4 3 3 2 Receiving Part Programs USB CNC EEEO EE AEE E aces ata A AE E ental arti 22 4 3 3 3 TXT Part Program Standard Formatin U DISO tiscsteisssewteratesseeaetianectcedcarecectdnssswssess ei 22 4 3 4
59. Modify the workpiece 211 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual variabler4015 po programming correct the error Fail to write the Write the READ variable r4016 Modify the workpiece variabler4016 programming correct the error Hyto modity m6 Try to modify the READ macro variable Modily me workpiece read variable programming correct the error Alarm end Alarm ends when monitoring command is aie Releasing alarm monitoring performed 212 Chapter Seven Statement Programming CHAPTER SEVEN STATEMENT PROGRAMMING This system has provided the program method similar to the advance language it can realize the variable assignment arithmetic operation logic judgment and conditional transfer Using the statement and variable program can come true the function which can t be made by the common G and M command 7 1 Variable 1 1 1 Variable Expression Method The variable value can be set by the program command assignment or by key directly Multi variable can be used in a program and they can be distinguished by variable number The variable expression method 66 9d Using small letter r variable number four digit integer to express the precursor zero can be omitted Such as r5 named number 5 variable r1003 named number 1003 variable 7 1 2 Classification of Variable The variable in this system can be divided by function and purpose as common variable pointer variable inp
60. N0070 GOO X13 NOO80 Z5 Z returns to the start point NO090 M30 171 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 5 2 G34 Variable Pitch Thread Cutting Command format G34 Z W PCE Q R_ H Z axis variable pitch thread cutting G34 X U PCE Q R_ H X axis variable pitch thread cutting G34 Y V PCE Q_ R_ H_ Y axis variable pitch thread cutting Field P metric thread lead P range 0 001mm 500 000mm E inch thread lead E range 0 060 25400 000 tooth inch When P E is the positive it means the axial thread and Z is the thread axis it is the negative it means the end face thread and X is the thread axis X U Z W Y V The absolute relative coordinate of thread end X Z Y U W and V range 9999 999mm 9999 999mm the movement value of each thread direction along Z X and Y axes cannot set to 0 Q Initial angle which is O if not specified it is used to thread part Q range 0 360 000 R pitch incremental or decrement value per revolution of the spindle The pitch decreases when R is negative the pitch increases when R is positive R range 500mm pitch 500 00mm pitch When R is set to 0 the pitch does not change H lt means the mark of the execution method each one means different meaning H_d H_d2 H_d0 Reserved it is 00000000 by default H 00000000 11111111 H_d1 0 pitch skip increases or reduces after the spindle rotates one t
61. N1000 111 MO3 M10 GOO X50 M08 When the parameter setting can be opened the spindle as long as it firstly clamps P402_d5 0 the system follows the interlock relationship and its execution process is as follows 1 Simultaneously start executing T11 GOO X50 M10 M08 2 Execute MO3 after M10 is executed 3 Execute the next block after all are executed When the parameter setting can be opened without clamping firstly P402_d5 1 the execution process is as follows 1 Simultaneously start executing T11 G00 M10 MO8 MO3 2 Execute the next block after all are executed All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the longest single execution time Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block and rapidly jumping block to execution P401_ d3 1 synchronism P401_d2 1 rapidly jumping block to execution In the mode the system rapidly skips to the next block after the axis motion commands of the current block are do not wait other M S T having been executed Note 1 The system follows the rule wait the others to be executed when other commands in the same group are executed 2 The system meets The command only in an alone block it waits to execute it after the previous is executed and it executes the next block after The command only in an alone block is executed 3 When the user needs to execute the next after the previous all commands are executed he needs to insert one G04 DO command
62. P value P017 zero again release the alarm E309 Y machine coordinate Zm exceeds Y negatively moves in JOG working machine i aN l oe the positive software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to w limit M value P019 zero again release the alarm E310 i X machine coordinate Zm exceeds Z positively moves in JOG working Z machine e i i ie the negative software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to software limit alarm value P016 zero again release the alarm an X machine coordinate Zm exceeds X positively moves in JOG working machine i Ea the negative software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to TS limit m value P018 zero again release the alarm E312 Y machine coordinate Zm exceeds Y positively moves a JOG working machine Ae mode or set he machine the negative software limit alarm ale limit alarm coordinate machine zero return again value PO20 release the alarm E313 Z negatively moves in JOG working Z nose software Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm positive limit alarm value P009 setting program reference point return again release the alarm E314 X axis negatively moves in JOG working X nose software X tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm positive limit alarm value P011 setting program reference point return again release the alarm E315 Y negatively moves in
63. P309 In spindle speed after pressing the spindle start key when the spindle is in JOG state Unit mm min P309 0 the JOG output speed is the same that of M03 M04 Used lines for the spindle gear control __ auxiliary parameter P310 The parameter limits the used output controlled line quantity of spindle gear control up to 4 control lines When the control line quantity is less than 4 the system only uses the low bit control line and the used high big control line is used to others The used line quantity 0 the system does not output The used line quantity 1 only S01 outputs The used line quantity 2 only S02 S01 output The used line quantity 3 only S03 S02 S01 output The used line quantity 4 S04 S03 S02 SO1 output Frequency spindle gear shifting time 1 2 ms __ auxiliary parameter P311 P312 When the spindle is the frequency M41 M44 spindle gear shifting time is shown as follows Unit ms Refer to OPERATION 4 4 JOG working mode Spindle gear shifting interval time ms __ auxiliary parameter P313 This parameter set the interval from original gear signal being cancelled to new gear signal being output Unit ms Output voltage in spindle gear shifting mV __ auxiliary parameter P314 95 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Output voltage in the spindle gear shifting Unit mV See Section 4 4 3 3 Spindle S Command Rotation Speed Control in Part I Operation for
64. Parameter Working Mode The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 212 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 5 7 Connection Layout Between CNC and Panasonic Drive Unit Connection layout between CNC and Panasonic MINAS V serial drive unit X connection layout Reference only Less than 15m shielded cable System 11 dy vut 3 E 5 o Adir 13 A Adir 7 Xen 2C pa 1 Xalm 10 lt cd Metal shell ES oe System 12 O Z connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable Zpu T Zdir 14 i A 10 O Metal shell gt T 24V Zen Zalm ov X2 130 ZO MINAS V PULSI oa ee e _ Three phase ne 4 nee Encoder feedback signal AC200V SIGNI SIGN2 PES Come W otor power supply AIM 2 37 DO CCWL 5 T OWL e AC servo motor Y L3c INH 33 COM 41 pe O 5O Metal shell Z O 19 MINAS V PULSI I Pec La Three phase i L2c le ae 4 Encoder feedback signal AC200V SIGNI SIGN2 PE iG U po
65. Press ESC and the system returns to the auto initial state and the pointer points to the first block of the current program Note In executing the fixed cycle command the single block stop is valid after each step of the fixed cycle is completed Cycle end stop In continuously executing the program press X Y Z axis shift key and then the system displays CYCLE STOP ON and the system displays CYCLE STOP after M20 is executed 4 5 6 2 External Feed Spindle Hold Knob The external feed spindle hold knob is valid in AUTO working mode Whether the external feed spindle hold knob is valid is controlled by P412_d6 P412 d6 1 the system external feed spindle hold knob is valid the input signal is received by MXZ1 MXZ2 P412 d6 0 the system external feed spindle hold knob is invalid the pin of input signal can be used as others External feed spindle hold knob introduction The system has an external interface of feed spindle hold knob Move or stop the spindle and the slider when the knob is placed on the different position Use the knob to control conveniently the starting stopping of spindle and the slide in debugging the program There are three positions of feed hold knob and its function as follows 2 1 3 AS Note see the specific symbol specification of the external feed spindle hold knob Feed hold knob Position 1 permit the spindle to rotate and the slider to traverse Position 2 permit the spindle to rotate an
66. Refer to OFFSET working mode when there is X or Y Through tool setting the system will modify Z offset X offset Y offset of the specified tool offset number Notes before tool setting 1 According to the above confirm the Offset to the Offset number and confirm the content of Imaginary tool nose number in advance 2 For the same tool nose memorize Z offset value and X offset value to the same one offset number otherwise it causes the serious result 3 Generally it is better to use the sequence for No 1 Offset number with No 1 tool No 2 Offset number with No 2 tool which is convenient to memorize them 4 Firstly execute the Offset number and then tool setting Example firstly execute the T49 command when the system memorizes the Offset in No 4 tool to No 9 Offset number 5 The system executes the tool setting when the workpiece coordinate system is normal otherwise the result is not correct The system has the trial cutting tool setting as follows 9 Trial tool setting method method 1 Format Input k MEASURED VALUE ENTER TOOL OFFSET NUMBER ENTER Modify the current Z tool nose coordinate into the new one en start the sp Actual operation steps of tool setting as follows When the system controls multiple axes press cae key to select the desired axis for tool setting Install the trial cutting workpiece on the machine execute the tool setting operation of each tool 55 CGS I H1
67. Set to delay 50ms time if r4011 lt 2 then P440 else P434 Delay 50ms time r2011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time if r4011 lt 5 then P470 else P460 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW in position delayed time if r4010 lt 5 then P480 else P474 Tool post CCW in position delayed time if r1003 0 then P490 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end 245 CGSR IT Hist 246 NO500 NO510 NO520 N0530 N0540 N0550 N0560 N0570 N0580 N0582 N0584 N0590 NO600 N0610 N0620 N0622 N0624 N0630 N0640 N0650 N0652 NO660 N0670 N0680 NO690 N0692 NO700 N0710 N0720 N0730 N0740 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual M64 Start to call M64 and execute the tool change 144 Target tool number if r1004 0 then P650 else P530 The current tool is consistent with target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation 2012 0 Tool post clockwise rotates r4010 r39 Set the change tool time to 30s if r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P570 Judge the change tool time is too long or not if r1004 0 then P580 else P560 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms if r4011 lt 2 then P590 else P584 Delay 50ms r2011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool
68. The difference between the process monitoring and the multi statement global monitoring is that the former performs only one monitoring and the later performs more 2 During the monitoring subsequent commands use gt r5008 100000 199999 to carry out the delay of the 0 99 999 second and the front of 1 is delay mark 3 If the main programming is controlled and then turn to execute the N 1000 it will write as gt P1000 in the following statements 4 If the main programming has been performed when it meets the M02 M30 M20 it is related to the parameter P419_d5 bit whether closes the monitoring if it is set to 0 close it and clear the task description 5 User should waiting from the completion of the monitoring even the end program is controlled but the resetting P419 d4 0 and ESP does not need to wait till the end monitoring statement is performed 7 3 5 Pulse Monitoring r7100 In this system there are other four pulse monitor variable with number 0 3 in turn They specially engage the pulse count of input signal Each pulse monitor variable has a monitoring register and a management register separately the corresponding number in turn are as following Pulse monitoring variable number 0 3 number in turn Pulse monitoring register number r7100 r7103 corresponding the monitor variable number in turn Pulse monitoring management register number r7110 r7113 corresponding the monitor variable number in turn
69. X50 Z100 Rapidly retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r min NO110 End of program spindle stopping and coolant OFF 4 15 G22 G80 Program Part Cycle In the course of actual machining for the part of workpiece or the formed parts the part cycle command is employed to simplify the programming The cycle body of part cycle is defined by part programming The coordinates of end point are determined after executing this cycle Code format G22L_ Cycle body program G80 A Field and range G22 defines the starting of cycle body L defines the cycle times range 1 9999 G80 defines the end of cycle body Explanation Command execution process G22 defines the starting of cycle body and L defines the cycle times 2 Execute the cycle body program 8 When G80 cycle body ends if L is not 0 it reduces by 1 and then the system executes the cycle body program again if L is O the cycle ends and the system executes the following program in order Note 1 G22 and G80 must be used at the same time G22 and G80 can be embedded 2 The subprogram can be called in the loop body It can have M96 and M97 Regarding as the component which shape has already determined and needs to the roughing using G22 and G80 programming is very convenient and can improve the processing efficiency 3 For axis needing creating the cycle offset the program in the cycle body uses the relative programming There is the offset between
70. alarm input Drive unit gt CNC terminal Za 24V X Z drive power supply 24V 1h AVE ND Ea pulse positive terminal CNC Drive unit 11 You o pulse positive terminal CNC Drive unit X positive terminal CNC Drive unit ae 6 Z Z positive terminal CNC Drive unit 1 Yi X axis enabled CNC Drive unit 5V drive power supply 15 7 ZALM Z drive unit alarm input Drive unit CNC terminal X3 motor DB15 male pap ee a hi a ae aan en oe ee er 3 5 1 Signal Definition 3 5 2 Technical Specifications e Max pulse output frequency 500kHZ e Pulse width 2us 3 5 3 Equivalent Circuit 3 5 3 1 Drive Unit Alarm Signal XALM ZALM YALM P405_d4 P405_d3 P405_d2 set the drive unit alarm level is LOW or HIGH The drive unit must use the following methods to provide the signals 265 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Alarm signal OV CNC side Drive unit side 3 5 3 2 Enable Signal Xen Zen Yen When the CNC is working normally the enable signal output is valid the enable signal is connected with OV The circuit diagram is shown as follows TLP181 TLP181 OV CNC side Drive unit side 3 5 3 3 Pulse Signal and Direction Signal XP XP ZP ZP are pulse signals Xdir Xdir Zdir Zdir are direction signals The signals in the two groups are difference output the external should use 26LS32 and the circuit method layout is as follows
71. an empty display window 219 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual call the display window which has opened last time 12 Erasure the content from the current cursor position to the line end the cursor position don t change send a set of character string to the display window 1000 1099 the mantissa 00 99 are character string number it at most can display 100 sets character string 2000 2999 Send a alarm number to the display window display alarm XXX the range of XXX is from O to 999 110001 110009 Set the line number of the display window line 1 to 9 the system windows default is 6 110010 110040 Set the displayed character number in each line 10 to 40 the system windows default is 30 120000120255 Set the window grounding or character grounding 0 to 255 can be chose the system defaults white the value is 255 130000 130255 Set the character color 0 to 255 are available the system defaults black the value is 0 140000 Set the size of the character 16 16 140001 Set the size of the character 8 16 system widows default Note when the assignment exceed the range it is ineffective Use R5002 assignment is to set the display window register command the data is uncertainly when read the register it can t be used for the conditional judge Example ro002 1 Open an empty display window ro002 49 send the character 1 to display window
72. batch machining when the rough bar uneven length it s hard to confirm the machining start point Suppose a sensor is installed in the tool then the system can use the sensor to confirm the machining start point In the following program if UIOS corresponding pin is connected to the system detection signal when the tool is far away the workpiece UlO05 1 when the tool is near the workpiece Ul05 0 when the tool is moving to the direction of near workpiece from far away it is stopped at the position Ul05 0 and confirm this point to be the machining start point 105 N0010 r7000 r1005 0 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 it forms the monitor description with nether judgment statement N0020 if r7000 0 then P1000 If the signal r1005 is monitored to be Zero then turn to P1000 program running N0030 GOO Z300 X200 At first orientate to the initial point N0040 GOO X180 N0050 r7010 1 Opening 0 monitor by mode 1 when it meets the requirement stops the motion immediately and turn P1000 NO060 GOO W 100 F1000 The tool is closing the workpiece from far away N0070 r7010 0 If the last command is finished but nothing can be checked then close the 0 monitor N0080 GOO Z300 X200 Back to initial point N0080 M02 N1000 G50 Z200 X180 Set this point to be the machining start point set the workpiece coordinate system again N1020 G01 Z90 F500 Cut outer circle N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1040 G51 Revert th
73. be effective The M33 function is not expanded to be effective Troubleshooting Modify it to the gear position value in correct range or modify the P410 parameter Set the interface parameter P500 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P500 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P501 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P501 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P517 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P517 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P518 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P518 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P409 d4 is effective or change the program command Set the interface parameter P409 d4 is effective or change the program command Modify P410 d6 1 frequency conversion or P410_d7 0 electrical level or change the program command Modify P410 d6 1 frequency conversion or P410_d7 0 electrical level or change the program command P410_d6 1 frequency Modify conversion or P410_d7 0 electrical level or change the program command Modify P410 d6 1 frequency conversion or P410_d7 0 electrical level or change the program command Set P506 1 or change the program command Set P506 1 or change the
74. block 2 5 Block Skip Symbol and Comment EL Insert skip symbol or comment symbol before the block which needs not to be executed and not be deleted during execution Then the system skips this block in the program being executed When a comment symbol is added behind each block the user can add comments for each block the comments are edited by only English letters and digitals on CNC and can be edited by Chinese on PC The CNC can display Chinese comments after programs are downloaded to CNC The system skips the block with fat the line beginning to execute the next one The system skips the block with at the line beginning or block beginning to execute the next one Input at the end of a line and then input simple comments Notes 1 Press W to insert or P 2 The block contents behind become green 3 The first line of the block adds and the contents of this block will become green 4 The block in the cursor displays light green other than the 1 item that is regarded as prompt the blocks in other items are orange 5 The Chinese character notes followed with must be input by USB the system keyboard can not input but the system can display the Chinese characters 6 Note that the inputted is half angle input format by USB and the system does not support the full angle input format 2 6 Program Structure A block consists of commands arraying of o
75. block of the 146 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions subprogram must be the subprogram return command M99 When the subprogram does not follow the main program it must command M97 to transfer the program Notes 1 M98 is used together with M99 and the subprogram call one time instead of L L gt 1 times is executed when M98 is used alone 2 When the program has M99 without M98 the program does not end till M99 3 M98 M99 is executed in the subprogram call i e they can be embedded the embedding can up to 18 layer 3 1 15 1 M99 Increase L Address Character The times of the program call can be altered by M99 L command The resolution range of L is 0 9999 L 0 means that the call modification times is 0 and the subprogram call ends Example NO000 GOO X100 Z50 N0010 MO3 S01 N0020 GO X66 Z15 F500 N0030 M98 P0070 L5 Call subprogram for 5 times N0040 GO X100 Z50 N0050 M05 NO060 M02 Main program ends N0070 GO U 4 N0080 G01 Z 10 F80 N0090 U20 Z 25 N0100 GO U2 Z1 N0110 U 22 N0120 if r1005 0 then P0140 Ifthe No 5 input pin is LOW and then turn to N0140 block N0130 M99 Subprogram return N0140 M99 L3 The modification of the subprogram call is 3 times Notice During the program performance M99 L cannot return at the same exit with the M98 command otherwise the repeated circular call may occur As follows M98 Pxxxx x Lxx M99 Lxx 3 1 16 M21 M22 M23 M24 User Output Control Comma
76. command expediently The system has provided 25 customization commands from M50 to M74 how many is need exactly is edited by the machine manufacturer The customization command must be edited in 254 program at first debug 254 program successfully in AUTO working mode then harden the program in EDIT working mode after the program is hardened successfully the hardened customization command can be used in AUTO mode or other program i e 000 253 otherwise the system will alarm that there is no customization command This chapter will express the written customization command method from example Program example It is supposed that the manufacturer install a loader in the machine UO31 output pin controls the forward and back of the loader when it is output 0 the loader goes ahead when it is output 1 the loader will go back checking the loader forward and back is in the place or not by UI05 UI06 inputting pin when the system has checked the UI05 is 0 the loader is in the forward place when the system has checked the UIOG6 is 0 the loader is in the back place in the example M51 command is used for controlling the loader forward an check if it is in position M52 command is used for controlling the loader backing and check if it is in the back place 204 N0010 M98 P1000 No 245 program starts execution call the M51command at first N0020 G04 D3 gt N0030 M98 P2000 Call M62 command N0040 G04 D3 N0050
77. command should be in the block H_ otherwise the system compilation can not be carried out d7 0 It stops immediately once inspect the meets condition H_d0 1 return this command start after stopping H_d7 1 It starts perform the G06 once inspect the meets condition if detect it again the G06 command will not stopped Example NO000 G00 Z102 X120 N0010 G66 Memorize the current coordinate value Z102 X120 N0020 G01 Z120 X130 NO030 G06 Z150 18 0 F300 H00000010 D3 The Z axis feeds to the Z150 based upon the F300 speed and delay 3s after reaching after that return to the Z102 memorized by G66 G06 Explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 Each G06 command can only start one axis feed if another axis needs to be started it is necessary to input another G06 command G06 stops feeding when the emergency stop button is pressed When the RESET key is pressed G06 motion mode is set by parameter P419_d0 When P419_d0 is set to 1 the system executes the standard reset function by pressing reset key which does not affect G06 feed When an axis enters G06 motion mode the axis automatically stops when it meets the soft limit if it meets the hard limit whether it is decelerated to stop or stopped immediately is set by parameter P402_d7 When G06 command is executed in JOG AUTO working mode the CYCLE DWELL key external pause button are invalid for G06 feed Refer to GOO for the other relative
78. cycle machine when L is omitted M20 indicates that the program ends and the system returns to the first block to execute repetitively and is used when the system or machine is checked 3 1 4 M30 End of Program Spindle OFF Cooling OFF Command format M30 End of program spindle OFF cooling OFF Explanation M30 indicates the program ends spindle is OFF and cooling is OFF and the system returns to the first block to wait 3 1 5 M03 M04 M05 Spindle Control Command format M03 spindle CW M04 spindle CCW M05 spindle stop Explanation The system is on the MOS initial state after the system is turned on MO3 MO4 output is enabled and held the spindle on the OPEN state during the execution of the M03 04 Close the spindle when performing MO5 Cancel the signal output of M03 M04 when the system is ESP See Section 4 4 3 1 Spindle Start Stop Control in OPERATION for details 141 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 1 6 M08 M09 Cooling control Command format M08 Cooling ON M09 Cooling OFF Explanation The system is on the MO9 state when it is turned on Perform the M08 and it is enabled and then open the coolant perform the MO9 cancel the M08 output and close the coolant Cancel the signal output of M08 when system is on the ESP state Refer to the Coolant control of Section 4 4 4 of OPERATION 3 1 7 M10 M11 M12 Clamping Releasing Workpiece Cance
79. e the feedrate function G98 G99 F command Command format G98 FXxXxx xxvx xxx Feedrate per minute G99 Frxxxkxk x xxx Feedrate per rev Explanation Cutting feed The system can control two axes i e X Z to move simultaneously making the tool motion path and the path defined by commands straight line arc consistent and the instantaneous speed in the tangent direction of motion path and F word consistent This kind of motion control is called cutting feed or interpolation The cutting feedrate is specified by word F When the system executes the interpolation command cutting feed it divides the cutting feedrate specified by F into X Z direction according to the programming path and simultaneously controls X Z instantaneous speed to make the vector resultant speed of speed in the twodirections equal to F command value d oF F is the combined speed of vector of X Y instantaneous speed 4 ld d dx is the X instantaneous d increment fxis the X instantaneous speed in X direction f d oF dz is the Z instantaneous d increment Z 2 2 fz is the Z instantaneous speed Jd d The command determines the cutting feedrate of the tool Feedrate function in feed per minute G98 is expressed with Fx x x x x x range 0 15000 000unit mm min Feedrate function in feed per rev G99 is expressed with Fx x x x x x range 0 15000 000unit mm r F is a modal value Once specified
80. edad di Poos 3 Y 3 program reference point mm 120 000 P009 3 Z tool positive tool nose software limit 112 O O Chapter Four System Operation 3 P014 Y tool negative software limit mm 8000 000 Z positive mechanical software limit mm 2 P018 X negative software limit mm 8000 000 HUL mm fo oo P025 2 Xzero offset value mm o Joo P026 2 Yzeroofisetvaluwe______ mm o _ Joio P027 2 Yaxis return zeroing coordinate fo o swg P028 2 Zaxisreturnzeroingcoordinate_____ 0 0 9999 P029 2 Xaxis return zeroing coordinate 0 079999 4 6 5 2 Motion Parameter List Stepper Servo Parameter Parameter oS ous pe User Parameter name initial initial Range No level value value P100 2 130000 P101 P102 130000 P103 1 10000 P104 1 10000 Z rapid feed acceleration ae 150 deceleration time ms ms 400 X rapid feed acceleration ae 400 deceleration time ms ms 400 0 0 P105 P106 P107 P108 Y rapid feed acceleration ms 400 deceleration time ms P109 P110 P111 P112 iti P113 P114 deceleration time in cutting feed ms Thread cutting acceleration time ms acceleration deceleration time in thread cutting ms P116 P116 P118 P119 2 G99 initial lines O Delay time when orientation is ms 100 switched to cutting ms a l zero return 2 zero return l zero return P123 P124 P125 o Q O gt y c Lo
81. em enenges and resolve the error to JOG or AUTO working mode 209 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual No eel Sal Mentor The parameter P532 is Set interface parameter P532 as a fixed nena undefined G31 input checking pin undefined E375 When the system is in the tapping in ae E Spindle doesnt JOG working mode the spindle ne ONES omer ie tapping i _ working mode when the spindle has stop doesn t stop or the rotate speed isn t S stopped and the rotate speed is zero E376 Manual tapping The manual tapping rotate speed is Reduce the tapping rotate speed in speed is too high too fast properly E377 Commands have Used the undefined command been undefined M50 M74 Modify the program External ase The external pause key is not E378 released during MANUAL AUTO Check the external pause signal signal abnormal ew mode switching Feed Hold switchs Workpiece program cannot be E379 executed when the feed hold switch Check feed hold signal not reset l is not cancelled l Workpiece program cannot be E380 Spindiergen noe executed when the spindle feed hold Check spindle feed hold signal switch is not reset o switch is not cancelled Do not perform the E381 M47 M48 if the Y The M47 M48 is performed when Y Modify the programming correct the axis IS still axis is still in the movement state error executed Do not open the spindle if the The spindle is started when
82. equals to 1 in fact it has modified the r1 in backup monitor N0030 r1 0 Set the initial value N0040 r7110 7 Set the count mode change from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus one N0050 r7110 2 Choose the monitor working mode 2 to open N1000 GOO Z300 X200 Oriented the initial point N1010 GOO X180 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 Cut outer circle N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Back to the initial point NO060 r7900 1 Read the common variable value r1in the monitoring backup area return N0020 if r1 1 then P2000 f r1 equals to 1 then turn to P2000 N1060 M97 P1000 N2000 M02 z 7 4 Attached List 1 4 1 ASCIIList DO ccoo ION code MONO coco MO ccoo MO co MOI coco code code code code code code Space 32 O 48 Q 64 P_ jpg 9 ep 12 B J66 33 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual A O oe O aa onen ne sor ee sode wa Value ol List code name code name code o o Light light pink 172 golden 248 hoar blue green See silvery green yellow brown orange ire white 240 Chapter Eight Customization Command Programming CHAPTER EIGHT CUSTOMIZATION COMMAND PROGRAM 8 1 Customization Command They system has a set of customization command except the offered standard M command The machine manufacturer can set some commands to come true the control of additive equipment however the operator can operate the additive equipment by input the
83. follows Move the cursor to the end of block INO020 or the beginning of blockIN0030 Press ENTER key and input M3 4 3 4 3 Deleting a Block Delete all content in one line as follows 1 Move the cursor the home of the required line 2 Press DELETE 8 Delete all content of the selected line 4 3 4 4 Inserting a Character in a Block Insert a character in one block as follows Press ALTER switch the input mode to insert mode i e the cursor is displayed to the down horizontal line 2 Move the cursor to the character following the required insert position 8 Input the required insert content 4 Insert the input content before the character pointed by the cursor Note The CNC system requires there is a blank space between fields in the program line In editing program the system can automatically judge and create a blank space but cannot automatically judge in the insert operation and at the moment the operator should input a blank to get the complete program Example Example insert 1 between X and 0inN0020 GO X0 0 20 0 As follows The cursor moves the under Ofollowing X input 1 displaying N0020 GO Z0 0 26 Chapter Four System Operation 4 3 4 5 Deleting a Character in a Block Delete the content which is not needed as follows Move the cursor to the character position which is needed to delete 2 Press DELETE to delete the character 4 3 4 6 Modifying a Block Content Modify the content of
84. forbidden _ Variable number meaning r6001 r6002 r6003 r6005 r6006 r6101 6164 6001 oo o 6002 o 6003 ooo o r6004 Z tool nose coordinate r6005 o o r6006 o 61016164 Explanation For the written variable the assignment is a command to modify the parameter in the same time it has kept the assignment and can be used for the read or conditional judge In the common situation don t use the system inner special variable The system inner special variable must be used carefully Example r6001 150000 modify the current Z axis machine coordinate to 150 000 If r6005 gt 3000 then P1500 if the current X tool nose coordinate is over 3 000 then turn to P1500 r6201 r6201 20 add 0 020 to the X tool compensation of the first set tool offset number The system inner special variable value range 32 digits with symbol 7 1 2 10 System special variable set 2 System special variable set 2 used for the monitor description Explanations 1 The workpiece counter is Read Write operation 2 If the r4009 instant interference function is used in the programming the G M character or blank displayed upper the left corner of the screen is indicated which programming branch transformation function is G means r4009 71 M means r4009 77 blank means r4009 0 Here the G or M is out of the relationship with the G and M commands which is only the button mark of the instant interference functi
85. incremental relative coordinates U W V fields or compound coordinates X W U Z V Y fields 1 7 1 Absolute Coordinate Values The absolute coordinate value is the distance to the coordinate origin i e the coordinate position of the tool traversing to the end point as Fig 1 2 r Y gt B B5 TT _ gE Ee A Fig 1 2 absolute coordinate value Tool traversing from A to B uses B coordinate values as follows X 25 Z 70 Radius programming in X direction 1 7 2 Relative Incremental Coordinate Values The relative coordinate value is the distance from the previous position to the next one i e the actual traversing distance of tool as Fig 1 3 Fig 1 3incremental coordinate values Tool traversing from A to B uses the incremental coordinates as follows U 15 W 40 Radius programming in X direction 133 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 7 3 Compound Coordinate Values The incremental coordinates and the absolute coordinates can be applied at the same time but one coordinate axis in one block can only be defined by one method i e X W or U Z can be applied but the X U Z W or Y V cannot be applied Tool traversing from A to B as Fig 1 3 X is applied with the absolute coordinate and Z with the incremental coordinate as X 25 W 40 134 Chapter Two Program Structure CHAPTER TWO PROGRAM STRUCTURE CNC command set ed
86. information of the parameter value can be opened or closed by setting the parameter P415 d7 when the parameter input is performed Other display When the input exceeds the modification parameter the system prompts in the parameter setting area In the parameter window when the successfully modified parameter has a mark before its parameter number the system prompts the modification is completed successfully After the system executes some operations the system displays the operation results and the successfully modified parameter has a mark before its parameter number prompting the modification having been completed successfully Parameter privilege For the different privilege the parameter which can be modified is displayed in yellow the forbidden is displayed in white The parameter update using USB to transmit the parameters is to modify the parameter data in the current privilege Privilege modification The icon m ahead of the parameter indicates the parameter is alterable under the current password level privilege A indicates the parameter is unalterable Privilege modification The privilege modification is controlled by the password and the password input is executed 81 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual when the system enters the parameter password input window Whether the password can be memorized is controlled by P416_d7 P416_d7 0 it is not memorized and the s
87. interference ability The input pins are not connected when the MPG has no MA MB 3 7 1 Signal Definition Standard signal name MPG BV 2 MAR MPG A pases IA PSA pa 5 Emy 6e wv 8 MB MPGB pulse X5 MPG DB9 Female 9 Emty 3 2 Interface Circuit Principle The circuit diagram is as follows When the axis moving is controlled by MPG the moving direction of MPG cannot be changed quickly otherwise the moving distance does not coincide with the MPG dial It should adopt the shield cable between the system and MPG When the MPG output signal is not in the difference output mode MA is not connected with MB 280 Chapter Four Use and Maintenance CHAPTER FOUR USE AND MAINTENANCE 4 1 Environmental Condition System storage transportation and working environmental condition as follows Item Working climate condition Storage transportation climate condition Environmental temperature OC 45 C 40 C 70C Relative humidity lt 90 RH no dewing lt 95 40 C 4 2 Earthing The correct earthing in the electricity device is important and its aims are as follows 1 Protect the operator from being hurt because of the abnormal conditions 2 Protect the electric devices from interference caused by the machine and electric devices nearby The interference may cause abnormality of the control device 3 The machine and system must be grounded firmly the neutral wiring in the charg
88. is regulated 0 100 To avoid machine to be impacted by uneven speed of MPG and the regulation range is less than 10 every time MPG stops 71 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual after it CW rotates MPG override becomes 0 After MPG CW rotates and rotates CCW or CCW rotates and then stops MPG override keeps the CCW instant override till MPG CW rotates CW rotates and then stops MPG controlling rapid feedrate override explanation In AUTO working mode before the machine program is not executed or the program pauses single block stops the cycle stops or the feed holds including spindle feed hold MPG indicator lights after pressing it means the system is in MPG controlling rapid feedrate override At right top the yellow means MPG control mode and current MPG override The system automatically cancels MPG controlling rapid feedrate override mode after each program is executed Note In the thread machining commands G32 G33 G34 the feedrate is determined by the spindle speed instead of F value and MPG override is invalid here 4 5 6 Interference Operation in Program Execution Process 4 5 6 1 Press Key Interference in Program Execution Interference operations in program execution ESP Immediately stops not continuously start the execution DWELL Press CYCLE START to continuously execute the program SINGLE BLOCK STOP Press CYCLE START to continuously execute after the block is com
89. it is not necessary to input it again It is the feed per minute G98 state upon power on and the tool actual traverse rate is controlled by F and feedrate override Tool actual cutting speed Fx feedrate override feed per minute Tool actual cutting speed Fx spindle speed x feedrate override feed per revolution Reduction formula of feed between per rev and per min Fm F xS Fm feed per min mm min F feed per rev mm r S spindle speed r min After the system is switched on the feedrate is O and F value is reserved after F is commanded The feedrate is O after FO is executed F value is reserved when the system resets and emergently 158 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions stops The system supplies 16 steps for spindle override 0 150 increment of 10 The feed override key on the system panel can regulate real time the actual feedrate override steps can be regulated in 0 150 and is reserved even if the system is switched off The feedrate override regulation is referred to OPERATION 4 4 1 5 JOG Working Mode Relative parameters 1 System parameter P112 the initial speed in cutting feed 2 System parameter P113 max speed limit of cutting feed 3 System parameter P114 linear acceleration deceleration of cutting feed 4 System parameter P118 G99 initial lines Note There is the uneven cutting feedrate when the spindle speed is lower than 1 r min in G99 there is the follow error in the actual cutt
90. l V l and the system displays the content of the top down block or up down page Press ESC and the system exits from the selected and displays the previous block 3 When the pointer points to the required block ENTER is pressed and the system prompts Run to wait the next execution 4 At the moment press CYCLE START and the system executes the program from the block pointed by the pointer press ESC and the system exits the selection and the pointer points to the first block Note 1 The specified block cannot be in canned cycles compound cycle bodies or subprograms otherwise there is the unexpected run The system selects GOO or the tool change command before GOO 2 When the system runs the program from the specified block the selected block should be the linear movement or S M T 3 In the course of program execution press INPUT and the system pops up the browse and forbids executing the selected block 4 5 3 Displaying in a Part Program Running When the part program is running this system displays the running state the dynamic run coordinate the workpiece planar solid graph and the path of tool nose in the course of program running which is very convenient to monitor the running state of the machine and the program The 69 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual display as follows The dynamic coordinates or the dynamic tool nose movement path graph or workpiece contour gr
91. machined feeding once and the counter adds NO000 G22 L5 Begin to define the cycle body and cycle for 5 times N0010 G50 2100 5 Firstly change the Z axis cutter into 100 5 regardless how much before N0020 GO W100 Z axis retracts to100 N0030 GO X100 X axis retracts to 100 N0040 T11 MO3 S600 Change T11 N0050 GO X0 Z102 The No 1 tool is positioned nearby the barstock NO060 Gi Z100 F1000 Close the barstock at low speed radial facing 0 5mm N0070 G1 X18 Retract to the external circle N0080 G1 W 10 Cut the excircle N0090 G1 X19 Retreat from the excircle N0100 GO X100 Z200 Retract to the tool change N0110 T22 S350 Change T22 N0120 GO X25 Z95 Rapid traverse nearby the workpiece N0130 G1 X10 F500 Groove NO140 GO X25 Rapidly retreat from the workpiece N0150 GO X100 Z200 Retract to the tool change 144 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions N0160 T44 Change 144 N0170 GO X25 Z90 5 Rapidly position nearby the workpiece N0180 G1 X0 F500 Cut off N0190 M95 K1 The workpiece counter adds 1 after machining N0200 G80 The definition cycle body ends N1000 G51 Recover the set workpiece coordinate system at the first time in the manual mode N1010 MO5 Spindle stops N1020 GO Z100 5 Retract to the initial position of the striker point N0130 M95 K 1 Workpiece counter subtract 1 N0140 M02 End of program return to the 1 block waiting workpiece counter adds 1 When the program p
92. moving the X coordinate regardless of in feed or rapid state the spindle speed will vary from one coordinate value to another 13 S value of G96 is limited by S value of G50 Sxxxx and P304 P305 The S value of G50 is initialized to P305 upon power on and their limit relationship is as follows e G50 Sxxx lt P304 G50 Sxxxx is invalid the spindle speed is adjustable between P304 P305 in G96 e G50 Sxxx gt P304 G50 Sxxxx is valid The min value of spindle speed range is limited by P304 and max value is limited by G50 Sxxx or P305 whichever is smaller Example P304 value is the lower limit of the spindle speed in constant surface control When the spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinate value is lower than P304 value the lower limit of the spindle speed is the actual spindle speed 182 Example as Fig 4 8 surface speed is 300m min which can count the spindle speed annotated in Table 4 1 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Table 4 1 Spindle rotates clockwise the constant surface speed control is valid and the N0010 M3 G96 S300 surface speed is 300 m min N0020 GO X50 Z50 Rapidly traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r min N0030 GO X25 Z0 Rapidly traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r min N0040 G1 W 30 F200 Cut from B to C with spindle speed 1910 r min NOO50 X40 W 20 F150 Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r min and surface speed 1194 r min NO060 GO
93. observation interface is appeared by LEFT key in the Manual or Auto working mode after this command is performed The function state of input output ports signal followed with I K can be observed in this interface If there are multiple pages will be displayed in the window and the I O signal function state can be checked by UP DOWN page key 187 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Notice In a same block simultaneously if there are some self defined commands such as G35 M50 M74 are performed and then display the priority level in the Manual Auto mode G35 defines the top one then the M50 M74 finally the command commands M T S Example NO000 G50 X100 Z150 N0010 M10 N0020 M03 S500 N0030 M08 N0040 T11 N0050 G35 18 12 K17 NO060 GOO X65 Z103 N0070 G01 X0 F60 N0080 M81 18 0 Observe the input output pin state when displaying the window after controlling the LEFT key Perform the next one if the input UlO8 is LOW otherwise keep waiting NO090 M82 Q17 0112 0D3 Make the No UO17 pin outputting the LOW the longest hold time D retract the output The No UI12 pin is LOW then perform the next one N0100 GOO X100 Z100 N0110 M09 N0120 M05 N0130 M02 When the above mentioned programs are performed at the beginning the common commands M S T can be displayed in the window by pressing the LEFT key the U 108 Ul12 and UO17 pins change can be displayed in
94. of the external interference 3 6 8 Connection Between CNC System Y and DAPO3 Spindle Drive Unit Less than 15m shield cable System f DAPO3 P A ingle phase Yput PULS r ng 12 o Q 42 S gt three phase 139 PUES 4 98 Encoder feedback signal AC290V da Ydir SIGN 33 m eo ae ae U 18 sat an Motor power supply Yalm AM 29 O O 7 11 OY Bano 3d 7 COM R COM Q 38 S AC servo motor 10 Ot44 O 39 T y oo VCMD 14 jg ASD TAE jg Spindle Metal shell gt C Metal shell encoder 20 APO vp od ie 25 0 ARI Wo jdd gga A ET M3 SR yg Al yoo MA SRV og ES Connection table between CNC system and DAPO3 spindle drive unit GSK96 Y DAP03 drive unit Signal interface Y pulse 12 Ypu NS PULS re IE DECEO Maio E varion apap pe a fon ae O Yam O x 279 CGSN I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 7 X5 MPG Interface The CNC system can be externally connected with MPG by the MPG interface X5 MPG can control the coordinate axis move When the MPG connection line is less than 1m it can use the single terminal connection when it is longer than 1 5m it is advised to use the differential connection to improve the anti
95. of the line in EDIT working mode Two help keys hp1 hp2 np mney When step adjustment is invalid hp2 is valid Control cursor movement in EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET working mode Hp function or other special definitions in other working modes Cursor movement key PAGE Display page up down in EDIT PARAMETER OFFSET UP DOWN Special definition in JOG AUTO working mode 3 3 8 Reset Key Chapter Four System Operation CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION This chapter introduces operations and notes of the system Please read carefully before operation 4 1 System ON OFF Initial State Modal and Safe Protection 4 1 1 Power On There is no power switch on the operation panel of the system The operator installs it according to the different machine to avoid bad effects to CNC system owing to the impaction of power supply Check before the system is turned on 1 Ensure the machine state is normal 2 Ensure the voltage meets the requirements 3 Ensure the wiring is correct and firm The system is turned on as follows 1 The master power switch of machine is turned on Switch on the power switch of the CNC system and the system displays as Fig 4 1 Press any keys and the system enters into EDIT working mode Coan I HEI Fig 4 1 System initialization display window 2 The system orderly completes the following work after power on The system controls the program loading e The system automatically check
96. open U disc file catalog 3 Select the required programs to receive according to the system hp1 help message 4 Press ENTER to receive and select the sending mode according to the system prompt 5 Input the programs according the selected receiving mode display the receiving process till the receiving is completed 6 Select ESC to exit from the U disc If the stored program name is the same as the sent program name a prompt will be displayed for you to determine whether to replace the original program or not If you choose yes the original program will be replaced by the received one 4 3 3 3 TXT Part Program Standard Format in U Disc Use TXT LST text to edit part program in U disc but the file name must be compiled based on the standard format required by the system to be sent to the system as follow 22 1 2 Name the file name of the part program to TXT or LST suffix such as CNCOO08 TXT in PC it is suggested that the operator use TXT suffix to conveniently execute part programs on the PC The first line of TXT file content must specify the program number its format is XXX i e percent sign follows the digit 1 2 or 3 its range is 0 254 and the first line cannot have other content lts range must be 0 254 because the program number created and stored by the system is 0 254 otherwise the system cannot receive the programs and prompts the corresponding mistaken message The program num
97. output signal and the spindle converter by the spindle X4 converter which realizes the stepless change speed within limits 3 6 1 Signal Definitions 1 Pit 7 10 as PE es o 5 HE a PE E rs Iz d F 20 G 13 m p Me gll 11 p A e oll 15 T SES ll 36 905 8 SEND 00 17 950 fog a 18 X4 spindle and Y axis a 19 Yen AE 20 ARO Ypu zj Failure to use Ypu 22 Failure to use Ydir 23 Yalm Ydir 4 HEY PW 25 API WD 2 Failure to use AGN DB26 Female 275 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Standard mame Stora 2 PA Encoder pulse A IE Encoder B pulse re Eor plas Pe Encoder C pulses BD 8 OV EVEND Encoder BV earthing o Sve Spindle analog voltages 10 Ar OVRAVGND 24V earthing eee TN A e oo A D Y direction Y direction Y drive unit 5V r a a a7 OVEEVOND Y drive unit SV earthing Yen Y lll Unused YALM Y axis drive unit alarm Speed position state check 3 6 2 Converter Technical Specification e System output analog voltage is O V 10 V e The connection cable between the system and the converter should use the shield cable and the shield is connected with X4 socket metal shell 3 6 3 Encoder Technical Specifications e The system can connect externally the spindle encoder by the spindle interface X4 which is used to the thread machining and tapping e t can be used the encoder with multiple linear parame
98. parameter extraction select K to solidify the parameter select P to search the parameter select F to upgrade the software through USB mode select D to update the whole memory Select the USB communication of parameter file hp2 File communication by USB When the system executes the data solidifying and extraction it must not be turned off and the 83 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual operator cannot execute the other operations before the operation is performed The data solidifying and draw do not influence the part programs in the system 4 6 3 1 Parameter Communication and Standard Format According to the requirement to select the parameter transmission direction the communication has two kinds parameter sending and receiving The parameter receiving includes USB CNC the parameter sending includes CNC USB Parameter sending operation level all level The operator in all level can send the parameter to U disc Parameter receiving operation level machine manufacturer device administrator machine operator The operator with more than 3 level can receive the parameters from U disc However it is only valid for those parameters which can be modified in the corresponding level 1 USB operation _ USB CNC CNC gt USB Firstly control the hp1 then the hp2 to transmit the data by USB communication mode The operator selects the transmission direct
99. parameters of GO6 command The traverse speed of G6 is specified by F which is not controlled by the feed override and the max speed of each axis is limited by parameter P100 P102 The speed specified by G06 is valid only in this or next G6 command and it does not affect the other command speed in JOG or AUTO working mode the other command speed does not affect the G6 speed memorized in the system either If the speed of G6 mode is not specified after system power on or F is omitted the system presets the speed to F30 When an axis is in the G6 motion mode it is available to change the speed by using G6 command E g G6 Z F500 which means the Z speed is changed to F500 10 In the program if Z axis is executing G6 and a new command relative to Z axis such as G6 or G1 is met the system does not execute the next until the last G6 is executed However there are two exceptions If G6 Z or G6 Z is being executing and a new G6 Z or G6 Z is met the system will proceeds to the next because they are completely the same If a new command 165 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual only the G06 speed of which is different is met they system immediately modifies the speed and then continues to execute the next command 11 When G6 is executed there is a small G6 command displayed in different color under the axis at the same time as axis movement prompting the information about the axis moveme
100. point O or retraction is too big don t meet the regulation IEA es EA E272 Used the G50 command it doesn t meet G50 the program regulation command need it be positive number E280 No relevant command When executing G66 G67 G67 can be Re select program or modify in executed program executed only after G66 is executed at program least once or G67 can be used when G66 is used at least once in programming E282 Calling command of this Custom command forbids motion Modify program or parameter type not allowed in No command codes Not conforming to the 254 program programming regulation E283 Floating point not The floating point cannot be involved in Modify program allowed in operation of the logic operation Not conforming to the this type programming regulation 204 Chapter Six Alarm Message 6 4 2 Alarm in Program Compound Check i e E600 699 Alarm in program check means in the workpiece program the explanation of the command which is collided with system parameter When the workpiece program is treated isolated there is no problem It needs to analyze the program from the whole auxiliary parameter and the setting of interface parameter then to modify the program and parameter setting to eliminate the alarm List of alarm in program check Alarm Alarm prompt No E601 Illegal use Sxxxx Sxxxx out of gear range E602 Illegal use M21 No define M21 pin Para E603 Illegal use M22 No define M22 pin
101. post CCW rotation time if r4011 lt 5 then P620 else P610 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 1 Close tool post CCW rotation time r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time if r4010 lt 5 then P630 else P624 Tool post CCW in position delayed if r1004 0 then P640 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end r2012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation M05 Close spindle 00 SE335 Check the tool position signal overtime r5002 1 Open display r5002 1000 Display alarm r5008 1 Motion pause MOO Program pause 01 SE333 Tool selection number alarm r5002 1 Open display r5002 1001 Display alarm r5008 1 Motion pause MOO Program pause Chapter Eight Customization Command Programming 8 3 Foot switch in M61 command 9 Foot switch in M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 and M67 M68 commands When you need foot switch to control some reverse motion commands such as M10 M11 M79 M78 and M61 M62 can realize it For example M61 is programmed as feeding in M62 as feeding back set the corresponding l O of foot switch input pin in parameter P533 and connect them correctly Then M61 M62 can be executed alternately M61 62 M63 64 M65 66 and M67 M6 can be carried out the foot control function which are separately set the corresponding I O name of the pin input by the foot switch and the setting value is the series number of the common signal name Not
102. range It can be omitted when the first digit is zero in the command Example G00 can be written to GO 195 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 5 2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Block Programming rules for commands in one block mean that there are many commands in one block simultaneously but all commands are not in the same block The system executes Programming rule check and the programs meeting the programming rules can pass the compiling the system alarms and prompts Some command need to be used independently And the rules are as follows 1 Commands only in single block G50 G51 G52 G26 G28 G30 G31 G35 G32 G33 G34 G38 G04 G06 G07 G08 G09 Program local cycle G22 G80 G66 G67 G81 G83 G0681 G0683 MOO M02 M20 M30 M86 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M21 M22 M23 M24 M91 M92 M93 M94 M47 M48 M81 M82 M83 M84 M50 M74 The self defined command can be shared a same block with the F S command 2 The system cannot judge them when some commands have mutually contradictory operations and the same data To avoid the above M G commands which cannot be in the same block are divided into many groups and the commands in the different group can be in the same block as follows M commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows Group 1 M03 M04 MO5 Group 2 M08 MO9 Group 3 M10 M11 M12 Group 4 M78 M79 M8
103. reference point 0 000 X S T A 200 00 W P006 LS Tel point 200 000 Varaible P007 Xo rel polni 200 000 F Thread para EDIT AUTO Fig 4 6 parameter working mode 4 6 1 Parameter Overview Parameter operation characteristics including 1 Press the parameter password level input by the operator to modify the corresponding level parameter 2 When the operator directly presses ENTER instead inputting the password the operation level is 4 to enter the parameter window in which the operator only reads but cannot modify the parameter 3 For the parameter input and display format the decimal must has the decimal point and the negative number must has the negative sign the system limits the valid digits to get the convenient operation and using safety 4 The operator can open the prompt message window of parameter data input range 5 The system automatically checks the parameter data after power on and automatically prompts the initialization when it finds out the data in disorder 6 The system sets the applicable safety parameters and the operator can reduce the accidences caused by the mistaken operation by the proper parameter setting 4 6 1 1 Parameter Privilege The parameter privilege is to modify the parameter password level To get the convenient management the system provides the parameter privilege setting function the current operation level is displayed on the top prompt bar in the parameter window Par
104. same to process monitor Set the counter mode when the calculation result is changed intoO from lronserteimercounervilpiti oS o ON non zero from 0 the inner counter will plus 1 How to count the pulse monitoring 1 When the pulse monitoring is opened it can t execute the assignment description statement repeatedly when the last operation result compared with this time it matches the following skip and the inner counter will add 1 If set 6 the last calculation result is non zero however this time operation result is O the inner counter will plus 1 If set 7 the last calculation result is O however this time operation result is non zero the inner counter will plus 1 2 In the initial that the pulse monitoring is opened the counter is automatically cleared to zero 3 When only one pulse monitoring is opened it can check the above 3ms width signal change when four pulse monitoring are opened it can check the above 12ms width signal change 237 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 7 3 6 Pulse Monitoring Program Example Program example The following programs introduce the use of pulse monitoring In the following program if UlO5 corresponding pin is connected to the system detection signal in the machining when the times of UIO5 changing from 0 to 1 is greater than ten end the program 108 N0010 r7100 r1005 Making the plus 1 count to r1005 pulse signal
105. screw thread interpolation or X Y Z three axis linkage Position command range 9999 999 mm 9999 999mm least command unit 0 001mm Motion control Electronic gear Command multiplier coefficient 1 9999999 command division coefficient 1 9999999 Rapid traverse speed up to 30000mm min rapid override F25 50 75 100 real time regulation Cutting feedrate up to 15000mm min feedrate override 0 150 16 grades real time regulation MANUAL feedrate Omm min 1260mm min 16 grade real time regulation or it is defined in real time MPG feed 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm Saa G commands G00 G01 G06 G07 G08 G09 G04 G22 G80 G26 G28 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G38 G50 G51 G52 G66 G67 G81 G0681 G83 G0683 G96 G97 G98 G99 Capable of machining single multiple straight thread variable pitch thread pitch 0 001mm 500mm or 0 06tooth inch 25400teeth inch with tapping function Thread machining Spindle encoder lines can be set within 100p r 5000p r Drive ratio between encoder and spindle is 1 1 Backlash compensation 0 mm 10 000mm Precision Tool offset 16 tool numbers 64 groups of tool length compensation compensation Tool setting method trial cutting Tool offset can be modified during program execution and can be modified by statement command MOO M02 M20 M30 M03 M04 MO5 M08 MO9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M32 M33 M41 M42 M43 M44 M47 M48 M86 M87 M88 M78 M79 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M96 M97
106. the block into the new which can be complete according the input mode insert alter In INSERT mode use the insert and deletion as follows Move the cursor the character which needs to be modified 2 Input the new content 8 Press DELETE to delete the required content In ALTER mode directly modify the content as follows Press ALTER the cursor switches into the alter mode the character position pointed by the cursor is high light square 2 Move the cursor to the character which needs to be modified 8 Input the new content The cursor points the next character Example Example Alter X in N0020 GO X0 0 Z0 0into U as follows Switch the input mode into ALTER mode move the cursor to the down of X and input U Alter to N0020 GO U0 0 Z0 0 4 3 4 7 Program Stored Space For programs No 0 252 No 254 the system provides 400K memory space so theoretically the size of a single program can be up to 400K For No 253 program the system provides 4M FLASH memory space Explanation 1 The system displays the program leftover space and prompts the leftover stored space size 2 When the current edit No 0O 252 No 254 program size are more than all stored space max 400K the programs cannot be saved and the system prompts the storage space has full Overflow in edit area Delete the old programs when the leftover space is not enough 3 Max edit space of No 253 program is up to 4M and is only saved to the syst
107. the execution mode SINGLE CONTINUOUS DRY RUN current program number workpiece count machining time system function operation method prompt key l Left top display tool nose coordinates and machine coordinates or tool nose path graph Left bottom display machining block pointer points to the current block Right middle display the current state of machine including spindle cooling lubricating tool post chuck tailstock speed cutting speed and so on Pop up window display alarm message of execution program 66 Chapter Four System Operation AUTO Continuous 001 Part count 1 Machining time 00 11 00 0 M Top right ESP ALARM window M78 100 DJ C E ZM 0150 000 Left NO000 GOO Z300 X100 bottom N0010 GO1 W 50 000 U20 000 F100 Pop up S0500 Fig 4 5 AUTO working mode 4 5 1 System Working Mode in AUTO Working Mode In AUTO working mode the system is in several mode according to execute workpiece programs when the system is in different states it permits the functions are different there are several states as follows Initial state it is the execution pointer of the program points to the first line but the system has not executed the system is just now switched from other mode to AUTO working mode to enter the initial state or returns the initial state after the program is executed or the system alarms Run state the system is executing the block and the coordinate
108. the post acceleration deceleration processing 2 P401_ d4 1 the cutting command decelerates to zero the post acceleration deceleration function is invalid G01 processing P401_ d5 0 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration function G01 and G01 perform the connection transition with the best speed all GO1 moves to the end point of the block and decelerates to zero exactly positions the end point of the block when the cutting speed is high the linearity path is precise and the transition point is smooth P401_ d5 1 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration processing decelerates to zero after each cutting command is executed 4 6 4 10 Safety and Debugging Bit Parameter P402 P404 P419 Safety setting 11 _ bit parameter P402 password level 3 pe AAA AAA d7 hardware limit alarm the parameter specifies its using mode when the system has checked the hardware limit alarm signal in the axis motion process 0 Deceleration when it is set 0 it meets the hardware limit alarm the motion axis 101 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual decelerates to stop and the coordinates are consistent with the actual position 1 ESP when it is set 1 it meets the hardware limit alarm the motion axis decelerates to stop and the coordinates are not consistent with the actual position d6__ spindle abnormal stop rotation check 0 Check the system stops the feed closes the spindle and alarms i
109. the special assignment then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the special assignment 3 If the inspector want to execute transfer then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the transfer Note In execution when meet the M20 M02 Whether closes the monitoring is related with the parameter P419_d5 bit if it is set to 0 then close the monitoring clear the task description Whether closes the monitoring is related with the parameter P419_d4 when resetting Special assignment means to evaluate the program control register r5008 system special variable set 1 and set 2 Example r7010 0 if the system writes zero to r7010 then cancel the r7010 monitor r7016 1 Open r7016 monitor if the system meets the condition stop the current motion command immediately execute the assignment or transfer r7012 2 open r7012 monitor if the system meets the condition executes the valuation or transfer after executed current motion command Explanation 1 Once opened monitor in the same time of executing the common part program in fact there are two description statements are alternated ceaseless executed circularly in the system 232 Chapter Seven Statement Programming inner until they are closed 2 The if statement opens or clos
110. the system automatically indentifies other letters Numeric keys input data 0 9 Letter keys input letters Symbolic keys input plus minus multiply divide positive negative decimal point Logic keys gt larger than equal to lt smaller than and or etc 3 3 2 Working Mode Selection Key Press the symbols and characters and the working mode selection keys to complete the corresponding function and their definitions are as follows CGGSRK HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual D EDIT select EDIT working mode res JOG select JOG working mode mo AUTO select AUTO working mode j PARAWETER select PARAMETER working mode a OFFSET select OFFSET working mode O DIAGNOSIS select DIAGNOSIS working mode 3 3 3 Function Keys Press function keys with the visualization symbol and letter to complete the corresponding functions and each symbol definition is as follows UW d R OVERRIDE INCREASING RAPID OVERRIDE Increase rapid traverse override in JOG working mode and GOO rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode Uuh R OVERRDE REDUCING RAPID OVERRIDE Reduce rapid traverse override in JOG working mode and GOO rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode MW o FOVERRIDE INCREASING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE Increase feedrate override in JOG working mode and G01 feedrate override in AUTO working mode WW FOVERRIDE REDUCING FEEDATE O
111. this window after performing the G35 command 4 19 G52 Rotary Axis Y Axis Coordinate Clearing When the controllable axis is used to control the rotary axis in MANUAL or AUTO mode the system can use G52 to clear the integer and keep the remainder In G52 when absolute values of tool nose coordinate of the current controllable axis the integrated value set by G52 the system clears the integer coordinate value and leaves the remainder The machine coordinate of controllable axis also clears the corresponding coordinate value Command format G52 Y V _ Y axis coordinate integer G52 Z W _ Z axis coordinate integer G52 X U _ X axis coordinate integer Field meaning Y V The integer radix of the Y axis 188 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Z W The integer radix of the Z axis X U The integer radix of the X axis Field range Y V Z W X U 9999 999 9999 999 Without meaning of numerical symbol Explanation 1 When P027 P029is set to 0 it means that Y is not the rotary axis 2 When the system parameter sets Y P405_d1 1 G52 Y is valid 3 When the X axis is set in the system parameter P405_d0 1 the G52X command is then enabled 4 G52 only can be performed a block alone which cannot be shared a same block with other commands simultaneously 5 When the coordinate value followed with G52 is set to 0 it clears to the integrated number based upon 360 6 There is no data field follow
112. variable storage the following will explain this register function In an ordinary way in order to avoid the collision wnen some common variable is used in the monitor this common variable must be avoided using in the common block Because the system has a common variable storage and a backup storage of monitor variable the two section variable value 238 Chapter Seven Statement Programming change may not synchronous Example as common variable 3 explain the change of r3 1 When r3 assignment statement is executed r3 is modified in the common program then the r3 in monitor will be modified immediately too 2 When the r3 assignment statement is executed in the monitor it only has modified the r3 in backup monitor now the r3 in common program isn t modified 3 When the variable transfer statement r7900 3 has been executed The system will copy the single common variable r3 in monitoring backup area to the common variable storage area in this case r3 in the common programming equals to the one in the monitoring Program Example In the following program if UlO5 corresponding pin is connected to the system detection signal in the machining when the times of Ul05 changing from 0 to 1 is greater than ten after the cycle execution is finished the program end 109 N0010 r7100 r1005 Making the plus 1 count to r1005 pulse signal N0020 if r7100 gt 10 then r1 1 lf the pulse number is greater than ten r1
113. 0 Group 5 M32 M33 Group 6 M41 M42 M43 M44 G commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows Group 1 G00 G01 Group 3 G96 G97 Group 3 G98 G99 Notice 1 The commands which can be in the alone block cannot be in the same block with other commands otherwise the system alarms E214 One command needs to be separately used and they do not meet the rules for the commands in the same block 2 The commands in the same group cannot be in the same block otherwise the system alarms 196 Chapter Five General Programming Rules and Examples E205 there are not compatible commands 3 T command automatically calls M60 when the tool type is 9 so T command is only in the alone block otherwise the system alarms 5 3 Command Execution Sequence Relative parameters P401 Efficiency setting 3 level P401_d3 Execution sequence of many commands in the same block O sublevel 1 synchronism P401_d2 O close 1 open rapid skip execution function Substep execution for many commands in the same block P401_d3 0 sublevel at the moment P401_d2 is not active When many commands in the same block are executed their execution sequences are as follows after one functional command is executed the system executes the next one till all are performed Table 5 1 Command execution sequence table The execution sequence of the 5 Function command From up to down 596 6975 function S
114. 0 UO17 output low level and goes to nest till UI18 is at low level M82 Q17 0 18 0 D3 UO17 pin outputs low level after delay time D cancels the output goes to next command till UlO8 is low level Special explanation Example M82 can be executed in following two formats Only two M82 commands can be executed in MANUAL working mode M82 Q17 0 D3 orM82 Q17 0 For example M82 Q17 0 D5 UO17 pin outputs low level conducted then cancels the 3 2 2 M81 Control According to Input Signal State Code format Example M81 18 0 If the input UIOS pin is at low level the system goes to the next command otherwise it keeps waiting M81 18 1 If the input UIOS pin is at high level the system goes to the next command otherwise it keeps waiting M81 18 0 P1000 _ Ifthe input UI08 pin is at low level the system goes to P1000 otherwise it goes to the next command M81 18 0 Q17 0 If UlO8 0 then UO17 outputs O and system goes to the next command otherwise it keeps waiting M81 18 0 Q17 0 D3 If Ul08 0 then UO17 outputs 0 signal remains D3 and the system goes to next command otherwise it keeps waiting 3 2 3 M83 Control According to Output Signal State Code format Example M83 R8 0 If the input UO8 pin is at low level the system goes to the next command otherwise it keeps waiting M83 R8 0 P1000 If the input UOS pin is at low level the system goes to P1000 otherwise it goes to the next command M83 R8 0 Q17 0
115. 0 r7010 1 Open the 0 monitoring based upon the method 1 if the content meets immediately stop the movement and then turn to P1000 N0050 GOO W 100 F1000 The tool closes to the workpiece from the longer distance NO060 r7010 0 If the last command is ended but still not inspect and then close the O monitoring N0070 GOO Z300 X200 Return to the initial point N0080 M02 N1000 G50 Z200 X180 Confirm this point to machining start reset the workpiece coordinate system N1010 M03 S1000 Spindle negative N1020 G01 Z90 F500 N1030 G01 X0 N1040 G51 Recovery the workpiece coordinate system N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Return to the initial point N1060 M02 7 2 Statement This system has assignment operation statement and conditional judge statement they will be introduced as following 1 2 1 Assignment Statement This system offered assignment statement can come true the operation between two variables or value the detail expression and operation are as below table Gathered table of assignment operation statement 7 1 rN rA rN variable Decimal addition operation AAA Decimal subtraction operation E Decimal multiplication operation___ ______________ Decimal division operation A Binary or operation A Binary and operation S Binary xor operation AAA Decimal square root rN VTA rA don t support negative Decimal absolute value mala rN the remainder of rA Decimal multiplying and dividing operation rN sqrf rA r
116. 1 S04 is valid Executing S01 Executing S02Executing S00 S01 pin a ee tl S02 pin t1 Spindle gear switch interval time P313 4 4 3 3 Spindle S_ Speed Control Prompt It is not necessary to read the section for the user who does not use a frequency conversion spindle When the machine uses the frequency spindle P410_d6 is set to 1 To resolve the converter with low torque the system should 4 gear automatic gear shifting output signal to match the converter working in the high frequency to make the machine get the low speed and big cutting torque The system uses M41 M42 M43 M44 to control the spindle gear control S controls the spindle speed Frequency spindle gear control Format M41 M42 M43 M44 Explanation 47 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 M41 M42 M43 M44 output gear control signal Each gear signal corresponds to one output point S01 S02 S03 and S04 2 Actual output controlled lines of spindle gear are specified by P310 P310 4 actual output controlled point are S01 S02 S03 S04 P310 3 actual output controlled point are S01 S02 S03 the system releases S04 as other use P310 2 actual output controlled point are S01 S02 the system releases S04 S03 as other use P310 1 actual output controlled point are S01 the system releases S04 S03 S02 as other use P310 0 actual all point doe not output the system releases S04 S03 S0
117. 1 X30 F80 X feeds to drill the first hole NOO90 G00 X51 X retracts N0100 G00 Z60 Y130 Z moves to the second hole position and the spindle rotates to 130 degree at the same time N0110 G01 X30 F80 X feeds to drill the second hole N0120 G00 X51 X retracts N0130 M22 Unit head retracts N0140 G06 Y F2000 The spindle rotates at the speed of F2000 N0150 G00 Z55 N0160 G01 X0 F50 Cuts off N0170 G07Y Spindle stops N0180 M02 End of program 4 4 G09 Y axis The Shifting Command in Working State of Feeder Code format G09 YOorG09 Y1 The execution can be input in the Manual mode Example G09 YO The Y axis can be moved in the Manual and programming however the G6 cannot be performed in monitoring G09 Y1 The Y axis cannot be moved in the Manual and programming but the G6 can be performed in monitoring The movement sequence of Y axis is compiled into monitoring program by G6 command if the Y 167 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual axis is used as the independent feeder control The feeder control can be divided into manual adjustment state and monitoring execution state The Y axis can be adjusted in the manual mode and programming after performing G09 YO At this moment if the G6 occurs in monitoring programming the monitoring will then refuse to perform and automatically close The execution state is monitored after performing G09 Y1 in this case the Y axis can
118. 11 General Programming RUSS E Oia lic REA 195 5 2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Blocks Sacceh thet E 196 5 3 Command Execution Sequence ia 197 CHAPTER SIX ALARM MESSAGE 000 000omororcccccccccccocococococococococococococococococococonocococococococcccocococococos 199 6 1 Emergency AVANT SAS IR A NAS 199 6 2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER OFFSET Working Mode i e EO0O1E009D cccccccrconccnnncccccnonnnnn gt 199 6 3 General Chart of Alarm in Edit Working Mode i e E100 E1DQD ococcccccnccnccncncnccconnccanacccononaaanno noo 201 6 4 Emergency Alarm Program Alarm Table i e E200 E299 EG00 EO9DD ooocccccccnccconcccccccccnacnnnnos 202 6 4 1 Alarm in Program Command i e E200 299 rere etre te Ter eee Cer er cee eer ee errr Tere ee errr 203 6 4 2 Alarm in Program Compound Check i e E600 699 O 205 GGSK P 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 6 5 Alarm Table in JOG OR AUTO Working Mode 1 e E300 E499 seis OP O PES E tes 206 6 5 1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations i e EJO0 E3DD 0 nteorrrrennnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannenannnnas 207 6 5 2 Relative Alarm in Executing Statement 1 e E400 E499 00ooorreocnrnennnnnnnnnnnannnenannnnnannnns 211 CHAPTER SEVEN STATEMENT PROGRAMMING 00 000orornccccrccnacoconcocococoocococococcococococcocococosoos 213 LA Narbona AA A KREETA 213 7 1 1 Variable Expression Method e e 213 7 1 2 Classification of Variable O 213 7121 Common variable sms iia ron id 213 7 1 22 POINTER Yana
119. 125 are determined the coordinate axis top traverse speed limit during the Z X and Y axes performs in the machine zero function return As well the actual zero 88 Chapter Four System Operation return speed of the Z X and Y axes are controlled by the rapid feedrate The actual rapid zero return speed along with Z axis P123xrapid feedrate Unit mm min The actual rapid zero return speed along with X axis P124xrapid feedrate Unit mm min The actual rapid zero return speed along with Y axis P125xrapid feedrate Unit mm min Zero setting 1 __ bit parameter P406 password class 1 d7 d6 d5 0 1 d4 d3 d2 DO et er ee il Z has or no deceleration signal X has or no deceleration signal Y has or no deceleration signal None it is set to O when the deceleration switch and block are not installed on the machine Have itis set to 1 when the deceleration switch and block are installed on the machine Z has or no zero signal X has or no zero signal Y has or no zero signal 0 None it is set to 0 when the machine zero switch and block are not installed on the machine 1 Have itis set to 1 when the machine zero switch and block are installed on the machine The system has four kinds of zero return method and the detailed connection methods are referred to CONNECTION as follows Zero return peceleranon Zero signal A H H Use the deceleration signal and zero return signal to oot tee ete zero coo
120. 2 S01 as other use 3 The initial gear state of the system ON is M41 Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle M gear shifting When the CNC is turn on it states is controlled by P400_d6 spindle gear memory to whether it memories the spindle gear or not 1 When P400_d6 is O the system is turned on after it is turned off the spindle gear is not memorized and the system default the 1 gear of the spindle and M41 M44 do not output 2 When is P400_d6 is 1 the system is turned on after it is turned off the spindle gear is memorized The system does not execute the gear shifting when the specified gear is consistent with the current gear If not the system executes the gear shifting as follows 1 Execute one of M41 M42 M43 M44 the value unit millivolt set by P314 output voltage in the spindle gear shifting is output to the analog voltage to the spindle servo or the converter 2 The system closes the previous gear output signal after it delays P311 frequency spindle gear shifting time 1 8 The system outputs the new gear signal after it delays P313 frequency spindle gear shifting interval time 4 When the system is connected with the checking gear shifting in position input signal M411 M421 M43l M44l and the gear shifting is not in position it always waits the gear shifting in position signal to execute the next step when the system is not connected with the checking gear shifting in positi
121. 26 UI32 and zero signal PCX PCZ PCY CNC checks the machine states by the input signal the signal direction machine to CNC The input signal is valid in LOW The external input of the input signal one uses the machine contact switch input by which the signal is from the machine side press key the limit switch and relay contact another uses the electronic proximity switch transistor input without the contact Note zero signal PCX PCZ PCY can connect with one turn signal of the servo motor connecting with the servo motor 1 The input signal can use the normally open contact input of the machine contact and also use 256 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection the electronic proximity switch input without the contact proximity in the output LOW The interface connection method is as follows NPN connection method without contact Machine side S Input signal Conducts when the signal 24VGND iowalid CNC side Machine contact connection method Machine side 2AVGND CNC side The contact of the input signal at the machine side should meet the conditions Contact capacity more than DC28V 16mA Leakage current among the contacts in open circuit below 1mA Voltage drop among contact in close circuit below 1V current 8 5mA including the voltage drop 2 The input signal Ul26 Ul27 SP ST are standard signals use the normally open contact of the machine contact switch ESP uses the normally clos
122. 3 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual through the above process till the tool setting of all tools are performed The operation is fast and convenient when a tool is regulated 1 X tool setting o LIS AXIS 1 Select the desired X axis to be tool setting by oa 2 Install the trial workpiece reliably on the machine and select a tool usually select the first one used in machining 3 Select a suitable spindle speed and then start the spindle In the manual method move the tool to cut a small stage on the workpiece along with the surface 4 X does not move but Z does to the safe position and stops the spindle Measure the diameter of the cut sidestep 5 Press K and the system displays Tool setting X input the measured diameter vale and press ENTER 6 The system prompts Input the tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number 2 Ztool setting 1 Select the desired Z axis to be tool setting by ca 2 Start the spindle again traverse the tool to cut a small sidestep of the workpiece 3 Z does not move but X does to the safe position and stop the spindle 4 Select one point as the reference point measure Z distance fro
123. 33 P100 P108 P113 P116 P209 P306 P307 P403_d0 Take Z as an axis thread for example the relationship between G33 and relative parameters 06060 Before the system enters raising speed stage it firstly checks whether the thread cutting speed exceeds P113 if it does the system issues an alarm to terminate the thread machining Raising speed phrase Z axis raises speed at P103 initial speed Acceleration time of raising speed stage is P116 The boundary of two thread machining modes is P306 During thread cutting the system detects the spindle speed through spindle encoder line number P209 If the spindle rotation speed exceeds P307 an alarm occurs after the current thread machining block is finished and then the machining is suspended the next step of machining procedure can be continued if press the CYCLE START key P403_d0 0 the system does not check whether the spindle speed is stable in the thread machining P403_d0 1 the system checks whether the spindle speed is stable in the thread machining G33 execution process G33 execution process is as follows taking Z axial thread cutting for example Check the spindle speed count the reference speed of thread machining according to the rotation speed and the lead P When the reference speed exceeds P113 max cutting feedrate the system issues an alarm Before this the user must ensure the spindle speed is stable otherwise there may be confused machi
124. 5 M50 M74 command must be used separately such as if r1 gt 100 then M51 expression will alarm Special attention 1 When user defined command is executed in AUTO mode press CYCLE DWELL the system will not stop the blocks under user defined command rather it will continue the execution after a short pause 2 When user defined command is executed in AUTO mode if SINGLE is valid SINGLE function is valid for the user defined command not to the blocks under the command 3 When user defined command is executed in MANUAL mode press CYCLE DWELL the 243 CGGSR I Hist GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual user defined command execution will be paused 8 2 3 Customized Command Machining Example Program example The following is the program of realizing the change tool operation by written customization command M61 changes the first too M62 changes the second tool M63 changes the third tool M64 changes the fourth tool Note if tool changing is executed under following programs M60 user defined command should be set at first see Section 3 4 3 2 in CONNECTION for details 244 254 NO000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 NO060 N0070 N0080 NO090 N0100 N0110 N0120 N0130 N0132 N0134 N0140 N0150 N0160 N0170 N0172 N0174 N0180 N0190 N0200 N0210 M98 P50 Call M61 change the T11 tool number M98 P200 Call M62 change the T22 tool number M98 P350 Call M63 change the T33 too
125. 7 CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual bit in the output interface is displayed to 0 P410_d7 1 LED indicator lights M3 output in the output interface is first value and after the pulse output is completed M3 corresponding bit is displayed to 1 po Press 50 The spindle stops P410_d7 1 the diagnosis output interface window displays M5 Y Press Cue The coolant between ON OFF shifts once Bit parameter P410_d7 0 when the coolant ON LED indicator ON and the M8 corresponding position in the output port displays 0 when the coolant OFF LED indicator OFF and the M8 corresponding position in the output port displays 1 In P410_d7 1 the coolant ON LED indicator ON and firstly output M8 in the output port is enabled the M8 corresponding position display 1 till the pulse is output When the coolant is OFF LED indicator OFF and firstly output M9 in the output port is enabled the M9 corresponding position displays 1 till the pulse is output 128 Chapter Five USB System Communication CHAPTER FIVE USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION This system can transmit the part programs system parameters system software and tool offsets through USB interface for the operation of the part program transmission see Section 4 3 3 Edit Operation Mode in Part I Operation for the operation of the transmission of system parameters and system software see Section 4 6 3 Parameter Operation Mode in Part I
126. AT32 file system Program NO is wrong Only 000 254 program can be Modify the input program number input Copied program exist The program to be copied has The program has existed this existed operation can t go on Program is void amp can t The current program is empty and Edit the program first copy can t be copied Editing program The 4M program editing storage Can t go on the next edit except exceed ee room is full the editing program can release some storage room Exceed program memory Power off protection program Delete some programs in system fail to save storage area is full and cant protect any more cant delete all program according to the privilege Renamed program exist The program to be changed the name has been existed can t Please delete the old program change the name firstly chip has problem storage CMOS chip chip has problem storage CMOS chip Editing program exceeds The storage room of 800k program Cant go on the next edit except memory editing area is full the editing program can release some storage room Fail to read solidified there are no programs in solidified Reedit the program section 254 no section and SRAM cannot write programs or destroyed No command in help Command input error or don t Check the command to be looking an support this command for input the correct command again replace locked no rewriting be 1 be 0 Para set no line number Set the P333 t
127. B Compound square root rN JrA rB rN rA sin rB sine rN rA cos rB cosine rN rA tan rB tangent rN rA atan rB rC arc tangent rN rA rB rC 4 227 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual In the above table rN express the variable name of storing operation result rA rB rC express the variable for running the operation they can be constant too Explanations 1 The value variable value operation result don t have decimal point the unit is 0 001 For example the assignment of Angle 45 must be rB 45000 2 In the Angle assignment operation statement the rA can t be omitted otherwise alarm it can be written rN 1 sine rB 3 In the PROGRAM EDITION working mode all the special expressions can be get by pressing the hpi 2 key in the plate 4 Each assignment statement only can has one operator except the multiply operation first dividing operation later Correct example r001 r002 r003 r004 Incorrect writing r001 r002 r003 r001 r001 r004 Example r3 r2 r41 the result of r2 multiplying r41 gives to r3 r2 sqr 100 the date of 100 draw gives to r2 r1 0 the initialization r1 is Angle 0 r51 1000 sin r1 the sine value of Angle r1 multiplying 1000 gives to r51 r1 r1 1000 the Angle adds 1 7 2 2 Conditional Statement The if conditional statement can be formed a branch structure It makes judgment according to the given condition in order th
128. C17 Al8 B18 C18 Al9 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32 JE Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual DI D3 D5 D7 D11 D13 D15 ODI OD3 ODS 0D7 OD9 OD11 0D13 ODI5 D17 D19 D21 ID23 D25 D27 D29 D31 0D17 0D19 0D21 0D23 0D25 0D27 0D29 0D31 Interface circuit method layout 3 XSON ZSON YSON ASON XO1 YOl SVGND PG V T C303 _ 5VGND PIOSV Rag MA R319 svqnD PIOSV Ro MB R320 5VGND PIOSV R302 MA R304 SVGND PIOSV R MB R305 SvGND MA PGA C304 MB PGB 5053 vawD MA PGA 50 MB Sans PGB C307 U300 PIOSV 16 12 5VGND SVOND 38 pe E 7 PIOSV C300 IND 2 SVG Hon po AO PIOSY INC PGA PGA 5 6 PGA oute INA ETE B eum E Ina E PB 3 OUTA INA PGB U500 z i a y2 RM 2 DB ly iz ORI Zpu xP 7 TA Zdir 2A 4y EU 2H DA ay Rs Zdir PIO5V_ 16 6 Xput wo 2y 2R04 gt Mt C4 ie Se Xpu G00 Ro jy Xin bbva 8 lam az gt wo Xdr U501 AD I a ar BE YP 15 3 a 1Z PL Mi AP 7 14
129. CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual operator to modify the corresponding parameter when the system find the parameter problem exists after the parameter passes the check it is saved to the system FLSAH to solidify 2 The parameter solidifying operation must be executed before the solidified parameter draw 4 6 3 3 System Software Upgrade and Memory Update The system software upgrade is to replace the new system software i e the old software version is replaced by the new the main aim is to perfect the system function The system update is to update and improve the system software so as to make the system more stable It does no harm to the system but incorrect operation may result in the system update failure If the update fails the system cannot be started up or even the system hardware will be damaged Therefore we suggest the user not upgrade the system software without authorization It is recommended that the upgrade service be provided by our professional staff with our after sale service center The system memory whole update is to replace the memory including the system software covering memory The result of the memory whole update failure is more serious It is suggested that the operator cannot use personally and that our personnel provides the service The system upgrade and memory whole update mode USB mode which is performed only by the machine tool builder 1 System software upgra
130. GOO the actual rapid traverse speed in Z X Y is controlled by the rapid override Z X Y actual rapid speed P100 P101 P102 x rapid override unit mm min Lowest initial speed of Z X Y _ motion parameter P103 P104 P105 P103 P104 P105 defines the lowest initial soeed of Z X Y in MANUAL or AUTO mode When Z X Y speed are lower than the setting value of P103 P104 P105 Z X Y has no speed rising and reducing process The user should adjust the value properly based on the actual machine tool load Unit mm min Rapid feed acceleration deceleration time ms of Z X Y __ motion parameter P106 P107 P108 P106 P107 and P108 defines the time of Z X Y linearly increasing speed from 0 to 15m min in MANUAL or AUTO mode The larger theP106 P107 and P108 values are the longest the 90 Chapter Four System Operation acceleration processes of Z X Y are The operator should reduce P106 P107 and P108 values to improve the machining efficiency based on meeting the load characteristics Unit ms Cutting feed initial speed _ motion parameter P112 P112 feed initial speed P112 defines the initial speed of commands such as G01 in automatic machining process When F value is smaller than the one set in P112 there is no speed rising and reducing process Unit mm min Max speed limit of cutting feed __ motion parameter P113 P113 max speed of cutting speed P113 defines the max speed of commands such as G01 in automatic machin
131. GRAMMING Positive negative tool nose software limit of Z X Y __reference coordinate parameter P009 87 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual P010 P011 P012 P013 PO14 The parameter is used to limit the motion range of tool nose coordinates It confirms the max positive negative travel of tool post in Z X Y In JOG AUTO working mode the tool nose coordinates of Z X Y are more than or equal to the positive tool nose software limit value the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive motion Otherwise the system alarms positive tool nose cutter soft limit alarm The negative motion is also so Positive negative machine software limit of Z X Y __reference coordinate parameter P015 P016 P017 P018 P019 P020 The parameter is used to limiting the motion range of machine coordinates It confirms the max negative travel of machine in Z X Y In JOG AUTO working mode the machine coordinates of Z X Y are more than or equal to the positive mechanical software limit value the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive motion Otherwise the system alarms positive mechanical software limit alarm The negative motion is also so 4 6 4 2 Parameters Related to Zero Return Function P021 P026 P109 P111 P123 P125 P406 P407 Machine zero coordinates of Z X Y __ reference coordinate parameter P021 P022 P023 The parameter confirms the coordinates of ma
132. Interface Parameter P500 2 P66 ista 111 46 415 Variable Initial Value __ P600 P639 AA EA E 111 46 416 M87 M88 Related Parameter P342 POLIS 112 46 44 17 Self defined Related Parameter __ P344 P348 E 112 4 6 5 Appendix Parameter List erereererensenenennnnnnnennnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnenennnnnnenrnnnsenennss 112 46 51 Reference Parameter il Stunt E a E A 112 46 52 Moton Parameter Staind ee inact Gia ta ete eae eas 113 46 53 Transmission Parameter LL stsar sons a Genk ais tae aetna ease eae aanes 114 46 5 4 Auxiliary Parameter Ei eee ee oe ee ee a ee eer ee eee eter er eee rere 114 A655 BIEParameter nia NEEE EENE ten teenie ees TEN E EEEN EAEAN AE 115 4656 Variable InitialValue NSE ex eis we es sii SA A NAET 115 1456 57 terface Parameter iS tana a A A AN de 116 46 5 8 Parameter List Related to Command Forbidden seeccecceccecceececteeeeeeeecsecsensenseesenseeess 117 46 5 9 Parameter List Related to Output Interface Release nseries 118 465 10 Parameter List Related to Input Interface Reales Senna a 118 A 7 OFFSET Working MOA tna E AA A od 119 TA Too Offset Val ie Search a A A A A A 120 4 7 2 Input Tool Offset Data by Keyboard Key mrrerrrrnnnenenancnnonanonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnesnnanernnnnnnnss 120 GGSK P 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 7 3 Tool Offset hp1 Function e aa 121 A 7 3 1 Communication of tool Offset Datura irarioesinninntr rra 121 4 7 3 2 Clearing Offset Values of Each
133. JOG working Y nose software Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm positive limit alarm value P013 setting program reference point return again release the alarm E316 Y positively moves in JOG working Z nose software Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm negative limit alarm value P010 setting program reference point return again release the alarm E317 X positively moves in JOG working X nose software X tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm negative limit alarm value P012 setting program reference point return again release the alarm E318 Y positively moves in JOG working Y nose software Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode or execute the tool limit alarm negative limit alarm value P014 setting program reference point return again release the alarm Reduce the moving speed or modify the aie Z XIY pulse output frequency Output frequency exceeds HE Syslem sbecifed pulse multiplication ratio division too high y p coefficient P203 P204 to the proper range value E320 the value of spindle speed Thread spindle multiplying the thread pitch P is Reduce the feedrate or modify P113 speed too high more than max speed limit of value to the enough cutting feed P113 207 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual No E321 Can t execute G32 The s
134. M98 M99 LS M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M21 M22 M23 M24 The user defined M commands M50 M74 which can realize the special function control execute tool change when set to 9 Speed switching value control S 4 gear directly controlling output range is SO1 S04 or 16 gear BCD output range is SOO S15 Speed analog voltage control S specifies the spindle speed per minute or the cutting surface speed constant surface speed outputs O 10V voltage to spindle converter supports 4 gear spindle speed Up to 16 tools setting tool post type parameters to select the control process of tool change the system one has no the integrated function to control the electric tool post on the machine Tool change action is not executed if the tool post type is set to 0 and the system calls M60 command to Spindle speed control M41 M44 with stepless shifting gear linkage function I O I O function diagnosis display I O interface 23 input 18 output interfaces Statement Assignment statement complete assignment many arithmetic and logic operations programming Conditional statement complete conditional judgment and skip Display 800x480 lattice color LCD with LED or CCFL backlight Displ spray wIngow Display method Chinese or English window set by a parameter Program capacity max 255 programs with 4400KB Program edit Edit method edit in full screen relative absolute coordinate Compound programming support for subprogram call and subprogra
135. N0020 if r7100 gt 10 then P2000 If the monitor pulse number is greater than 10 then turn to P2000 running N0030 r1 0 N0040 r7110 7 Set the count mode when it is changed from zero to non zero the inner counter will plus 1 N0050 r7110 2 Choosing the monitor working mode 2 to open N1000 GOO Z300 X200 Orientating to initial point N1010 GOO X180 N1020 G01 Z90 F500 Cut outer circle N1030 G01 X0 Cut off N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Back to the initial point N1060 M97 P1000 N2000 M02 7 3 7 Variable Transfer Register r7900 Variable transfer register r7900 the system forbid to use this variable in the process monitor description statement Explanation 1 When r7900 is set to O or 999 The overall common variables in the monitoring backup area are copied to the common variable storage area 2 When r7900 is set to 1 199 The common variable in the monitoring backup area of this current numerical value copies to the common variable it separately corresponds to the r1 r199 3 When r7900 is set to 999 The overall common variables in its storage area are copied to the monitoring backup area 4 When r7900 is set to 1 199 the common variables of the current numerical value are copied to the corresponding common one in the monitoring backup area it separately corresponds to r1 r199 Use example r7900 0 Write any 0 to this register it expresses all common variable in monitor backup area are copied to common
136. O working mode The system completes the part machining of the specified machining program in AUTO Working mode the system runs from the first line of the selected workpiece program and gradually executes till the program ends The system combines the operator parameter table offset value to analyze and pre inspection the part programs When the system detects the problem in advance executing the machining program causes the serious result and the system closes the CYCLE START key In the condition pressing CYCLE START key is invalid and the system refuses to execute the program the system can execute after the program or the parameter is modified according to the alarm message The system provides many part program execution modes and the operator must set before running to get the safety of machining process 9 Main functions in AUTO Working mode 1 Set SINGLE CONTINUOUS run program 2 Set DRY RUN without output check run and the system accelerates to execute the program in DRY RUN mode 3 Check the software limit alarm in advance before running programs 4 Set blocks and execute the middle of the program 5 Spindle cooling press key control 6 Execute machining programs by pause block stop end stop cycle stop 7 Tune cutting speed override proportion 8 Correct offset in execution process 9 Real time state display of machine pop up window real time alarm Display content on screen as Fig 4 5 Upper Top display
137. P is omitted The leading zero of the block specified by P can be omitted Explanation The definitions of input signals which correspond to M91 M92 M93 and M94 are not confirmed and are defined by the user according to the requirements They separately correspond to input signals defined by the two users User 1 user 2 input signals are defined in the interface parameter M911 M931 See Connection after the output interfaces are defined When P is omitted the system orderly executes the next block when the state of the check input signal meets the command requirement and always waits when it does not meet P 0 The system skips to the block specified P when the input signal state meets the command requirement otherwise orderly executes the next block P is omitted M91 Check the state of No 1 user When the state is valid the input terminal is connected with OV wait till the input is invalid 148 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions M92 Check the state of No 1 user When the state is invalid the input terminal is broken with 0V wait till the input is valid M93 Check the state of No 2 user When the state is valid the input terminal is connected with OV wait till the input is invalid M94 Check the state of No 2 user When the state is invalid the input terminal is broken with OV wait till the input is valid when P 0 M91 Check the state of No 1 user When the state is valid input terminal connec
138. Para E604 Illegal use M23 No define M23 pin Para E605 Illegal use M24 No define M24 pin Para E606 Illegal use M91 No define M91 pin Para E607 Illegal use M92 No define M92 pin Para E608 Illegal use M93 No define M93 pin Para E609 Illegal use M94 No define M94 pin Para Illegal use M78 Command invalid E610 E611 Illegal use M79 Command invalid Illegal use M41 Command invalid Command invalid Command invalid Illegal use M42 Command invalid Illegal use M43 Command invalid Illegal use M44 Command invalid Alarm reason The Sxxxx command is over the parameter assured gear position range The M21 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M22 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M23 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M24 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M91 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M92 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M93 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The M94 interface parameter doesn t specify the exact chip pin The function of M78 is set to be invalid of M79 The function is set to be invalid of M41 The function is set to be invalid The function of M42 is set to be invalid The M43 function is set to be invalid The M44 function is set to be invalid The M32 function is not expanded to
139. Part Program Content Input and Edit e eeeereererereerersresrereerereunennneeneneunnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnennnnena 23 4 3 4 1 Inputting Program CoOntenterntan ni e 25 4 3 4 2 Inserting Program E A A E 26 4343 Deleting on Ole Gr re A AAA AAA A A 26 4344 Inserting SCharacter in A Blass o 26 4345 Deleting a Character in a Blocks a io 27 4346 Modifying Block Orel alic let ee te A A AAA 27 4347 Program Stored Space dis ia 27 4348 No 253 Program Operation lit 27 4 3 4 9 No 254 Program Operation O ES 28 4 3 5 hp1 Function nn nan nn nene nn nn ne nnn nn nmnnnnnnnannnnnnass 28 435 1 Part program Command Help A 28 4 3 5 2 Inserting Macro String AN 29 GGSK P 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual XIV 435 3 Line Number SOM visrissiiriosinicassn rosarina dra ERA ition 29 4 3 5 4 Replacing Character String gq gsie ati ese ener ne ae nauuied ines E E 29 4 3 5 5 Cursor POSITION sins chou sesswisweteesiesseesesseusndiaonsiededsvasdiaesinsenenssssiecaeen 29 4356 MPG Controlling Cursor Moving o E A EE 30 4 3 6 Part Program Compiling A 30 4 3 6 1 hp2 Compiling relggeic ie 6h ee ee ee ee er a 30 4 3 6 2 Program Compiling Result Analysis nO O A A 31 4 3 6 3 Program Compound Check Prompt PAE O A EE entail AE 31 44 JOG Working DOCG PPP io UE o o o baeauiennsadaaihosannens 32 AAA Coordinate dos Move menta 34 ATA JOG Movemeri emistaniadraii EE ENER NE RANER EERENS 34 4 4 1 2 Step WlewWie gla ik ee ee ce er ee ee ee ern tt ee e
140. S it is determined by the current state it can be speed value or surface speed value cutting Operation example Input S 2 0 O ENTER the system switches the speed into 0 10V analog voltage to output the converter Explanation 1 In executing S the system takes the max spindle speed value of the current spindle gear as the reference counts the analog voltage value corresponding to the specified speed and then outputs to the spindle servo or the converter 2 To make the spindle actual speed be consistent with the speed set by S P300 P303 should set the actual max spindle speed value output analog voltage is 10V of each gear the setting method input S_ according to the setting value of P300 P303 and modify P300 P303 setting according to the actual displayed spindle speed value 3 w When the system is turned on the analogy voltage output is Ov the system outputs corresponding analog voltage value after it executes S it always keeps later except for the cutting feed state in the constant surface speed control and X coordinate value is not changed After SO is executed the analog voltage output is OV CNC resets in the emergency stop the analog voltage output keeps 4 4 3 4 Servo Spindle Working State Setting The system switches the spindle working mode when the spindle uses the GSK DAPO3 servo drive unit The function should be used if the rotary control and the spindle rotation feeding control Y axis
141. S OPERATION Re 1 CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW ooococccrcccccccccococococococococococococococococococococococococococonocnococoncccncccccocococococococenes 1 CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS c gt 0 000oororccrcncccccococococococococococococococococococcocococococooooos 3 21 GSK96 Technical specifications RO 3 CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL gt gt 000 ooooroccncccncncncccccococococococococococococococococococococococcocococococooos 5 3 1 LCD Display A roda 5 32 LED Status TC CaO i A A A a 5 3 3 Keyboard A onCaincauste E EE E ons nes E E eo eter seam SO leet E E S E EE 5 3 3 1 Character Keys srsssssstsssteteteteseseseseenenenanananananaeseesenesenenenestststsneenanananananananaeaeseneenanaeaeans 5 3 3 2 Working Mode Selection Key sreecececenenenenenensnsnnasananannnnnnnnonnonnenenenenenensnsnrnsnsasasasannsss 5 3 3 3 Function Keys a 6 3 3 4 Cycle Start and Cycle Pause Feed Hold Key errreresrcrsnsnnannnnnnnananannnnoneneneneneneneneneneneos 7 3 3 5 Manual Axis Control Key e ererercececennnnnenenenenonsnsnnanananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnne nene nennnnnnnnanananasnnnnnnnannnss 7 3 3 6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key eteececesenenenenennnensnsnsanannnnnnnnnnonononsnsnnenenenensnsnrnsaranananannnss 7 3 3 7 Edit Keys nn Rmn nene ne nn nnnmnnnnnos 8 3 3 8 Reset Key nn een nn nannanss 8 CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION c 0 0oooocrccccrcccncncccccocococococococococococococococococococococococcccccocococooos 9 A 1 System ON OFF Initial State
142. V Motor power supply 9 Zalm Alm L 7 DL 10 OV Ig _ Reaction Metal shell gt O Metal shell T 269 CGSN I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Connection table between CNC and GSK DF3 GSK96 X DF3 drive unit Signal interface DF3 drive unit Signal interface Z pulse INEA 1 See Ie a EE as za 1 ATA Metal shell J Metal shell Notice When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode Y The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 270 3 5 6 Connection Layout Between CNC and AC Servo Drive Unit Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Connection layout between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit X connection layout Less than 15m System I Xdir Xen J 424v Xalm Metal shell lt Xpu t shielded cable PULS J Xpu Xdir SON ee xo Z connection layout System IZ COM DG DG Less than 15m shielded cable Zput
143. VERRIDE Reduce feedrate override in JOG working mode and G01 feedrate override in AUTO working mode e 20 IX Z and Y PROGRAM REFERENCE POINT RETURN It is valid in JOG AUTO working mode Program reference point is also called program zero point in the user manual 0 IX Z and Y MACHINE REFERENCE POINT RETURN It is valid in JOG working mode Machine reference point is also called machine zero point in the user manual F mp ORY Dry run key When Dry Run is selected in AUTO operation mode to execute commands whether M S T commands are valid is determined by bit parameter P401_d7 After the Dry Run state is exited the coordinate of each axis of the system automatically resumes to the one before Dry Run Chapter Three Operation Panel Op SINGLE Single Continuous key selects Single Continuous mode in AUTO operation mode 3 3 4 Cycle Start and Cycle Pause Feed Hold Key Start and pause programs in AUTO working mode and each key symbol definition are as follows ES START Start to run programs in AUTO working mode move coordinate axis in JOG working mode Mo vc PAUSE FEED HOLD pause the running in JOG or AUTO working mode 3 3 5 Manual Axis Control Key Manual key symbol definitions in JOG working mode are as follows a hz axis moves positively in JOG working mode TUI RAPIDIFED RAPID TRAVERSE FEED Switching rapid traverse and feed in JOG working mode 4 SeMNJIOG STEP Select eac
144. Yput 2A 4y Ml SAP YD 9 B Ypu A oho S R508 PIOML_4_ Ge Gy GSR C01 2 D Ydrt ay 2 Y Yar GD 37 0 Klo th 0500 Xen A 24 VGND 1N4148 D501 1N4148 D502 1N4148 D503 1N4148 D504 1N4148 D505 Appendix D500 X_ALM X_ORG Y ALM Y ORG Z_ALM Z_ORG 1N4148 R516 R517 R518 R519 R520 R521 R522 R523 PGSV 1 SVGND 6 MA 2 MB 1 MA 3 MB 8 4 9 5 Xalm 1 Zalm 9 1024V 2 24 VGND 10 pu 3 pu 11 Zpu 4 Zpu 12 Xd 5 Xdr 13 Zdir 6 Zdir 14 Xen 7 Zen 15 P5V 8 X4 1024V 10 0 PA 1 O 24 VGND 11 0 PA 2 O Ypu 12 O PB 3 0 Ypu 13 O PB 4 o Y r 14 O PC 5 o Ydr 15 O PC 6 o P5V 16 O SE5V 1 0 SVGND 17 O 5VGND 8 O AGND 18 O SVC 9 o Y AXIS 1024V VDD5V X5 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Xam PCX YALM PCY Zalm PCZ API YEN APO Y02 Y03 YALM PCY API 287 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual CGSR I 11334 Appendix 4 External control connection layout p nb U0OTIDSUUOY TOIJUOY BUIOIXO9 JNJ
145. _ _ _ _ 10704 50d 700 os an ae i sangat 10308 3508 100 H Er T 2 a a fl F cal a Ed EJ 2J0E JAS TT EXAOHOOT A3 0Y Tus days dc EXT O ADES A A O ob TPT DMa A a RAN E 20831311 584 ysad 700 AFZ APZ z INS INS OT FL FL El EL EL F 21 Z1 TT TI TI E 284 Interface circuit method layout 1 input Tl T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 TCP PRES SHL TPS RM10 MXZ1 R100 R101 R102 R103 R104 R105 R106 R107 R108 R109 R110 R111 R112 R113 R114 R115 1024V Appendix 3 0100 E 0101 W p E 0102 w pl E EON E 0104 AS 0105 a pl al m is R EE EO N a m Ra 3 0109 Ra 0110 W pi El 0111 a pol E 0112 a pol E O113 es m AS E 0115 Hep AN VDD5V Appendix IDO IDI ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 ID9 ID10 ID11 ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15 HT ESP R116 R117 R118 R119 R120 R121 R122 R123 1024V Interface circuit method layout i LA HAS YA an Fa EN ys ys pa AS O HH O O E Pela AA A P181 ER p COP ra E ON Ead 1O21 O ENS ka LOS I S Ke 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 VDD5V TCP PRES TPS 24 VGND 1024V M5 M4 ID25 1D26 1D27 ID28 ID29 1D30 1D31 PGNMI
146. a Part Program Froma Specified a oo o A 69 4 5 3 Displaying in a Part Program RUNNING rererrerernenononananannnnenenenenenenenenensnsnnannnannannsnness 69 4 5 3 1 Machining Workpiece Count and Timing yA e y 70 45 4 Manual Operation of Miscellaneous FUNCTION et tttrrrnnnrrrrrree rr 70 4 5 5 Speed Override Tune in AUTO Working MOC rtssstscesseecceeeseeeeeeeennneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeannaaaaeeeeenens 71 4 5 5 1 Speed Ovemide TUNE mentiras AA ada 71 4552 MPG Speed CONTO laminas N AAA AN ad 71 4 5 6 Interference Operation in Program Execution Process ssssssrssserrerrrrrserrennnnnennnnnnnunnnnnnnnn 72 Contents 4 5 6 1 Press Key Interference in Program Sele Wille E rca rere 72 4 5 6 2 External Feed Spindle IOI KNO nea o EON 73 4 5 6 3 External Start and Pause Signal AE SAD T T T a N TTT 74 456 4 Feed Device Alarm FUNCHOM sia nt A 74 4 5 7 Modifying Offset in Program RUN esteetsrersreererteresrerreresrenusneunenneneunnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnennnnnnn nenne 75 4 5 7 1 Modifying Offset Method in Program RUN A S NA 75 4 5 7 2 Modifying Tool Compensation Validity in Program RUNNING rrrrrrrrerrrcnnnnnnnnnananananonononnnos 75 4 5 8 Searching Run Message in AUTO Working Mode eeeerrencnnennnenannnnonnannnnonnannnnanness 76 4 5 9 Program Reference Point Return in AUTO Working Mode 55sssssrrrrrrrrrrrerserereeennnnennnnnennn 17 4 5 10 System Reset and ESP Signal Processing in AUTO Working Modereer 77 4 5 11 Regulating LCD Brightness in AUTO JOG W
147. a stop signal if the original address is reserve signal 1 then deliver the positive signal 3 and rotation speed after delaying N0200 M86 P1 J32768 QO HO As for the P equipment No J address the identical frequency should be consistent N0210 G04 DO 05 N0220 M86 P1 J32768 Q3 HO N0230 M97 P310 N0240 M86 P1 J32768 Q0 HO N0250 G04 D0 05 N0260 M86 P1 J32768 Q1 HO N0270 M97 P310 N0280 M86 P1 J32768 Q3 HO N0290 M97 P310 N0300 M86 P1 J32768 Q0 HO N0310 M86 P1 J32769 Qr5 HO N0340 M99 NO360 M73 Stop the rotation by reset key N0370 M86 P1 J32769 Q0 HO N0380 M86 P1 J32768 Q0 HO N0390 r151 0 N0400 M99 3 1 20 M87 M88 Spindle Orientation Control Code format M87 M88 Explanation Refer to the Spindle Orientation Control in Section 4 4 3 5 of OPERATION 151 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 1 21 M50 M74 Self Defined Command 3 1 21 1 M50 M 74 with Field K Code format M50 M50 K Input the execution in the manual mode Explanations 1 The K corresponds to r150 r174 when M50 M74 are performed user can perform the branch judgment programming to the self defined command by this function 2 M50 M74 can be performed with field K otherwise it is default K 0 K 9999999 9999999 Example 1 M51 K1300 No 1 unit head rotation speed 1300 M52 K1000 No 2 unit head rotation speed 1000 Refer to the related examples for M86 Command in Section 3 1 19
148. ace is invalid 1 Have the system external feed spindle hold knob interface is valid d5_ pressure low check function 0 None 1 Have the system has the pressure low check function P412_d4 sets the alarm level d4 pressure low alarm level 0 HIGH it is not connected with OV 1 LOW it is connected with OV when the system pressure low alarm check function is selected the system has checked the pressure low alarm signal PRES is valid and the signal hold time exceeds P332 setting value the system prompts Pressure low alarm at the moment the axis feed pauses the spindle stops and the automatic cycle cannot start d3__Call M72 when driver alarms 0 Do not call 1 Call The solidified M72 self defined command is still be performed when driver alarms d2__Perform M73 in MANUAL AUTO resetting 0 Not performed In MANUAL AUTO operation mode the system only executes the standard reset function when controlling the reset key 1 Performed In MANUAL AUTO operation mode when the reset key is performed the system still executes the solidified M73 custom command after executing the standard reset key d1__ Perform M74 in MANUAL AUTO ESP 0 Not Performed In MANUAL AUTO operation mode when the ESP alarm is valid the system only executes the standard ESP function 1 Performed In MANUAL AUTO operation mode when the ESP alarm is valid the system still executes the solidified M74 custom command after execu
149. ach set of character string won t exceed 40 characters 20 Chinese characters 4 The character string can be written before or behind the program it generally is written in the end and won t impact the program execution speed Program Example It mainly demonstrates the explanation of keyboard scan register display window register in the following program Suppose there are three working procedure which each of them is moved to different position from start then goes back to start But the three working procedures are not executed by turn they are chosen by press key temporarily according to the pop up window prompt 101 N0000 GOO ZO XO N0010 GOO 2100 X100 N0020 r5002 110003 set the line number of the display window N0030 r5002 110016 set the display character number of each line N0200 r5002 1 sopen an empty display window NO210 r5002 140001 816 set the character size 8 16 N0220 r5002 130000 set the character color black NO230 r5002 1004 set the 004 character string N0240 r5002 11 set the cursor position the cursor points to the home of next line N0250 r5002 140000 16 16 set the character size 16 16 NO260 r5002 1006 display the 006 character string N0270 r5002 11 change line N0280 r5002 130006 change color blue N0290 r5002 1005 display the 005 character string NO300 r5002 130168 change the color red NO500 r5001 4 Waiting for the keyboard input a character relea
150. ae In this user manual we have tried to describe the matters concerning the operation of this CNC system to the greatest extent However it is impossible to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable operations due to length limitation and products application conditions Therefore the items not presented herein should be regarded as impossible or unallowable ae Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability GGSK JJ 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Preface PREFACE Dear Users We are honored by your purchase of the products made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd The manual describes the programming operation installation and connection of this GSK96 multi function position control system in detail To ensure safe and effective running please read this manual carefully before installation and operation Notes before operation e Connect the ESP button of the system firmly and correctly As the system uses the normal closed contact an ESP alarm will occur upon power on if the button is poorly connected or connected as the normal open contact and the system cannot work properly it does not belong to system fault O Set the program reference point of the system according to the actual mountin
151. al in the corresponding pin P505 MDLY Machine electricity delay power on control signal Functional description When machine electrical power on delay control signal is defined in interface parameters the system will wait 3s delay time after power on and outputs that signal from self defined pins The operation keys are invalid during the 3 seconds 4 4 9 4 External MPG Operation When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin Relative parameter when P400_d1 is set to 1 the external MPG control knob is valid Z X Y axis option key step width regulation key are invalid In JOG working mode press MPG to switch to MPG mode the indicator lights and the system displays the external MPG control knob axis option knob and movement knob state The coordinates of selected coordinate axis is displayed in highlight Simultaneously display the external MPG icon on the screen 1 Axis option knob of MPG WsZ external MPG axis option Z select Z when it is connected WsX external MPG axis option X select X when it is connected WsY external MPG axis option Y select Y when it is connected When WsZ WsX WsY are not connected the system cancels the coordinate axis in the highlight state the MPG is invalid 2 Each movement knob of MPG graduation Wbk1 external MPG override1 when it is conn
152. al run speed is controlled by the rapid override For example when GOO rapidly traverses in the independent movement mode the actual speed is set by P100 P101 P102 Z X Y actual rapid speed P100 P101 P102 x rapid override The actual max speed of the machine depends on its actual condition and matched motor For details about parameters please see the manual issued by the machine tool builder GOO is a modal command which can be omitted in the next block in which it is used GOO can be abbreviated to GO and GO and G00 are equivalent Relative parameters Parameters related to G00 P100 P101 P102 P103 P104 P105 P106 P107 P108 P112 P114 P400_d3 Each axis can move at its respective rapid traverse rate or simultaneously rapidly move according to the proportion and their movement mode is defined by P400_d3 P400_d3 0 each axis performs positioning at rapid traverse rate separately independent movement mode in G00 P400_d3 1 each axis performs positioning rapidly and simultaneously interpolation movement mode in the proportion mode in GOO When P400_d3 0 the independent movement mode is executed as follows an example of Z axis 161 CGSN I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 Speed raising stage Z axis raises the speed at the initial speed of P103 2 Raise the speed to max speed set by P100 the acceleration time in the speed raising stage is P106 When each axis moves at the rap
153. alize before startup E401 In macro divisor is The divisor is zero in statement operation Modify the divisor in macro 0 command let it don t be zero E402 The process monitor assignment statement Modify program not support monitor has assignment operation which is not calculation supported by the system e square root sine operation E403 ro008 data error Evaluate the variable r5008 illegal value Modify program error variable error variable written variable r4003 spindle real time speed written variable r4007 spindle real time speed A A SSA A E408 r4008 cant be The illegal written operation is made to Modify program written variable r4008 spindle real time speed to r6xxx in monitor evaluates the r6xxx series variable variable written machining time variable r4002 E412 The variable doesn t The system non supported operator is used Modify program support this kind of in the assignment statement operation E413 The unknown The system non supported judgment Modify program process monitor condition is used in the statement of description process monitor description E414 Unknown pointer The pointer variable points to the Modify program variable non common variable or the exceeded range pointer variable is used can t be written r4004 can t be written r4012 variabler4013 programming correct the error variabler4014 programming correct the error E419 Fail to write the Write the READ variable r4015
154. am in AUTO working mode the variable value may change along with the program path The common variable has following characteristics 1 The system makes different initiation disposal according to the different variable section number Among them r001 r040 The variable parameter table offers the initial value for it set by the user according to the requirement r041 r099 The INITIAL VALUE of this group is O in AUTO mode when the program is started 214 Chapter Seven Statement Programming r100 r199 Never attempt to clear except the boot strap 2 In the AUTO working mode before executing the first program and pressing the CYCLE START key the system will put the parameter table P600 P639 into variable rO01 r040 as the initial value in AUTO the variable r041 r099 is cleared 3 After executed M20 in the recycle r001 r040 are evaluated the initial value by the P600 P639 in parameter table again r041 r099 and r100 r199 are not cleared 4 The initial value of r100 r199 is zero after power on later it won t be cleared by itself But it can change their value in JOG or AUTO working mode immediately Their initial value can be set by the following method using this variable in program when the variable initial value isn t evaluated before using the program won t have the confirmation state suggest the user carefully When the user is using these variable and needs the initial value the initial value of r100 r199 can b
155. ameter password level settings from high to low are as follows 1 level set by the machine manufacturer can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 1 2 level set by the device administrator can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 2 3 level 3333 set by the machine operator can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 3 4 level not be input can modify the parameter range parameter level gt 4 80 Chapter Four System Operation The parameter level is referred to the parameter lists in APPENDIX 4 6 1 2 Entering Operation Level Entering the operation level is as follows Enter the parameter password input window 2 Input the operation password the system adds one when one number is input to the password 8 Press ENTER after the input is completed i e the system enters the operation level corresponding password 4 6 1 3 Parameter Management The parameter management includes the parameter display the parameter privilege initializing solidifying draw sending and receiving the parameter according to the privilege Parameter display Parameter color definitions The parameter permitted to modify by the system is displayed in yellow and the forbidden is displayed in white in the current privilege In the parameter window some operation option is related to the privilege press hp1 and the forbidden functions are displayed in grey Prompt message display The prompt
156. and 18 output pins Each pin has their pin number and two signal names exclusive signal name and common signal name Input general signal names are numbered UI01 UI32 output common signal names are numbered U0O1 UO32 among them Ul17 Ul25 UO19 UO32 are not led out unused displayed in grey in DIAGNOSIS mode If a signal is not specified it is displayed in white Ul or UO representing it can be used otherwise 2 This system has already set control and detection pin for most of the devices These pins are named standard signal name for example spindle chuck tailstock tool post etc Set 253 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 4 5 6 7 8 parameters correctly before used these functions In DIAGNOSIS mode the standard signal names are displayed in yellow representing it cannot be used otherwise The system has been arranged fixed pins for some commands such as M91 M21 G31 when it is in the initialization state that is the defined interface parameter P500 M210 P501 M230 P517 M911 P518 M931 P532 G311 In the diagnosis method the signal displays with green The machine factories can connect the circuit based upon the definition of the interface parameter and the system will detect the corresponding signal according to its pin For other equipments Refer to the Other Option Function in Section 4 4 9 of OPERATION for example safety door detec
157. and is executed in program running the system automatically executes the tool offset So each tool in programming according to the workpiece drawing dimension is compiled instead of considering the position among each tool in the machine coordinate system The deviation of machining dimension caused by tool wear can be changed according to the dimension deviation to modify the tool deviation Command format Txx _ the first 1 digit is the tool number the second is the tool offset number Txxx ____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the following 2 digit is the tool offset number Txxxx ___ the first 2 digit is tool number and the second 2 digit is tool offset number Field Tool number range Determined by P319 maximum tool number 1 16 E g if P319 is 4 the tool number is 0 4 if the input tool number is 0 it means keeping the current tool number Range of tool offset number 0 64 if the input tool offset number is O it means cancelling the tool compensation Explanation 1 The system can select 16 tools and P319 sets the most tool number 2 When the system executes the manual tool setting operation it automatically matches the tool offset number to the tool number and saves it to the tool compensation table The system automatically identifies the relationship between tool setting record and tool number and tool offset number of the tool change command in the program if inconsistency occurs the s
158. anual introduces in detail all functions of the system including optional functions and max controllable ranges which are subject to change with the machine Therefore some functions described in this manual will not work out for other specified machines If there is any doubt please read the instruction for the machine Functions of CNC system and machine CNC machines depend on CNC systems but also power voltage cabinets servo systems CNC and the operator panels It is hard to explain all the integrated functions programming and operation Do not use integrated instructions not included in the manual until they have been tested successfully Preface IV Notes and Safety Suggestions for Operating Machine 1 Before parts processing Test the machine without workpiece or tools Make sure that the machine runs well before it starts to work 2 Before operating the machine Check the input data of the system carefully before operating the machine Incorrect input data may cause the machine to work improperly and damage the workpiece and the tool as well as injure the operator 3 Adaptations between appointed federate and machine operations Make sure that the input feedrate of the system is suitable for the expected operation Feedrate has a maximum for each machine and the amount of the feed rate is subject to change with operation Choose the maximum according to the instructions of the machine Improper feedrate leads the machi
159. ao bees aunt a ats w Sto Aad da aes o Aca taosare Rad s E mentale en slg gC NNTy Bar keh See gS EA aee eae ean eeaals 153 3 2 M81 M82 M83 M84 User input output condition CONTFO urea ira ai 153 3 2 1 M82 Output Control and Detection a ELITE CEE EPC CULE Eero eee 154 3 2 2 M81 Control According to Input Signal State o eee 154 3 2 3 M83 Control According to Output Signal State o anaana 154 3 2 4 M84 OS Input Signal Inspection in the Specified Time IS 155 33 S function Spindle ENACUON AS eer eee 155 3 3 1 Gear Shifting Controlling Spindle Motor a TEE ER OL eT Eee 155 3 3 2 Spindle Controlling Variable Frequency Motor TCP CELT TERT EEE Ere eC A eee Cire Tree 156 3 14 TF PIN CUON TOO bi FURACION 2 asia ness nse as tn es al E A ado ase Ra Nae 156 3530 FE FUNCTION Feedrate FUNCION sanar AAA 158 CHAPTER FOURG COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 0 0oooorororcccncocococococococococococococococococcococococooosos 161 41 G00 Rapid Positioning RA IO 161 42 G01 Linear Interpolation RA AE ER ess ST we eee 162 4 3 G06 Enter G06 Motion Mode with Single Axis GO7 Stop G06 Motion GO08 Enabling Disabling COG IMO Ge ita a TE EA EAE EOE E 164 4 4 G09 Y axis The Shifting Command in Working State Of Feeder ooccrronooonccnncccccnacanacanonononnnos 167 45 Thread Cutting COMANO msi EA AE EEE NDERE 168 4 5 1 G33 Thread Cutting SAC ATT CLT Te eRe COCR eee ee Ree A CCRT CC CETTE COREE rie Te 168 4 5 2 G34 Ea Variable Pitch Thread Cutti
160. aph Current block content Spindle cooling lubricating tool speed chuck tailstock and machine miscellaneous function state Feedrate override rapid override Machining time workpiece count 4 5 3 1 Machining Workpiece Count and Timing Workpiece count When the program being executed once means the program ends M02 M20 and M30 the machining quantity count adds 1 and max count range is 99999 and the count becomes O when it exceeds the max When the program ends with M99 the machining quantity also increases by 1 after the program is executed once Machining time Record machining program execution time When CYCLE START is pressed and the system executes the program the timing does not end till the program ends In running the system pauses at the same time the timing stops In SINGLE working mode the system only records the run time of each block The system displays max machining time range 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds When the machining time reaches the max value It automatically becomes zero and continuously runs program and executes the timing again Workpiece count and machining time clearing in initial state continuously press twice and the workpiece count clears continuously press twice and the machining time clears 4 5 4 Manual Operation of Miscellaneous Function In AUTO working mode press function keys to execute some miscellaneous function operation of the machine and the oth
161. apid traverse override Whether programs are running or not pressing rapid override feedrate override keys can change the speed override The actual traverse speed of the machine slider changes if the speed override is changed when the programs are running In program running the program stops running when the feedrate override is O the system prompts Feedrate override be zero The program continuously runs when the feedrate override is not zero 4 5 5 2 MPG Speed Control In AUTO working mode using MPG controls rapid feedrate override P402_d1 1 MPG controlling rapid feedrate override is valid and the actual feedrate and the rapid speed are as follows Actual feedrate F x feedrate override x MPG override Z X Y actual rapid speed P100 P101 P102 x rapid override x MPG override MPG override range 0 100 MPG controlling rapid feedrate override Method 1 When parameter P402_d0 0 the system enables MPG control rapid traverse feedrate override in method 1 the system set the current position A point to 0 of MPG override From point A to 100 scale every 1 scale in CW direction means an increase of 1 of MPG override every 1 scale in CCW direction means an decrease of 1 of MPG override Method 2 When P402_d0 1 the system enters MPG controlling rapid feedrate override according to method 2 when MPG override is set 0 MPG override changes along MPG CW rotation MPG CW rotation becomes gradually fast MPG override
162. ar numerator range 1 9999999 P206 X division X electronic gear denominator range 1 9999999 P207 Y multiplication Y electronic gear numerator range 1 9999999 P208 Y division Y electronic gear denominator range 1 9999999 Note 1 In setting the related parameters of the transmission the ratio between the multiplication coefficient and division coefficient is 1 128 128 otherwise the system alarms 2 The ratio between the frequency multiplication coefficient and the frequency division is 1 1 ZIXIY axes the system outputs 1 pulse when it moves 0 001mm every time 3 The ratio between the frequency multiplication coefficient and the frequency division is not 1 1 ZIX IY axes the system outputs the pulse in movement of 0 001mm multiplication division 4 When the system max pulse output frequency is 511pps ms the frequency cannot exceed the value otherwise the system alarms in movement i e P100 max traverse speed x multiplication division should not be more than 30000mm min Spindle encoder lines __ transmission parameter P209 The parameter defines the spindle encoder lines it setting range 100 5000 When the spindle is ON on the initial page of DIAGNOSIS mode if the setting value is not consistent with the spindle encoder lines the diagnosis prompts in DIAGNOSIS working mode Encoder lines are not consistent with the parameter Unit line r Z X Y backlash value __ transmission parame
163. are executed for the servo spindle 49 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Relative parameters The function is valid when the controllable axis has Y P410_d4 relationship between the spindle and Y it is not switched when it is 0 which means the spindle operation is not related to Y it is switched when it is 1 which means the spindle operation is related to Y operation and is interlock but they cannot be operated simultaneously When the spindle is switched into the position control mode P410_d4 1 the spindle speed is controlled by Y feedrate S is ignored in machining in AUTO working mode executing S prompts the execution is mistaken in JOG mode M47 M48 is valid when P410_d4 is set to 1 P410_d1 When M47 is executed YM is cleared O clear 1 not clear When P410_d1 0 YM of Y axis machine coordinate will be cleared while M47 is executed When P410_d1 1 YM of Y axis machine coordinate will NOT be cleared while M47 is executed working mode setting operations between the spindle and Y In JOG mode the operator can input M47 M48 to set the working state between the spindle and Y Input M 47 ENTER set Y permissive working mode Input M 48 ENTER set Y forbidden working mode When the system executes M47 it outputs APO level signal 0 and checks API signal when API level is 0 the system set Y working mode displays Y operation icon CO in the state the system permits Y mot
164. are required to turn off and some maintained If there is an alarm occurs during the execution of the M73 custom command the execution is stopped 2 In Manual Auto operation mode when the M73 custom command can be executed in ESP state by setting a parameter P412_d2 1 there is a prompt M73 indicating the M73 is being executed added on the reset window if there is a solidified M73 custom command in the system 3 For the programming debugging and fixing of M73 custom command please see Chapter Eight Custom Command Programming in this manual 4 Be careful to use M73 custom function during Reset The function is only applicable to some special machine tools Relative parameters P403_d2 0 the system closes M03 M04 M08 M32 output signals when the reset key is pressed P403_d2 1 the system does not close M03 M04 M08 M32 output signals when the reset key is pressed Parameter P412_d2 sets whether M73 custom command is executed during Reset Chapter Four System Operation 4 2 CNC Working Mode Selection The system uses the working mode key to directly select the overall working modes All working modes can direct switch to get the simple and convenient operations The display is as Fig 4 1 after the system is turned on and the display state keeps till the other key is pressed to enter the EDIT working mode 4 3 EDIT Working Mode EDIT working mode it is the working mode to execute the part program by the o
165. arm occurs 1 Press ESC to exit to the initial state of AUTO mode 2 Use foot switch to execute M10 press CYCLE START to turn on the spindle M3 press ESC to exit to the initial state of AUTO mode 4 5 14 The External Feedrate Knob in Auto Manual Mode The knob of external feedrate is enabled in the Manual Auto mode If this function is desired and its inputted pin should be defined in the interface parameter at the same time correctly connect the 78 Chapter Four System Operation wiring The system will inspect this signal based upon the corresponding pin Whether the external feedrate knob is enabled is controlled by parameter P400_d0 P400_d0 1 means that the system external feedrate knob is enabled the input signal is lead in by Wfk1 Wfk4 Wf_H Wf_P pins P400_d0 0means that the external feedrate knob is disabled the input signal pin is only for other purposes The external feedrate knob is same to the feedrate button function in the panel the 0 150 16 level real time adjustment can be performed During the program procedure it is very convenient to control the overall feedrate commands in the program by use the knob Refer to the CNC Equipment Connection of Chapter Three in CONNECTION for the detailed circuit connection method Related parameter P400_d0 P561 P566 4 6 Parameter Working Mode PARAMETER working mode function includes parameter input parameter draw parameter solidifying the system prompts intellect
166. at it decides to execute which branch block The basic format of if condition is If relationship expression then statement 1 else statement 2 Its meaning is if the expression exists execute the statement 1 behind the then otherwise execute the statement 2 behind the else Explanation 1 In the relation expression the relation operation has lt gt less than more than equal to such as rA lt rB rA gt rB rA rB 2 The statement 1 and statement 2 can be transfer statement P calling statement H or assignment statement but only can be one of them 3 The transfer symbol P and calling symbol H 4 The operator in assignment statement only can be addition subtraction such as rN rC rD rN rC rD The basic format and signification of if statement if rA rB then P1 else P2 if rA rB execute P1 otherwise execute P2 if rA rB then P1 else rN rC rD if rA rB execute P1 otherwise execute rN rC rD 228 Chapter Seven Statement Programming if rA rB then rN rC rD else P2 if rA rB execute rN rC rD otherwise execute P2 Among them rN Variable name rA rB rC rD Variable name constant too P1 P2 Transferred block line number H1 H2 The called block line number in the above format the place which is transferred by P also can use call 1 2 3 Statement Program Example Program example 1 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the method of automatically modifying tool c
167. at of T command The standard format of the tool function field consists of T 4 digit the first 2 digit is the tool number and the second 2 digit is the tool offset number It is not necessary to input the complete 4 digit or to use the 2 4 digit Format Txx the first 1 digit is the tool number the second 1 digit is the tool offset number Txxx ____ the first 1 digit is the tool number the latter 2 digit is the tool offset number Txxxx the first 2 digit is the tool number and the second 2 digit is the tool offset number Explanation Tool number range is decided by P319 max tool number 1 16 when P319 is 4 the tool number range is 0 4 The input tool number is 0 which means the system keeps the current tool number The offset number range 0 64 the input tool offset number is 0 which means the system cancels the offset Example Keyin 146 Enter Changing to tool No 4 and executing tool offset No 6 Keyin T06 Enter Maintaining the current tool No and executing tool offset No 6 Keyin TOO Enter No tool changing and canceling tool offset Keyin T1040 Enter Maintaining the current tool No and executing tool offset No 40 Keyin 1405 Enter Changing to tool No 4 and executing tool offset No 5 Keyin T0608 Enter Changing to tool No 6 and executing tool offset No 8 Note 1 Example inputting T400 means the system executes No 4 tool change and cancels the offset Note cannot input T040 2 Se
168. ate of 32 input interface corresponding signal pinUl01 UI32 from low to high The second state value of interface variable is O low level or 1 high level The low level means the effective outside signal express the pin contacted with OV the high level means ineffective The input interface variable is a set of read variable can t be evaluated input otherwise alarm Through the program read the value of input interface signal r1001 r1032 can know the pin corresponding signal level and then it can be a judgment condition for the system to make the program skip For example r8 r1002 read Ul02 pin level r8 0 or 1 if r1009 0 then P1600 if the UIO9 pin is read to be low level then go to P1600 r1007 r8 system alarm Assignment cannot be done to read only variables Output interface variable read write The system has 32 output interface variable each variable is correspond to a output signal pin the 217 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual variable number r2001 r2032 is correspond to the signal pin number UO01 UOQ32 in ranking The assignment on output interface variable can change the corresponding pin output state When the system outputs 0 the outside can form the conductive loop When the system output 1 in the high resistance the outside can t form the conductive loop Read the output interface variable the current assignment state of the outp
169. ate speed is checked the error or modify parameter P402_d6 abnormal to be zero after the spindle is started to forbid its function E359 l The system has checked the low Alarm pressure is Check the hydraulic pressure low O and lasted Mapa Or equipment resolve the error l P332 specified time i SooS arm i proreciing The safety door don t close in AUTO Close the safety door door isn t closed E361 Material convey The system has checked its out of Change the rod then go on the alarm rod in M20 automatism stop alarm machining E362 ae The system executes the M32 M33 Set the parameter P506 to be the Lubricating doesn t ee l P star command without lubricating corresponding lubricating control function interface EO Tool NO exceeds TIRAJE EON numoer ici mie Modify tool number or modify P319 to be se parameter P319 specified value in limit the maxima system tool number changing tool mt Tool post release ms 100 aeons champing signal S Check the tool pose champing signal effective always in tool changing and overtime l and resolve error releasing tool post E365 The spindle and Y axis allow Y axis is speed nange PIOA ee System Execute M47 first change the spindle to don t allow to control the Y axis control mode location control mode moving in current spindle non position control mode E366 When the following chuck respond Clamp in position signal checking alarm function is Control the chuck cha
170. ated the position of absolute coordinate in the following command is the coordinate values in the coordinate system X of the workpiece coordinate system is defined in the rotary center of the workpiece when the system creates the workpiece coordinate system Z is defined in the end face of the chuck or the workpiece Command format G50 Z X_ Y three axis workpiece coordinate system setting G50 Z_ X_ two axis workpiece coordinate system setting it can be Z X ZIY X Y 2 axis G50 X_ X single axis workpiece coordinate system setting it can be Z X Y single axis G50 S_ max spindle speed limit in constant surface speed Refer to G96 G97 mode Field and range Z X Y are absolute coordinate values S limits max spindle speed r min Refer to G96 G97 X Z Y 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Explanation 1 Z X Y cannot be shared the same block with S Z X Y can select single axis two axis or three axis to set the workpiece coordinate system 2 G50 is alone in one block and cannot be in one block with other commands 3 Because the system has created one workpiece coordinate system and one program reference point it uses the new workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in Auto and Jog working mode till it is replaced after the system executes G50 Relative parameter Parameters related to G50 P000 P001 P002 Example 176 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G50 X100 Z100 Y100 creating workpiece coo
171. ation number change exceeds 1 64 range them to the specified range Illegal data Tool compensation data in tool Delete the illegal character E035 compensation transmission file has illegal character in Input data error The tool compensation input data Check data according the tool E036 in tool compensation transmission compensation communication file file has mistake format and correct it File symbol error File type mark in tool l l E037 compensation transition file is Mody IRETI type Accoromg Ione tool compensation file format wrong Send OFT fail Sending tool compensation file sending tool compensation file according to the correct tool failure or be manually cancelled compensation file format and operation method E032 E038 Receive OFT fail as Receive the tool compensation file Fail in receiving tool according the correct tool E039 compensation file or delete l compensation file format and manual operation mode File is too big The length of received file is out Modify the file according the file E040 of the maximal length of buffer format correct the received file zone according the requirement AA A EA E044 Ratio of magnify amp Ratio between multiplication and Modify parameter multiplication or a coefficient exceed division is out of 1 128 128 division E046 1 128 128 range 200 Chapter Six Alarm Message Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting Para set conflict input The corr
172. automatically shifts to No 3 gear i a a NAN M44 Spindle variable frequency type automatically shifts to No 4 gear Explanation M41 M42 M43 M44 can be used only when the machine employs the variable frequency spindle See Section 4 4 3 3 Spindle S Command Rotation Speed Control in Part I Operation for details 143 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 1 11 M78 M79 M80 The Output Signal of Tailstock Forward Backward and Cancellation Command format M78 _ tailstock forward M79 tailstock backward M80 cancelling tailstock output signal only some special tailstock device can use M80 Explanation Whether M78 M79 are valid whether they require response detection and whether they are pulse control output or level control output can be set by parameters The tailstock is interlocked with the spindle by setting P402_d3 See Section 4 4 8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function in Part I Operation for details 3 1 12 M95 Workpiece Counting Format code M95K The resolution range of the K is 1 or 1 Explanations K 1 During the command performance the workpiece counter may automatically add 1 calculation if the M95 K1 command is being met K 1 During the command performance the workpiece counter may automatically subtract 1 calculation if the M95 K 1 command is being met Example During the production there are 5 workpieces are
173. axis is moving Pause state the current block has not executed completely in the course of executing the axis motion command to pause the system waits the operator presses the key to execute the operation Block stop state the current block has been executed and the next has not executed the system waits the operator presses the key to execute the operation 4 5 2 Function Key Operation in AUTO Working Mode 4 5 2 1 SINGLE Execution and CONTINUOUS Execution Switch SINGLE execution and CONTINUOUS execution switch O PressL A amp I and the system switches SINGLE CONTINUOUS circularly It is enabled in any states In continuous execution press the key and the system switches to SINGLE working mode after the current block is executed the system stops and continuously executes after CYCLE START is 67 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual pressed In CONTINUOUS working mode press CYCLE START and the program is executed from the beginning to the end In SINGLE working mode press CYCLE START key once and the system executes one block for the cycle command the system only executes one operation press CYCLE START and the system executes one operation 4 5 2 2 Dry Run and Machining Run Switch Check all content of machining programs in dry run which can ensure the machining workpiece is not discarded because of some programming data error in the program Dry run machining run sw
174. be followed with the subsequent command again if the next block command of the subsequent command is other commands and then retreat from the G38 mode 4 Prohibit performing the G38 command in the system during the dry run Example Pid La po ll uy NS Vx Fig 4 7 Tapping For example G38 tapping threading screw thread leading 1 5mm NO000 GOO XO Z20 Rapid positioning the workpiece start N0010 S300 The speed during tapping setting N0020 G01 Z2 F1000 Z axis Closes to the workpiece reserve 2mm clearance in the front of it 175 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual N0030 G38 Z 30 P1 5 HO Zaxis feed tapping N0040 S500 Set the speed when Z axis retracts NO050 Z2 Z axis retracts N0060 S300 i N0070 Z 30 Tapping again remove the burr N0080 S500 i NO090 Z2 Z axis retracts N0100 M02 End of program 4 8 G50 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System The system directly modifies the current tool nose coordinates into the coordinate values set by G50 in G50 and sets the current machine coordinates to the program reference point After the system executes G50 the front of the machine coordinates of the corresponding axis has green icon lt gt which is taken as the program reference point return prompt The coordinate system created by G50 is taken as the workpiece coordinate system After the coordinate system is cre
175. bers received by the CNC are determined by the following method The program number sent by the system USB is digit xxx of CNCxxx TXT in C001PRO file folder in the U disc root catalog Note in USB communication the character string XXX digit of XXX in the first line should be Chapter Four System Operation the same that of xxx digit of CNCxxx TXT When they are different the xxx digit of CNCxxx TXT is taken as the standard 3 The blocks start from the second block The block must meet its format Each block cannot exceed 250 characters ends with the ENTER key otherwise the system prompts the error Block too long in received programs 4 The annotation area has Chinese annotation in the block 5 Max TXT file length cannot exceed the program stored space limit of the system 6 You can refer to the part program file format that the system outputs to the U disc Part program communication standard format in U disc TXT file format Explanation 099 There must be program name 099 when NO000 G50X100 z100 Sets coordinate system the system receives programs the first line N0010 G00 X20 Z90 Rapid positioning must the 3 digit 0 254 G01 X10 Z80 Linear cutting N are the blocks with the line number and others are the blocks without the line NO250 G01 X30 2Z20 Linear cutting numbers N0260 M05 The home of each line must be blank there is a space between the line number N0270 G04 D8 and t
176. bl e ici AAA ec NEREK 216 7 123 Interface Variable seis aa 217 7 1 2 4 Keyboard Scan Register ESOO iria 218 7 1 2 5 Display Window Register OOA aismsarcci n ici A AA 219 7 1 2 6 Display Value Register POs inca aera tener A 222 7 1 2 7 Graph Update Register SO Artie Aa 222 7 1 2 8 Program Control Register ge Ol Clie err re erent ter errr E entre tn arr rrr 223 7 1 2 9 system Special Variable Sel liinda rd 224 7 1 2 10 System special Van able Set Y its A 224 T2 SALOON minar AAA AAA AA AAA 197 7 2 1 Assignment State Menta AAA AN 227 122 Conditlonal Statements iii ee AR A 228 7 2 3 Statement Program Example E TE A T E A T A 229 7 3 Process Monitoring and Execut ON earn oia A 230 713 1 Process Monitor Description r7000 A aul A ones sa newman ema aoe ae E E E ee 231 1 3 2 Start and Close of Process MONITO rca 232 7 3 3 Monitor Program Example ANO A NA 234 7 3 4 Multi statement Global Monitoring FUNCIO seria asas 235 7 3 5 Pulse Monitoring r7100 E E aba ew duno ooh A A tea eis wid olelatp 9d Gos EE T eine wan cae 236 7 3 6 Pulse Monitoring Program Example Ao eNwananeee 238 7 3 7 Variable Transfer Register r7900 Pe RA ee E A En eT en ae eee eT ae 238 LA BRNached iS Tirso AAA AA AAA A A dl 239 TAA ASCHLIS eerie nA TAEAE TAERA EE REA EA EAEE AENEAN ASARES 239 7 4 2 Often Used Color and Code Value Corresponding iS Tari iii 240 CHAPTER EIGHT CUSTOMIZATION COMMAND PROGRAM eerererecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccececeses 241 381 CUSTOMIZATION Com
177. blocks without a line N0020 111 number N0030 G00 X100 Z100 Home of each line is a blank space N0040 G02 X150 Z150 R50 There is a blank space between line number and code for the N0030 G01 X100 Z100 2008 program with line numbers N0050 M30 Block skip The followings are comments 138 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions CHAPTER THREE MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS This chapter introduces in details all MSTF functions and explanations of this system 3 1 M Miscellaneous Function Command List M function is used to control some operations ON OFF of machine and run sequence of machine program and consists of address symbol M and its following two digit integer The used M functions in the system are as follows p gt Command DAA Explanation format Pause to wait for starting Press CYCLE START End of program Return to No 1 block M 20 ender progieni M20 L ASIN to No 1 block to execule ce machine L being cycle machine times E indl FF 0 woo program for spindle OFF and M30 cooling OFF MO3 MO MO Spindle CW mo Spinde CCW Spindle OFF M05 1 A AA JN E LI S O Workpiececame O O weere TMT Z Chuck ouput signal cancel AZ ma Output spindle clamping signal MIS M14 Retract spindle clamping signal M14 fo Lubricating ON v32 es v33 EO var s vaz O Spindle gearing No 3 ee C Spindle gearingNo 3 m s wire Tallstockbackward MOT Meo Tastock output signalene MOO mes
178. ce speed cutting mode S is the linear speed or rotation speed unit m min r min 9 G98 G99 is the feed rev or feed minute mode F is the set cutting speed 33 CGGSRK I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 10 F indicates the actual speed of the coordinate axis 4 4 1 Coordinate Axis Movement No the traverse speed and movement distance before executing the coordinate movement Press the emergency stop button immediately when there is the unexpected accidence 4 4 1 1 JOG Movement e E Press STEP the system is switched from STEP or MPG mode into JOG mode JOG TRAVERSE is to keep pressing the coordinate axis move key and the machine slider continuously moves release the key and the slider decelerates to stop The traverse speed is executed according to the rapid speed or feedrate However the max speed of Z X Y is limited by P100 P101 P102 Coordinate axis move key meanings are as follows e ZXY Ol negative move key itis X or Y when Lee d indicator is ON ah EN IZ positive move key itis X or Y when Lied indicator is ON 9 7Z X Y coordinate axis switch Press Z X Y SWITCH to the cycle switch of Z X or Y operation Z X Y SWITCH INDICATOR ON indicates X or Y operation The selected axis has been shown in the figure above when bit parameter P405_d1 1 and P405_d0 1 the machine tool has Y X axis then the switch is valid When the machine is switched into X Y operation the program ref
179. celerates from the initial speed decelerates to zero in the end point to execute the next the program run time increases and the machining efficiency reduces d3_ multi command execution sequence in the same block 0 Substep 1 Synchronism When there are many commands are shared with one block which is called the multi command in one block These commands are almost executed and the system executes the next block till all are completed P401_d3 0 the commands are executed in substep the execution sequence after one functional command is executed the system executes the next one till all are completed P401_d3 1 synchronous execution in the mode the command which are not relative each other are almost executed do not follow the substep execution sequence till each is completed The system automatically arranges the execution sequence for M with the interlock relationship d2_ rapid skip block execution function 0 Close 1 Open P401_d3 1 P401_d2 1 is valid P401_d2 1 the system permits the skip block execution In the mode after the axis motion command of current block is executed the system does not wait for M S T having been done it rapidly skips to the next block to execute d0__Cutting efficiency 0 Normal The cutting feedrate is the normal value of command F 1 Optimized Improve the efficiency by 5 it applicable to situations that F command is not modified while efficiency is to be improve Eff
180. chine zero Some fixed point on each machine is taken as the machine reference point and the system firstly returns to the machine zero and then returns to the machining starting point to eliminate the machine coordinate system deviation caused by the power off and step out executing the zero return instead of tool setting again after power off accidentally can find the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system to continuously machine the workpiece In most conditions the system looks for the machine reference point by the deceleration switch and zero switch installed on the machine or by the one turn signal of servo motor as the zero signal only with the deceleration switch The deceleration switch is generally installed near to the Max travel of positive Z X Y coordinate axis Machine zero return operations ZN Press 0 and Z Y or X execute the machine zero return Z X Y switch indicator lighting means Y or X operation Z Y or X moves to Z Y or X machine zero at the selected rapid traverse speed in the zero return direction 9 Zero return process as follows Zero return mode 1 when there is the deceleration signal and zero signal the system executes the zero return mode 1 the zero return process is as follow Step 1 the coordinate axis moves to the specified direction at the rapid speed till the block presses down the deceleration switch and the system has checked the starting point of the deceleration signa
181. chine zero position When the machine installs the machine zero check device and P407_d1 0 after the operator executes the Machine zero return or G28 in JOG AUTO working mode and the system has detected the zero signal the system changes the current machine coordinate to the setting value of P021 P022P023 Zero offset value of Z X Y _ reference coordinate parameter P024 P025 P026 When the system uses the servo motor checking the deceleration signal and the zero turn signal of the motor mask are taken the zero return check The deceleration signal installed on the coordinate axis coincides with the zero turn signal which can influence the zero return precision the operator should set the offset value to 2mm and avoid the 2mm to execute the check Zero return low speed of Z X Y __ motion parameter P109 P110 P111 Zero point low speed return speed is the movement speed of coordinate axis when the zero point signal detection being performed in the process of machine zero return No matter this speed is higher or lower than the initial soeed the lower one should be used do not modified this speed after it is set otherwise the precision may be affected Zero top rapid limit of Z X Y __ Movement parameter P123 P124 P125 During the system performs the zero and it returns to zero based upon GO speed If GO speed is more than the zero top one and the zero return speed is regarded as the most rapid limit Parameter P123 P124andP
182. ck signal cancels M12 the chuck state M10 or M11 is displayed with the underline i e M10 or M11 4 4 8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function 9 Tailstock operation In JOG working mode input M78 M79 to control the tailstock forward backward Input M 7 8 ENTER the tailstock goes forward Input M 7 9 ENTER the tailstock goes backward Input M 8 O ENTER cancel the tailstock control signal use M80 for the special tailstock device Relative parameters P409_d4 is set to 0 the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function P402_d3 0 interlock between the hydraulic tailstock control and the spindle control P402 d2 0 the consecutive check of the hydraulic tailstock respond signal is close P402_d2 1 the consecutive check of the hydraulic tailstock respond signal is open P409_ d2 0 the hydraulic tailstock control signal is the level P409 d2 1 the hydraulic tailstock control signal is pulse control the pulse width is determined by the time of parameter P328 P409 d0 0 the hydraulic tailstock foot switch input is valid P409 d0 1 the hydraulic tailstock foot switch input is invalid Time sequence of execution process and signal output of tailstock command Define RM78 or RM79 in P519 P520 when the tailstock in position signal is needed to check After M78 is executed the system outputs the tailstock forward signal from M78 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and th
183. cord in case of that Main functions of alarm record are yx Search for times of power on alarm message yx Display the total alarm number display the alarm number to be listed display the current alarm number yx Transmit alarm record to U disc through USB interface 125 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Total number 890 Displayed amount 220 number0220 hp1 NO 125 90 59 02 E346 Tailstock retraction detection overtime alarm 1001 20 59 MO5 Spindle stop 2001 05 59 028 Change machining program NO 126 00 01 59 E367 Chuck unclamping in position signal abnormal 91 11 20 006 M91 used Illegally M91 pin Is not defined 01 21 59 E302 Z Drive unit alarm NO 129 00 40 20 E303 Xdrive unit alarm 120 40 20 E317 X tool nose software limit alarm in negative direction Fig 4 9 Alarm record display Example A new alarm record 120 40 20 E317 X tool nose software limit alarm in negative direction The times of power on is No 129 displayed in the last alarm record It means that this alarm record number 220 happens after 120 hours 40 minutes 20 seconds later after the 129 power on The alarm contents are E317 X tool nose software limit alarm in negative direction Note 1 During program changing the number of the program is displayed on the alarm record for example 028 in Fig 4 9 means that after 2001 hours 05 minutes and 59 seconds of the 125 power on the changed program number is 028
184. ction Position Control System User Manual 1 2 Total Frame U disc To machine Y drive unit To encoder Rear cover Te To tool post To converter i Fig 1 2 total connection drawing 250 2 1 Chapter Two Interface Graph CHAPTER TWO Interface Table I INTERFACE GRAPH X5 MPG female OV MPG B pulse MB MPG B pulse MB 5V MPG A pulse MA TS pe MPG A pulse MA Cia S Z O ael X2 tool post male Tool post CW signal TL O Tool post CCW signal TL Power supply 24V Power supply 24V ground OV e e gt Tool post tool number signal T1 T1 Tool post tool number signal T2 12 Tool post tool number signal T3 T3 Tool post tool number signal T4 T4 Sa X zero signal PCX Z zero signal PCZ ee aa 8 Tool post lock in position signal TCP gt Tool post tool number signal T5 T5 e Tool post tool number signal T6 T6 Tool ignal T7 T7 e one a a AS ue ALS e Tool post tool number signal T8 T8 Cil Ce X 3 motor female X Z drive 5V Z enabling Zen E e X enabling Xen Z negative terminal Zdir on Z positive terminal Zdir X negative terminal Xdir EN l Aa me DO X positive terminal Xdir Z pulse positive terminal Z
185. ction input output signal yx Diagnosis of each axis hardware limit signal yx Diagnosis of each machine zero machine reference point signal yx Diagnosis of spindle speed and encode lines Press DASN5 Sto enter the DIAGNOSIS working mode and the display is as Fig 4 8 DIAGNOSIS INPUT INTERFACE pindle speed 0000 Encoder lines 0000 Fig 4 8 Diagnosis working mode 4 8 1 Interface Signal Search Firstly set P415_d3 1 to open the diagnosis page prompt then you can view both the concrete content of each I O in DIAGNOSIS working mode and the common signal name hardware interface and pin number of each I O in diagnosis working mode when the parameter setting is closed the operator cannot view the relative information 122 Chapter Four System Operation tf Yi lt a Press l to search each I O and the searched I O is highlighted It can be displayed alternately in the input and output ports by or 4 8 2 Interface Signal Name Display Explanations The system has 23 channel switching input signals 18 channel switching output signals each signal has one name which means to be the signal definition General signal name the input signal names are Ul01 UI32 the output signal names are UO01 UO32 each signal corresponds to one pin Ul17 UI25 are not exported and UO19 UO32 are not exported in interfaces Standard signal name is called exclusive signal name For a special machine once some signal is cov
186. custom command in the solidification area the command will be displayed on the screen After the custom command in No 254 program is deleted there is no custom command in the system solidification area the help information dialog box for No 254 program prompts No custom command in solidification area 4 Press ESC to exit the current state Notice If the bit parameter P404 d0 0 the part program of No 254 can t be solidified picked and deleted 4 3 5 hp1 Function Hp1 help key including the system command help macro string insertion line number sort character string replacing cursor positioning and so on When the current program is No 253 or No 254 hp1 help key adds its operation prompt The movement of the MPG control cursor is controlled by MPG key 4 3 5 1 Part program Command Help In program edit window press hp1 1 the system prompts Command help introduction window the function can search all commands of the system including G M S T and F as follows 28 Chapter Four System Operation 1 G M S T F separately introduces G M S T F command 2 Press INPUT and input the command number to search the system displays the definition the function the format and the explanation of the command number Example Example search G01 command help Press hp1 1 INPUT G 01 ENTRE the system displays G01 definition function format and explanation 4 3 5 2 Inserting Macro String The procedure
187. d forbid the slider to traverse Position 3 forbid the spindle to rotate and the slider to traverse External feed spindle hold knob use Before program running When the external feed spindle holding button is on the position 1 2 and 3 the spindle start stop can be controlled manually 73 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual In SINGLE working mode When the External feed Spindle hold Knob is located at position 1 all the commands are executed as usual when it is at position 2 the spindle control commands can be executed rather than the move commands of X Z axes These move commands can be executed only when the knob is rotated back to position 1 When it is at position 3 no block can be executed To execute the blocks rotate the knob back to position 2 or position 1 In CONTINUOUS run mode After the system starts programs the feed hold knob can be rotated any time to control the spindle and the slider When the knob is placed to the position 1 programs run normally When the knob is rotated from 1 to 2 the slider stops and the spindle still Keeps the previous state When the knob is rotated from 2 to 3 the spindle stops When the knob is rotated from 3 to 2 the spindle recovers the previous state When the knob is rotated from 2 to 1 the slider starts to run The system will automatically exits from the auto initial state after ESC or RESET is pressed in the course of the feed hold and th
188. d prompts the alarm E174 machining programs are locked and are orbidden to modify when the system edits and modifies the programs P416_d0 should be set to 0 Edit key meanings and use in program edit window 1 ft y moves up down till the top the bottom line Keep pressing the moving key and the cursor cursor UP DOWN move key Press the move key every time and the cursor continuously moves up down till the first last line or the move key is releases In the character string search function hp1 the operator can search the required character string up and down 2 cursor LEFT RIGHT movement key Press the move key every time and the cursor moves left right one character Keep pressing the moving key and the cursor continuously moves left right till the first last character or the move key is releases amp 3 ORY Home key the cursor rapidly moves to the home or the first field head of the line Press continuously the head key and the cursor switches between the head and the first field of the line The compound of the head key and the deletion key can delete the current line Ti 4 SEP End key the cursor rapidly moves to the end of the line 5 AUER nsert alter Changing edit input mode switch the insert and the alter after pressing it once The cursor also changes correspondingly and the insert mode cursor flashes to be one horizontal line and the alter mode cursor flashes to be the high light square
189. d rush out the valid area of the signal 3 When the parameter is set to limit emergency stop mode bit parameter P402_d7 1 and the system runs across the limit block there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed by the system and the actual position Adjust the machine coordinates Relative parameters Bit parameters P402 d7 P404 d6 P404 d1 Bit parameter P402_d7 sets the hardware limit alarm mode Bit parameterP402_d6sets whether the hardware limit alarm checks Bit parameterP402_d1sets the hardware limit alarm level of each axis When P404_d1 1 is high level alarm the positive limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally closed contact are connected to X Z Y positive limit input interface LT they are open and the system alarms in serial the negative limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally closed contact are connected to X Z Y negative limit input interface LT it is off and the system alarms in serial it is suggested that the operator should select in prior the hardware limit to the normally closed contact of each axis as follows When P404_d1 0 is low level alarm the positive limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally open contact are connected to X Z Y positive limit input interface LT they are closed and the system alarms in serial the negative limit switch X Y Z of each axis are normally open contact are connected to X Z Y negative limit input interface LT it is off a
190. d the line input 6600 the system automatically creates the next block number and continuously input the program content press ESC to complete the program content input after the last line programs are input Note 1 The first row of every line only displays the blank space 2 Each block only displays 60 characters and only the first 60 characters are displayed when there are more than 60 characters you can press to left move one character 3 The serial number of the first row blank is 1 the last is 252 and the system only displays the cursor instead of the character there are up to 250 characters in the edit line 25 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 3 4 2 Inserting Program Line Insert one or many program line between two program lines or in the front of the current block as follows 1 Move the cursor to the first block end or the last block home of the two blocks 2 Press ENTER and the system automatically creates a new block number between the current block and the next the serial number increment is P333 parameter 1 4 integer the next block number can be modified when the above the increment is not enough and remains a blank line 8 Input the required block content 4 After all content is input and many line are required to insert ENTER is pressed which is not done when one line is required to insert Example Example insert a new block M3 between and as
191. de by USB After U disc is inserted the system automatically performs the software upgrade according to the system prompt to execute the operation When the system software uses USB mode to upgrade U disc root needs creates one file C001DATA the command sending and receiving must be in the file The file name format DATA file number 3 digit TXT file name range 0 254 When the memory whole update uses USB U disc root catalog needs to create the file COO01MEMO the command sending and receiving are executed in the file The file name format MEMO file number 3 digit TXT File number range 0 254 Note When the system uses USB software upgrade the operator presses ESC or RESET to return EDIT working mode to edit the current program once again after the upgrade is completed successfully otherwise the system alarms 86 Chapter Four System Operation 4 6 3 4 Functional Command Privilege In PARAMETER window some operation functional option is related to the privilege the forbidden operation functional option is displayed in grey The followings are the functional option and password privilege Operation privilege 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level Mil Machine Device Machine Not input Operation option manufacturer administrator operator password initialization manufacturer operation Parameter received by USB Based on on on Based on parameter parameter parameter parameter level leve
192. den E349 Use machine zero When the machine is back to Zero Using MACHINE ZERO RETURN key function the modifying manual is return key l to zero forbidden ls NE rne x valle NES Eno ie ee Modify the S value to the correct gear S exceed limit shifting range in the non frequency on value spindle gear shifting E351 When the spindle is controlled by Y l a bv Y e axis the start and stop of the spindle sados mae IO ges nac mie e pInola y can t be controlled in JOG Ende Spindle Y levels 10C SPINES Can ene E pa Execute M48 to get back the spindle i shifting command when can t be changed function controlled by Y axis E353 The M47 M48 function forbidden is M47 M48 function set in parameter when there is no Y Modify parameter P405 d1 and E347 Modify the spindle collocated parameter P410 d6 doesn t work axis P405_d1 or Y axis cant be P410_d4 changed P410_d4 208 Chapter Six Alarm Message No E354 Undefined E355 254 program error 254 program error the machining Modify 254 program resolve error program is forbidden to execute The repeated used signal at the same Input output The same input output port is used l l E356 ort is separately employed different multiple use for the different signal b d r dd ports oe Pl ees The override is zero in feedrate Adjusted to feedrate override nonzero E358 l l Check the spindle relative part resolve Spindle running is The spindle rot
193. der the system prompts USB device specified directory C001 PRO has no programs If the folder named C001PRO does not exist in the U disc the system prompts No specified directory in USB device C001 PRO 2 Output the part program stored the system to U disc as follows Insert U disc in the system USB interface 2 The system automatically opens U file catalog create a file in the U disc COO1PRO file format CNCxxx TXT The system creates CO01PRO when there is no CO01PRO in the U disc root catalog In program search page press key to input hp2 Edit 4 Select the required programs to send according to the system hp1 help message 21 CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 3 3 2 USB communication Note Press ENTER to send and the system prompts to select the sending mode The system outputs the selected programs based on the selected sending mode and displays the sending process till the sending is completed Select ESC to exit from U disc Receiving Part Programs USB CNC 1 After entering USB communication mode the system firstly checks U disc and opens CO01PRO existed in the U disc and lists CNCxxx TXT file 2 Output part program stored in U disc to the CNC system as follows 1 Insert U disc in the system USB interface 2 In the program list index page press key to input hp2 the system will automatically
194. details Brake delaying time in spindle stop ms 1 __ auxiliary parameter P315 The parameter defines the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to the spindle brake signal Unit ms Output time in spindle brake ms 1 __ auxiliary parameter P316 The parameter means the output time of brake signal and the time is set from the spindle motor brake starting to its exact stop Max speed limit of spindle __ auxiliary parameter P317 This parameter limits the spindle maximum speed Unit r min If the S speed set by the program command is greater than the value given by P317 the spindle speed is clamped to the one set in P317 Pulse time controlled by the spindle ms __ auxiliary parameter P326 The parameter defines the durable time of the pulse signal when the system executing the spindle M03 M04 M05 and cooling M08 MO9 output are the pulse control mode Unit ms M respond check time ms 1 __ auxiliary parameter P329 The parameter defines the upper limit of M respond check time the system alarms when it has not checked the M respond signal in the time Unit ms For example execute M10 in JOG working mode to wait P329 time and the system alarms when it has not checked the chuck clamping responding signal P409_d5 1 Cutting enabled when rotation speed reach certain percentage __ auxiliary parameter P341 If the cutting is started when the spindle is just turned ON or gear shift is just finished as the preset rotatio
195. ding speed feed The manual feedrate override has 16 gear 0 150 the corresponding embedding feedrate of each gear is as follows Feedrate feedrate mm min Feedrate feedrate mm min ere owe pom o o CI A Note 1 There is an error between actual speed and data in this table and the actual speed should prevail 2 When the feedrate override is 0 the system prompts Feedrate override is 0 which indicates the command is in execution state and the machine slider is in stop state The slider will move as soon as the override is adjusted to a non zero value Feedrate override WWW gt The manual feedrate override has 16 gears 0 150 press FEROE and the feedrate override WWW increase one gear till 150 press ERE and the feedrate override reduces one gear till 0 4 4 1 6 Inputting Field Moving Setting Feedrate In JOG working mode the coordinate axis moves according to the input length and direction or directly moves from the current position to the input coordinate position instead of the set step width as follows Relative field of movement Corresponding operation of each coordinate axis X move_X field X position or U field X relative movement Y move_Y field Y position or V field Y relative movement Z move_Z field Z position or W field Z relative movement X Z Y U W V range 99999 999mm 99999 999mm Feedrate_F field FOOOO F15000 the leading zero can be omitted u
196. dle analog voltage round PST us 11026 External cycle start 2 PsP Wer roer Etemp OO OOOO PRES UNO r1010 Pressure LOW check UI11 r1011 Hydraulic chuck foot switch h input E pov aveny rot earning s ba EE E AV s ws woos 200s spi top OO O a me UO08 r2008 Spindle brake signal e UO10 2010 Cooling ON Table 3 2 Interface Standard General Variable Standard signal name function explanation signal name signal name name Tool post CW output signal zo poan Poner supply 28 axis zero point signal Power supply 24V ground Pozas zero point signal O O O 4 i T7 255 il NO X2 interface A e Bo JIP ae i ME CAS i oT Bo E R2 dl CGSR IT Hist BAVGND 249 501 SO 503 504 M1 Mi0 SVC X1 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Gecococcococoececoccos O 06060000 20000600000 rreoececo e ce eooc cco oO ALT 24VGND RMLO Full 24VGND 124 FAY W78 W9 424 UOl U AGND SEGRE ES amp S amp ST 32 33 PRES 35 36 af 24V M5 SP TCP SHL TPS 24VGND M M MSP M M8 input output 44 pin D type female oa T T T ST A ta DA oe TL tady T1 T3 TCF 9 TL 10 24VGND 11 T2 12 T4 13 PEZ 14 T5 lb Tf X2 input output 15 pin D type male 3 2 2 Connection Method of Input Signal The input signal includes Ul01 UI16 UI
197. e including JOG STEP X Z Y MPG the system function operation way prompt key Left top display tool nose coordinate and machine coordinate Left bottom MDI input and alarm prompt area Right middle display machine s current state including spindle cooling lubricating tool post chuck tailstock speed cutting speed and so on Pop up window display system s alarm message 9 Miscellaneous function state display 1 Miscellaneous function state uses the icon or correspond command symbol display 2 Black sign indicates the current state spindle cooling 3 Red sign indicates the function is being executed and is not completed 4 Red flash indicates the last execution is failure or broken in midcourse reset emergency stop operation and the system takes the corresponding function is in the unconfirmed state When the tool or chuck is in the unconfirmed state the system cannot start the machining program the system recovers the normal state when it executes successful operation or is switched on again 5 The green sign indicates the check is normal and the yellow sign indicates the check is abnormal 6 The S following the spindle gear indicates the real time checking spindle speed 7 The pressure check icon A it is green when it is normal it is yellow in half when it is low yellow in full when the time of low pressure exceeds the time set by P332 8 G96 G97 and S indicate whether the system is in the constant surfa
198. e to connect with U disk 3 1 1 USB Interface USB interface is used to connect the CNC system and U disk The system not only sends the data to the U disk and also receives the data in the U disk by the USB interface The U disk is directly inserted into the USB interface on the system panel and the system automatically identifies and opens the content of the U disk when the U disk creates the file and file name in the root catalog according to the file catalog requirements of the system Note 1 The system USB interface must be covered without being used and without being exposed for long time otherwise which causes the surface metal being oxidated and reduces the interface sensitivity 2 Do not keeping the U disk in the system USB interface for long time otherwise which causes the system interface to be aged and damages the U disk 3 After the U disk is used the user must press ESC to close the U disk before pulling out it at the moment the USB icon displayed on the system window disappears and it can be pulled out from the system USB interface otherwise which damages the system hardware and the U disk 3 2 X1 X2 Interface The CNC system X1 X2 interface have 23 channel digital input 18 channel digital output which use the photoelectric isolation 3 2 1 X1 X2 Interface Signal Definition Special attentions 1 The 23 channel digital input signal and 18 channel digital output signal correspond to 23 input pins
199. e parameter P532 G311 and correctly connects with the wirings The concrete interface parameter definitions are referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working Mode the concrete wiring connection is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection 2 To get the exact position the run decelerates once the system has checked the external input interface signal change So the actual feedrate in G31 is not too high and it is suggested that it should be less than 1000mm min otherwise G31 cannot realize the skip function because it cannot check the interface signal Relative parameter Interface parameter P532 defines the input interface pin The relative parameter of cutting feed is referred to G01 Example Current X 100 Z 100 G31 Z30 F500 The move distance is Z70 Z moves at 500mm min continuously to Z30 when G31l signal cannot meet the skip condition Z 68 37 G31l meets the skip condition and Z immediately stops running and the system executes the next command 4 18 G35 I O Signal Observation Command The specified parameter block can be compiled by G35 command in the overall programs Code format G35 11 5 9 32 K1 3 6 32 Filed meaning I Input port signal There are 32 numbers 1 32 can be followed with the and the numbers are separated by K Output port signal There are 32 numbers 1 32 can be followed with the K and the numbers are cod separated by Explanation The I O signal
200. e set in JOG working mode In the JOG or AUTO working mode and non running the program press will call the macro variable display window and express all the macro and V l if modifying variable press ENTER key to choose the variable and input the data then press variable in the program press will let the pointer pointing the needed ENTER key to confirm again The variable value is forbidden to modify in the program running process Double precision floating point variable _ common variable r200 r299 Double precision floating point variable belongs to common variable its range is 200 299 100 in total As data flow may easily occur during common variable r001 r199 calculation the use of double precision floating point variable can solve this problem Range of double precision floating point 64 digit with sign Explanations 1 Do not use the double precision floating point variable in the monitoring 2 Double precision floating point variable cannot be in code field otherwise an alarm will occur 3 Refer to instruction of common variable r001 r199 Characteristics In AUTO mode double precision floating point variable may vary with program path It has following characteristics 1 In AUTO mode in the INITIAL STATE of execution the variables are 0 2 The variable value will not clear to O when recycle after executing M20 3 In MANUAL or AUTO mode press to call macro variable the window does not display double pr
201. e spindle stopping The previous state of spindle and the unfinished commands cannot be reserved Programs are restarted if the machining is executed continuously 4 5 6 3 External Start and Pause Signal The External cycle start described in this manual is called the External cycle start up The external cycle start dwell signal is controlled by parameter P412_d7 P412_ d7 1 The system external start dwell signal is enabled the input signal is led into by ST SP pin P412 d7 0 The system external start dwell signal is disabled the pin of input signal can be used as others The external pause operation key signal SP has the same function with that of the feed hold key cycle pause key on the system panel the external cycle start key signal ST has the same function with that of the cycle start key on the system panel SP ST are input to the system from the machine and they are valid when the low level is connected Before the system is switched from other working mode to AUTO working mode External start button and External pause button are released power off otherwise the system alarms The detailed circuit connection method is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection 4 5 6 4 Feed Device Alarm Function When the system needs the function the input pin is defined in the interface parameter and is correctly connected the system checks the signal on the corresponding pin 74 Chapter Fou
202. e tailstock forward operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the tailstock forward in position after it has checked the tailstock forward in position signal interface pin RM78 is at low level and RM79 is at high level in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for tailstock forward in position respond check overtime After M79 is executed the system outputs the tailstock backward signal from M79 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the tailstock backward operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the tailstock backward in position after it has checked the tailstock backward in position signal interface 60 Chapter Four System Operation pin RM78 is at low level and RM79 is at high level in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for tailstock backward in position respond check overtime Besides using commands the external foot switch also can control the hydraulic tailstock The system switches the forward backward by M78 M79 when the foot switch is stepped once Tailstock foot switch releases before the system is switched from other working mode to JOG or AUTO working mode otherwise the system alarms normally 1 M78 M79 output time sequence in p
203. e terre EREN 34 44 1 3 MPG CONTO lemas rra AO AAA AAA AA 35 44 1 4 Rapid Traverse Speed Saler reirinta s Aans AAA ARA 36 4 4 1 5 Low Speed Feed Speed Select msi AAA 37 4 4 1 6 Inputting Field Moving Setting Feedrate oerooronnonnaconinnanicanananananananonanannnnncnonaccnncnnnnnos 27 4 4 1 7 Drive Unit Enabling Cueto oe te ee eee 39 44 1 8 Coordinate Axis Motion Alarm Prompt A 39 4 4 2 Creating Coordinate System emerererenenenenenenenennnnnnananannnnnnnnnnnenenenenenenenrnnnrnsasananasnnnnnnnss 40 4 4 2 1 Creating Machine Coordinate System Machine Zero Return Machine Reference Point Return PERE RR 40 4 4 2 2 Creating Machine Coordinate System Without Machine Zero Without Machine Reference Point E RA O 41 4423 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System A e 42 4424 Setting Program Relerence PO darian AA AAA 43 4425 Program Reterence P int FRO LLU aer 44 4 4 2 6 Recovering the Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point 44 4 4 3 Spindle Control Function eeecssnsnccnenene nene nenes nene renace nene nenas 44 44 3 1 Spindle Starting Stopping CONTO lamas 44 4 4 3 2 Spindle S Command _ Gear Shifting Controlar 46 44 3 3 Spindle S_ Speed CONTO sorna dd aii 47 4 4 3 4 Servo Spindle Working State Setting DI Ao N AQ 443 5 Spindle Orientation CONT eessen a ER E ERSA TAERE 50 4 4 4 Cooling Control erererererennnnnnnnnonenenenonsnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn neceser nene ne nene nens nnnnnrnnanananannnnnn
204. e that the corresponding M61 M68 commands should be solidified Key control M61 M68 When the system input interface is not enough set parameters P533 P536 to 99 in AUTO or MANUAL mode press numerical keys can control commands M61 M68 When P533 is 99 key 1 corresponds to M61 key 2 to M62 when P534 is 99 key 3 to M63 key 4 to M64 when P535 is 99 key 5 to M65 key 6 to M66 When P536 99 press key 7 perform M67 then press 8 perform the M68 Explanations 1 In MANUAL AUTO mode key control function M61 M68can only be used when the system is free or no program is executed It cannot be used even in SINGLE stop mode and when window popped up 2 When the system is power on M61 M63 M65 M67 is always executed when foot switch is used for the first time 3 Inthe process of M61 M63 M65 or M67 execution is RESET key is pressed the system will go to M62 M64 M66 or M68 when foot switch is press next time 8 4 The Foot Switch of M51 M58 Commands P557 M511 M51 M52 execution switch P558 M53I M53 M54 execution switch P559 M55I M55 M56 execution switch P560 M571 M57 M58 execution switch Explanation Refer to the Foot Switch of M61 Command in Section 10 3 of PROGRAMMING for the related execution function of the command The foot switch of M51 M58 commands is the different from the one 247 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual of the M61 command fail to perform the bu
205. e the system executes the thread machining it should judge according to the current actual checked spindle speed When the actual speed is more than 300 the system uses the high speed machining otherwise it uses the low speed machining mode In high speed machining the system has the strongest following to the spindle speed wave but the stability of the motor running reduces when the spindle speed wave is strong there is the wave on the machining surface and the stepper motor causes the step out In low speed machining the system has the poorer following to the spindle speed wave but the Stability of the motor running increases when the spindle speed wave is strong the wave on the machining surface is worse and the stepper motor does not cause easily the step out Thread spindle wave alarm __ auxiliary parameter P307 When the spindle speed wave exceeds P307 in thread cutting the system alarms after the current thread block machine is completed and dwell the machining workpiece the next step of the machining programming can be consecutively performed if the CYCLE START is controlled The parameter is enabled to G33 G32 G34 commands Unit r min Spindle JOG time ms __ auxiliary parameter P308 In spindle JOG mode it is the time for starting the spindle then the spindle stops automatically after the time is up When parameter P308 is 0 the spindle JOG function is disabled Unit ms Speed in spindle JOG __ auxiliary parameter
206. e workpiece coordinate system N1050 G00 Z300 X200 Back to initial point N1060 M02 Program Example 2 The following programs are introduced the explanation of process monitor The system has exterior cycle start pause function the handlers stand far away the system and can use the exterior press button to come true the start pause function But in the position which is far away the system its hard to come true single block stop In the following program it will come true the function through the process monitor In the program if UIO5 corresponding pin is connected to the system detection signal when press the switch UlO5 0 when release UlO5 1 After opened the monitor this press button can make the cycle switch between single block and continuum execution working mode 106 NOO30 r7000 r1005 0 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 NO040 if r7000 0 then r5008 2 If the signal r1005 is monitored to be zero then pause NOO30 r7001 r1005 1 monitor tests the state of input signal r1005 r1006 234 Chapter Seven Statement Programming N0040 if r7001 1 then r7010 2 If the press button is released then open the 0 monitor again N0070 r7011 2 Open the 1 monitor by mode 2 N0070 r7010 2 Open the 0 monitor by mode 2 N0010 GO X100 2200 N0020 G00 X50 Z190 N0050 G1 X50 Z160 F300 NO080 G1 U10 W 20 NOO80 G1 W 20 NOO80 G1 U10 W 20 NO090 GO X100 Z200 N0160 M02 Program Example
207. ec eee ee re ee ee 260 3 3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection wiii cc arar ri 260 3 4 Tool Exchange Control Function and Connection iman ia a rr 262 3 4 1 Tool Exchange Control Signal Definition i i i cc lc cr 262 XVIII Contents 3 4 2 Signal Connection o tee LEE 262 3 4 3 Function Description AAA 263 343 1 Tool Change MOS Dira PO ERAN RR A AA AAA 263 3432 Tool Change MOTOS Tinta A RT AA 263 35 X3 Motor Interface ninia A A AS rer re ree 265 3 5 1 Signal Definition AA 265 3 5 2 Technical Specifications o Eee eee 265 3 5 3 Equivalent Circuit o a E A 265 3 5 3 1 Drive Unit Alarm Signal XALM ZALM VALIA 265 3532 Enable Signal Xen Zen AAN oa 266 3533 Pulse Signal and Direction Signal A A id 266 3 5 4 Connection Between CNC System and Drive Unit of Compound Stepper Motor 267 3 5 5 Connecting Between CNC and Drive Unit of Reaction Stepper Motor esseere 269 3 5 6 Connection Layout Between CNC and AC Servo Drive Unit srrssssrsserrsrrrsserrsnrnennnnnnnen 271 3 5 7 Connection Layout Between CNC and Panasonic Drive Unit mrrrrrrsnrrencnnnnnannnnnnos 273 3 5 8 Connection Layout Between CNC System and Japanese Yaskawa Drive Unit 274 36 X4 Spindle intertace a d Y Interface tail ere cr RAI ar IS 275 3 6 1 Signal Definitions srssetsettrrtstsrtertsrsrtsrtttttrnnennennsnntnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennennennenen nnna 275 3 6 2 Converter Technical Specification ermrrrrrrrrerreeeeerecncen rr 276 3 6 3 Encoder Technical Speci
208. ecision floating point variables 215 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 7 1 2 2 Pointer Variable The variable number range of pointer variable is from 9000 to 9049 total 50 pieces The pointer variable is specially to point the address of a common variable To evaluate it means to evaluate all it pointed common variable and using its value means to use all it pointed common variable s value The pointer variable can participate the operation or reading judgment The method of creating and changing pointer The pointer must be created correctly and points to a certain given common variable before using the pointer variable The pointing sign are and gt and a blank is allowed between them The variable format of creating and changing pointer Pointer variable name gt expression Such as r 9001 gt 1 expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001 common variable r 9002 gt 199 expression of the r9002 pointer variable pointing to r199 common variable r 9003 gt r100 when r100 equals to five it s the expression of r9003 pointing to r005 common variable r 9003 gt r 9003 1 expression of r9003 pointing to next common variable when it points r5 at first then now it points to r6 r 9003 gt r 9003 1 expression of r9003 pointing to previous common variable when it points r6 at first then now it points to r5 The characteristic of pointer variable 1 A
209. ected the system selects 0 100 gear when the parameter setting the gear is invalid it is 0 001 gear Wbk2 external MPG override 2 when it is connected the system selects 0 010 gear Fail to connect the Wbk2 and Wbk1 the system selects 0 001 gear 3 MGP emergency stop button Wsp external MPG emergency stop signal the system should use the normally closed contact the function is equal to the system ESP signal 63 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 4 9 5 Safety Door Check Function When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P511 SAGT safety door check signal Functional description 1 SAGT is connected with OV CNC confirms that the safety door closes 2 In AUTO Working mode the system alarms Alarm for safety door not be closed when it has checked that the safety door opens 3 In automatic run when the system has checked the safety door has opened the axis feed stops the cooling closes and the system alarms 4 The safety door check function is valid in AUTO working mode 4 4 9 6 Pressure Low Alarm Check Function Relative parameters P412 d5 1 pressure low check function P412_d4 sets pressure low alarm level P412_d4 1 low level alarm P412_d4 0 high level alarm P332 sets the durable pressure low alarm time Functional d
210. ecuted by pressing CYCLE START key 9 w Once the monitor is opened in the system inner because its two description statements are alternated ceaseless executed circularly its execution speed is faster than the common program for the calculation statement which executes assignment after meet the requirement it may be executed for time after time this variable result is uncertainly suggest to don t use it like this Pay attention in the common part program this variable must be used carefully For example if r7000 100 then r3 r3 1 if meet the condition r3 pluses 1 at this time pay much attention the value of r3 is very uncertainly the accumulation frequency is very high if the call or transfer of subprogram in the program uses r3 it will induce the program execution uncertainly suggest that the uncertainly variable like r3 can t be used for the real function of all command in this instance 10 In the common program read the monitor register monitor management register it s value is zero or uncertain such as r5 r7000 then the value of r5 is uncertain 11 If one monitor is open it can check the signal change above 3ms width when ten monitor are open they can check the signal change above 30ms width 233 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 7 3 3 Monitor Program Example Program example 1 The following programs are introduced the explanation of process monitor In the
211. ed O inspector 1 inspector 9 inspector Their work is called process monitor in the same time of executing the common part program they specially track with the matters which are real time happened in the part program execution process But the user must describe the task of the inspector and tell them to track what matter how to deal with it after it happen The inspector without task is in dormancy state Each inspector has a monitor register and a monitor management register separately the corresponding turn number is as following Inspector number O 9 number in turn Monitor register number r7 000 r7009 corresponding the inspector number in turn Monitor management register number r7010 r7019 corresponding the inspector number in turn In the progress of machining if there are progress monitors enabled on the right side of the program status bar is displayed M n Thereinto M indicates the process monitor and n indicates the number of enabled process monitors The operator can also view the states of process monitors being used on the macro variable window E g M 2 indicates there are two process monitors enabled 230 Chapter Seven Statement Programming 7 3 1 Process Monitor Description r7000 Using the process monitor at first must describe the process monitor according to the rule The process monitor description includes a assignment statement and a if condition statement neither of the two can be disp
212. ed barded wire net must not be the earthing line otherwise which causes the injury of persons or the device damaged 4 3 Power Supply Requirements The system can normally run in the following AC input power supply Voltage fluctuation AC 0 85 1 1 x220V Frequency fluctuation 50Hz 2 The requirements for power supply of machine tool are described in machine tool installation manual 4 4 Guard The guard grade is not less than IP20 4 5 Reuse it Again After the CNC system is not used for long time the user must firstly clean the dust and dry up it and then check the wiring the earthing of the CNC system device keeps it power on in some time to ensure that the system runs without any failure 281 GGSK P 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 282 Appendix APPENDIX Appendix 1 CNC system electrical component symbol explanations The following examples are some connection symbols of electrical components Name Name Hall proximity Symbol Travel switch Semiconductor diode Indicator Resistor Normally open contact Push button switch Normally closed with lock contact Push button switch without lock Shield layer Protective earthing lt gt Exchange Wiring terminal 283 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual CGSR IT Hist Appendix 2 CNC system tool post controller circuit method layout DENOS HOS Fe
213. ed by the program and the max speed P113 of cutting feed demonstrates the program path d5__short linear high speed 0 High speed connection the short linear connection transition uses the high speed connection Do not use the short linear connection transition does not use the high speed connection P401_d5 0 for the short movement the continuous short linearity without blank line annotation line or other block between blocks with rapid execution CNC uses the prospective control mode to realize the best speed connection transition max preread blocks reach 80 99 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual d4 cutting command 0 Continuous smooth transition 1 Decelerate to zero In G01 G02 G03 cutting feed when bit parameter P401_d4 0 the system uses the post acceleration deceleration processing and forms an arc transition at the path intersection point of the neighboring two cutting feed blocks which cannot exactly position the intersection of the two paths and there is the contour error between the actual path and the programmed path To avoid the contour error the operator can insert G04 delay command between two blocks or set P401_d4 to 1 At the moment when the previous block moves to the end point of the block it decelerates to zero and exactly positions to the end point of the block and then executes the next cutting feed block in the mode because each block ac
214. ed contact of the machine contact switch with self lock 257 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Circuit diagram ZAVGND CNC side Connection example Button switch without lock Button switch with lock As CNC input interface 3 Standard signal name definition of input interface SP External pause operation key signal ST External cycle start key signal ESP ESP key signal Note This signal must be connected SHL chuck foot switch Foot switch input signal of hydraulic chuck TPS tailstock foot switch Foot switch input signal of hydraulic tailstock PRES Pressure low check the hydraulic system pressure low check input signal DecX DecZ DecY Deceleration signal of X Z Y axis machine reference point return PCX PCZ PCY Zero signal of machine reference point return for of X Z Y axis LT LT X Z Y positive negative limit switch signals Connect X Z positive negative limit signal to the signal Note LT LT connections are referred to OPERATION 4 1 Safety Guard MXZ1 Feed hold signal When it is valid i e switch contact ON the feed is locked i e X Z stop MXZ2 Spindle feed hold signal When it is valid i e switch contact ON the feed is locked namely X Z axes stop Note MXZ1 MXZ2 control is referred to OPERATION Auto Working Mode RM10 Chuck clamping outer chuck releasing inner chuck in position detection RM11 Chuck releas
215. edrate override is the current gear when the speed is higher than P113 the speed set by P113 should prevail When the input F field is O the system will adopt the internal speed as the feedrate When the JOG or STEP is performed it is under the control of F filed even when the speed indicator is OFF Under the condition that no F field is input when the speed indicator is ON the movement is rapid traverse and affected by the_rapid traverse override when the indicator is OFF the movement is low speed traverse and is affected by feedrate override Under the condition that no F field is input when the indicator is OFF the speed of low speed traverse is limited by P113 maximum cutting feedrate when the speed is higher than P113 the speed set by P113 should prevail Under the condition that no F field is input when the indicator is OFF the movement and AUTO mode of two axis low feed is the same as G01 interpolation feed These two axes move simultaneously at a proportional speed and stop at the same time F is the resultant speed of the two axes Under the condition that no F field is input when the indicator is ON the rapid traverse rate Chapter Four System Operation of single axis feed is determined by parameters P100 P102 rapid traverse speed and rapid traverse override 8 Under the condition that no F field is input when the indicator is ON the rapid traverse rate two axis rapid traverse is determined by P400_d3 and it i
216. elative absolute movement of field is input MPG is forbidden temporarily and the LED flickers After the above functions are executed MPG function recovers automatically and the other S M T auxiliary functions are valid 4 When the bigger override X 0 1 mm is selected the motor will rapidly traverse if the MPG is 35 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual rotated rapidly At the moment because the system automatically accelerates decelerate the motor will traverse not to stop although the MPG stops The actual moving distance is determined by max speed of motor the acceleration deceleration time the feedrate override and the MPG speed The rapider the speed is the longer the acceleration deceleration time is and the rapider the MPG speed is the longer the moving distance of motor decelerating is otherwise the shorter the moving distance of motor is 5 P400_d4 0 the step width 0 1 is valid P400_d4 1 the step width 0 1 is invalid 6 When P400_d1 is set to 1 the external MPG control button is valid Y Z selection axis and the step regulation key are invalid 4 4 1 4 Rapid Traverse Speed Selection Manual rapid traverse and low feed state selection In JOG mode the negative positive movement speed of each axis can select rapid traverse and Y cutting feed low speed movement Press ar to switch the rapid traverse and low speed feed states The speed indicator ON is to select the rapid tra
217. elative programming NO100 G01 U12 5 W 35 F150 Note F cutting feed is executed with feed per minute G98 except for special explanations it is 0 when the system uses F programming at the moment the system alarms in running programs feedrate is Zero 163 GGSK I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 3 G06 Enter G06 Motion Mode with Single Axis G07 Stop G06 Motion G08 Enabling Disabling GO6Mode G06 G07 command is usually used for controlling the long time moving indexing and stop of the rotation axis The definition of GO6 command The mode of enabling a coordinate axis to move at the specified F speed is called G06 motion mode in this manual After entering G06 motion mode the specified axis will move automatically till the specified position is reached or the stop condition is satisfied During the execution of G06 motion mode the user can perform any other operations to the system such as programming and program execution Whether GO6 is allowed for Z X Y is set by P419_d3 P419_ d1 G06 command format The following example is described based on Z axis and X and Y axes are the same as Z axis G06 Z W _ 18 0 F_ lf there is a figure behind Z W it means the single axis feed and the axis stops after finishing the distance if the low level of the input pin of Ul08 is detected the axis stops automatically G06 Z 18 0 F_ If there is a positive sign without figure behind Z it means Z pos
218. em Without Machine Zero Without Machine Reference Point Prompt the coordinate axis with the zero check device cannot execute the operation The coordinate axis without the zero check device without deceleration signal and zero signal can create the machine coordinate system as follows Format 41 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual modified into the new coordinate value modified into the new coordinate value 4 4 2 3 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System The system uses the floating workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is the reference to tool setting and relative dimension After the machine coordinate system is confirmed the workpiece coordinate system should be set Format Input INPUT X NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current X tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Input INPUT Y NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Y tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value Input INPUT Z NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER The current Z tool nose coordinate is modified into the new coordinate value 9 Actual operation steps of setting workpiece coordinate system are as follows Install the trial cutting workpiece on the machine and select any one tool generally use the first tool in the machining 1 Setting X workpiece coordinate 1 Select the proper spindle speed and start the spindle 2 Traverse the tool to cut a
219. em Machine Lere ere renn n E AD 131 1 3 Program Relerence POINT sanan E NE E EAN EE 132 1 4 Machine 2nd 3rd Program Reference POINT iia ad 132 1 5 Workpiece Coordinate System PU ET T A T E E 132 1 6 Positioning and Interpolation PUNCO Ree rn er EA EEKE ES 132 1 7 Programming CODI LO er idad SAA AA AAA AA 133 1 7 1 Absolute Coordinate Values Tr it ee eee eee ee eee ete ee eee eee eee en 133 1 7 2 Relative Incremental Coordinate Values ere eee eee ee eee eee ee ee ee eee 133 1 7 3 Compound Coordinate Values ii i vin iii vin iii ri il ii ii a a 134 CHAPTER TWO PROGRAM STRUCTURE eeeeeeeccccccccccccccccccccccscccccccccccccccccscscccccccccccccccscscsccccsececs 135 21 CAPACI eins AA 135 LZ Flors dd n 135 23 see asst oe O AA 136 Pawan ee Cor er AO E 136 2 5 Block Skip Symbol and COMMENT irradian 137 26 Program SG e E ee AE AAA AA 137 CHAPTER THREE MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS 0 00oororocccncnccococococococococococococococosos 139 3 1 M Miscellaneous Function Command List A PP E O EN 139 3 1 1 MOO Pause erie rere re re CeCe Cree ire rr eerie rire eee cs 140 3 1 2 M02 p End of Program a a ae 141 3 1 3 M20 gt End of Program Cycle Machine IS 141 3 1 4 M30 End of Program Spindle OFF Cooling OFF o LE 141 3 1 5 M03 M04 M05 Spindle Control AA 141 3 1 6 M08 M09 2 Cooling control AS 142 3 1 7 M10 M11 M12 Clamping Releasing Workpiece Cancelling Chuck Output Signal A eee ee ee 142 3 1 8 M13 M14 Spindle Clamping Signal Outp
220. em FLASH 4 In saving programs the program capacity is big and saving the programs need long time and the operator needs to wait 4 3 4 8 No 253 Program Operation Because No 253 program is up to 4M its solidifying and read are special as follows 1 Only be saved to a fixed FLASH 27 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 Select No 253 program press hpland then 4 to save it to the FLASH in program edit window 3 Can use USB to complete the communication Note 1 Program No 253 cannot be saved automatically and should be complied and solidified after editing otherwise it cannot be saved However if the program No 253 is transmitted from USB successfully the system will automatically save this program 2 Program No 253 cannot be copied or renamed 3 Longer time may be needed when the saved program No 253 is large 4 3 4 9 No 254 Program Operation For No 254 program press hp1 in program edit window the system prompts the help message prompt box how to compile solidify and read No 254 as follows 1 Press 4 and read No 254 program Read No 254 program saved in FLASH area to the edit buffer zone and update it 2 Press 5_ to compile and solidify No 254 program Edit No 254 program The system alarms when the edit is wrong the system saves it to the FLASH area when it is compiled successfully 3 Press Key 6 to delete the custom command of No 254 program If there is a
221. em can be switched to the offset display window to modify the offset 4 5 7 2 Modifying Tool Compensation Validity in Program Running Note The modified offset data is valid when the system executes the tool change When the modified is the offset data corresponding to the current tool offset number the modified value is valid in the next tool change When the modified is the tool compensation value corresponding to the unexecuted tool offset number the modified value is value in this execution When the program has no the tool exchange command but the system has modified the offset value current tool offset number after the system executes M02 M30 M20 RESET and stops the modified offset is valid 75 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 5 8 Searching Run Message in AUTO Working Mode The function is valid in any states in AUTO and JOG working mode In automatically machining part programs the system pops up the window to search the macro variable I O variable and others in running process as follows Macro variable search all common variable used in the program and modify the common variable value I O variable search the interface variable value i e the system interface state Others search the executed block quantity the spindle wave range in the thread machining program nested call layers and program cycle in executing subprogram operation method as follows 1 In auto
222. en SINGLE CONTINOUS mode equals to key SINGLE press CYCLE START to resume Usually used for program description during monitoring If it is used in common program MOO command is advised 3 Stop after cycle movement stop after M20 press CYCLE START to resume 4 Cycle starts equals to key CYCLE START usually used for description of process monitoring 5 Set to SINGLE mode press CYCLE START to resume Set to CONTINUOUS mode Foot switch is allowed for chuck operation afterwards M10 M11 switching If spindle and chuck are interlocked it is valid only under M05 command Foot switch is allowed for chuck operation afterwards M10 M11 switching If spindle and chuck are interlocked it is valid only under MO5 command and the actual speed is 0 Foot switch is not allowed for chuck operation afterwards except for SINGLE PAUSE if the chuck operation is not finished yet the next program cannot be executed Foot switch is allowed for chuck operation afterwards M78 M79 switching If spindle and chuck are interlocked it is valid only under MO5 command Foot switch is allowed for chuck operation afterwards M78 M79 switching If spindle and chuck are interlocked it is valid only under MO5 command and the actual speed is 0 operation is not finished yet the next program cannot be executed Goes to next program if M10 is not finished does not take up time Instructions ESB EJ E Foot switch is not allowed for c
223. en out by the technician with the special tool 4 4 4 Cooling Control In JOG working mode directly operate the function on the panel or input M08 MO9 to control the cooling ON OFF Y Press Cue to switch cooling ON OFF the State icon on the screen and the LED indicator indicate its corresponding state Input M 8 ENTER coolant ON Input M 9 ENTER coolant OFF 1 In level control mode M8 M9 output time sequence It is used to others when M9 does not output Executing M08 Executing M09 2 In pulse control mode M8 M9 output time sequence Wherein t1 In pulse control mode M08 M09 output hold time is set by P326 Relative parameter P410_d7 P410_d7 1 the system pulse output controls the cooling P410_d7 0 the system level output controls the cooling The bit parameter shares with the spindle controlling output bit parameter 53 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 4 5 Manual Tool Change Control The system has up to 16 tool positions It selects the tool change control process by setting the tool post type parameter the system has no the integrated function of the electric tool post on the machine The tool post type parameter P318 is 0 8 and the machine is equipped with the line up tool post When the tool post parameter P318 is set to 0 the tool change operation is not performed when sets to 9 the system calls M60 command to execute the tool change Input form
224. ensed the assignment statement indicates the monitor object the if condition statement can make the judgment according to the information by monitor and decide to execute some branch block or not Description method of process monitor 1 Assignment description What is called assignment description is to designate the monitor object by a assignment statement all assignment statements which aim at monitor register r7000 r7009 are called monitor description statement For example r7000 r1001 or r1002 0 monitor r7000 object are interface input signal Ul01 UIO2 r7001 r4003 rotate speed 1 monitor r7001 comes from spindle real time speed 2 Condition description What is called condition description is to designate how to make judgment according to the monitored information The condition description statement and common conditional statement have the unanimous basic form and the program rule is basic same If relation expression then statement 1 else statement 2 Among them in the condition description statement the left of if related expression is monitor register name In the condition description statement the call can t be used in then else only assignment or transfer For example if r7000 1 then P1500 if the input signal can meet the requirement then turns p1500 If r7001 gt 6000 then r3 r3 1 meet the requirement r3 adds 1 Explanation 1 The system regulation all assignment statement of aiming a
225. entation signal is output with M87 command to realize single point or multi point orientation of DAPO3 series spindle servo drive Relative Parameters and Remark Miscellaneous parameters P342 M87 communication delay ms P342 is the delay from the communication completed to output YO2 control signal Miscellaneous parameters P343 M87 communication address decimal P343 is the system sends the orientation angle Q into the address of the spindle transducer during executing M87 For example the communication address of the transducer is H1201 hexadecimal and it is switched into the decimal 1x4096 2x256 0x16 1 4609 so P343 should be set as 4609 When P343 is 0 M87 M88 function is invalid M47 M48 function is valid the system allows to use M47 M48 command M87 M88 command can t be used When P343 is 99999 skip the step of communication during executing M87 refer to the M87 command executing process as below When P343 is not 0 and 99999 the range of P343 is O 99999 M87 M88 function is valid M47 M48 function is invalid the system allows to use M87 M88 command M47 M48 command can t be used Bit parameters The system communication baud rate is set by P414_d7 and P414_d6 9600 19200 38400 is optional Code Format and Remark for M87 M88 M87 Q_ The orientation is executed and the system detects whether the orientation is completed or not the next one can be executed if it is completed M87 Q_ H1 The orientation is e
226. er functions are the same in JOG working mode 1 Cooling ON OFF is valid in any states 2 When P400_d5 is set to 0 spindle CW stop key are valid invalid in run state 3 In initial state when the hydraulic chuck control function is valid the external button or foot switch controls the hydraulic chuck clamping releasing which interlocks with the spindle 4 In initial state when the hydraulic tailstock control function is valid the external button or foot switch controls the hydraulic tailstock forward backward which interlocks with the 70 Chapter Four System Operation spindle 4 5 5 Speed Override Tune in AUTO Working Mode 4 5 5 1 Speed Override Tune In AUTO working mode the feedrate override and rapid override keys in any state are valid In AUTO working mode the system can set the speed without changing the program and parameter Change the program running speed by changing the speed override e Feedrate override Speed word F setting value in tuning the program Actual feedrate speed Fx feedrate The feedrate override has 16 gears 0 150 increment of 10 all commands controlled by the feedrate is controlled by the feedrate override e Rapid override G00 rapid traverse command speed in tuning programs Z X or Y actual rapid traverse speed P100 P101 P102 xrapid override The rapid traverse override is divided into 25 50 75 100 All rapid traverse commands and the operations are controlled by the r
227. ered by some special function it has special name used for memory The system set the standard exclusive signal name for the used signal of all functions In the diagnosis display window the signals used by the special functions are expressed with the standard signal name it means the set function is valid in the parameter The initial parameter has used most miscellaneous functions so the displayed most pin signal number is the standard signal name the displayed unused signal are the general signal name Detailed explanation and connection method of general signal name and standard signal name are referred to CONNECTION 4 8 3 Input Interface Diagnosis Explanation In input interface diagnosis display when one external signal is valid the corresponding bit display is 0 when it is invalid the display is 1 The input interface signal diagnosis is executed circularly the system anytime displays the current signal state Input interface signal definition is defined by the parameter changing corresponding setting of the parameter can change the input interface signal definition 4 8 4 Output Interface Diagnosis Explanation Each bit display is O in the output interface diagnosis the corresponding bit output is valid When the display is 1 the corresponding bit output is invalid The output interface diagnosis display is the current each output big hold state When the signal is pulse the bit is still 1 although the output is valid Out
228. erence point return and the machine zero return are valid in X Y axis Note 1 When the motor rotates with high speed and the feed key is released the machine slider continuously moves and does not stop immediately because of the automatic acceleration deceleration The movement length is determined by the max motor speed the acceleration deceleration time and the feed override The longer the acceleration deceleration time and the higher the speed is the longer the distance between sliders are on the contrary the shorter the distance is 4 4 1 2 Step Movement o E Press STEP and the system is switched from JOG or MPG to STEP mode STEP TRAVERSE Press the coordinate axis move key and the machine slier moves the 34 Chapter Four System Operation preset step width The traverse speed is executed by the selected rapid or feedrate However the max speed of Z X Y is limited by P100 P101 P102 Press continuously the key the machine slider will continuously feed the step width till the key is released and the slider has moved the last step width The step width in the single step movement is displayed in the black background The step width of single step movement is 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 0 10 0 50 0 the system can gradually select them according to STEP REGULATION Note 1 In STEP mode press CYCLE PAUSE to stop slider moving When the key is pressed down the slider stops and the unfinished step will not be reser
229. erforms once means the M02 M20 and M30 command of the program end and then the machining counting adds 1 And therefore in this circle body add one M95 K 1 command before the program end in this case the workpiece number can be display correctly 3 1 13 M96 Cycle Execution Call Command format M96 Pxxrxx k Qrxx x L xxx xx call cycle execution Field P inlet block number for calling program The leading zero of the block can be omitted Q call last block number The leading zero can be omitted L call times Omit L or call it one time when L is 1 L value is 1 9999 times Explanation Program group called by M96 can contain M96 M98 M99 G22 G80 which can be embedded M96 M97 are embedded to avoid that the program returns to M96 to again run one time after M96 is executed Example Method 1 Method 2 N0010 GOO X100 Z100 N0010 GOO X100 Z100 N0020 M96 P70 Q80 L3 N0020 M96 P40 Q50 L3 N0030 G01 W 5 N0030 M97 P0060 N0040 U5 W 5 N0040 G00 U5 W 5 F300 N0050 W 5 N0050 G01 U5 W 5 NO060 M30 N0060 G01 W 5 N0070 G00 U5 W 5 F300 N0070 US W 5 N0080 G01 U5 W 5 N0080 W 5 N0090 M30 Method 1 After M96 specifies the call specified program three times the cursor returns to N0030 and continuously runs till the program ends Method 2 After M96 specifies the call specified program three times the cursor returns to N0030 and then the 145 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual sys
230. es the process monitor are allowed such as if r1 0 then r7010 1 3 It s allowed that one monitor opens another one but won t closed itself such as if r7001 0 then r7010 1 1 monitor when it meets the requirement opens 0 monitor at this time 1 is still open 4 In making program before open the monitor it must make the description to the monitor if it opens a monitor without task which don t have description the system will alarm prompting E400 process monitoring variable undescribed 5 If opened some monitor change its monitor description in the instance of don t meet requirement and don t stop monitor then the new monitor description will change the old description and the monitor will still on the opening state needn t restart But it s very dangerous in this state the monitor must be closed at first then change its monitor description then open it again 6 After meets the monitor requirement if the executed command in monitor condition is skip command Pxxxx close the monitor automatically when the executed command is assignment or calculate command don t close the monitor 7 Monitoring administration register can be regarded as condition judgment for example if r7010 gt 1 then r002 2 8 If the monitor is opened under the PAUSE Block stop Cycle stop state the monitor is still effective its assignment or operation command will be executed after meeting the requirement the skip command can be ex
231. escription When the system selects the pressure low alarm check function it displays the press check icon at right hand side in JOG Working mode and AUTO working mode the icon is green solid triangular A when the pressure is normal Once the system has checked that pressure low alarm signal PRES is valid the durable pressure low alarm time is not more than the half of the set time by P332 the icon is a yellow hollow triangular A when the pressure low durable time exceeds the half the icon is a red hollow triangular A and the system alarms Pressure low alarm at the moment the axis feed pauses the spindle stops rotating and the automatic cycle cannot start 4 4 10 Searching Run Message in JOG Working Mode The detailed is referred to OPERATION AUTO working mode 4 5 8 4 4 11 Appendix 4 4 11 1 MDI Input Controlling M Command Table MDI Executable M commands in JOG working mode sort Command Function Remark Spindle control M03 M04 MO5 CW CCW stop CoolingON M08 MO9 Cooling ON OFF Function interlock E E i M11 M12 ES releasing canceling eile Keeping chuck output signal Spindle M13 M14 Output Retraction spindle clamping signal Lubricating M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF a Chapter Four System Operation cancel tailstock output signal state keeping Operator output 1 M21 M22 Function interlock state keeping Operator output 2 M23 M24 Function interlock state keeping Spindle gear M41
232. esponding pin in Release the occupied input pin in port occupied function is occupied interface parameter or set other free input pin Para set conflict output The corresponding pin in inputting Release the occupied output pin in port occupied function is occupied interface parameter or set other free output pin Abnormal ESC Operate the USB device over again disordered Not support USB file Check or change USB device formula FAT32 file format USB memory is too big Change the USB device maximal 8G USB device USB fails to transmit Failure in USB data transmission Press system reset key and try again reset process or operate the USB device again 6 3 General Chart of Alarm in Edit Working Mode i e E100 E199 Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting Program which will delete The program list hasnt the wrong operation doesnt exist program to be deleted Block is too long in There are excessive long block Modify the program to be sent received program during sending the workpiece program it is more than 250 characters doesnt exist program to be sent catalogue program catalogue A ee Received program NO is The program number range Check the receiving program s wrong doesn t in 0 254 number A AAA device be identified by the system USB is removed The system is identifying the USB wrong operation forbidden these equipment the equipment is operation moved suddenly Not insert USB Stop openin
233. etails Note 1 Leading zero of M can be omitted Example MOO can be written to MO MO and MOO are valid 2 Bit parameter P403_d3 P403 d2 Set the output state of M function when the ESP alarm is enabled or during reset 3 M commands are not in the same block with other commands as follows MOO M02 M20 M30 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M21 M22 M23 M24 M91 M92 M93 M94 M13 M14 M47 M48 M86 M87 M88 M81 M82 M83 M50 M 74 It can be shared a same block with F S 3 1 1 MOO Pause Command format M00 program pause Explanation MOO pauses not to execute the program and the system prompts DWELL in flash and program continuously runs after CYCLE START is pressed Press ESC to exit from program running MOO functions are different from that of CYCLE PAUSE key MOO is used to pause before some block which is specified in advance and CYCLE PAUSE is used to pause at random 140 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions 3 1 2 M02 End of Program Command format M02 end of program Explanation M02 indicates that program ends and the system returns to the first block to wait 3 1 3 M20 End of Program Cycle Machine Command format M20 L return to the first block to execute the cycle machine L is the cycle machine times range 1 9999 Explanation L is the cycle machine times when L is equal to 3 the actual number of machined workpiece is 4 The system defaults the limitless
234. etection after opening the tool offset directory page the system can only send the tool offset files 2 Standard format of TXT parameter file in U disc Refer to the format of tool offset files which are output to the U disc by the system 4 7 3 2 Clearing Offset Values of Each Group in Offset Data The steps of clearing the offset values of each group are as follows 1 Select the Offset working mode 2 Move the highlighted cursor block to the Y offset value to be cleared move to X offset value if there is no Y axis or move to Z offset value if there is no X axis 3 Press DELETE key to clear the Z offset value X offset value or Y offset value of the tool offset number to be cleared 121 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 7 3 3 Clearing Offset Data P416_d5 0 the system permits to clear all offset value in OFFSET working mode and the operators first presses hp1 and then Z to clear all offset data 4 8 Diagnosis Working Mode In DIAGNOSIS working mode the system checks and displays the input output interface state spindle speed encoder lines in real time Press hp1 at the top right to learn about the diagnosis operation keys Main functions in DIAGNOSIS working mode include yx Auto diagnosis function yx display the external signal states of input output 1 O interface yx Diagnosis of spindle control function input output signal yx Diagnosis of tool post control fun
235. eturn Refer to G00 G50 P021 P026 P109 P110 P111 P406 and P407 G28 Machi t A Refer to GOO for others 27 3 program reference point return PO003 P008 Refer to GOO for others 650 Warkpieoe coordinate system seting POO0 POOT PO f G51 Workpiece coordinate system recovery ll 652 roy as coordinate ceasing PPa O E Sd A O o CA a Memorizing current coordinate point current coordinate point Memorizing current coordinate point Return to the coordinate point memorized by G66 Drilling G83 Peck drilling AAA G0681 Drilling in the GO6 mode Refer to G81 and G06 G0683 Peck drilling in the GO6 mode Refer to G83 and G06 Constant surface speed ON P410_d6 P304 P305 Ea Constant surface speed OFF ESA Feed per minute O O o aed Feed per revolution Skip function P532 refer to G01 for others o dl asp A l l 193 GGSK P 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 194 5 1 Chapter Five General Programming Rules and Examples CHAPTER FIVE GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES General Programming Rules The command compiling must meet the rules in one block which can be convenient to the system identifying them it is suggested that the command character should be in the fore and the data field should be in the later The system executes the Programming Rule Check and the program meeting the programming rules can be compiled alarm will occur when there is wrong 1 2 3 4
236. even Statement Programming common variable N0020 M98 L10 P1000 N0030 M98 L10 P2000 N0040 M02 N1000 r9000 r6004 In the first calling store the Z coordinate in this position to r1 N1010 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r2 N1020 r9000 r6005 In the first calling store the Z coordinate in this position to r2 N1030 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r3 N1040 G00 W 25 N1050 G00 U 15 N1060 M99 N2000 r9000 gt r9000 1 sIn the first calling the pointer 1 points to r20 N2010 r190 r9000 In the first calling take out the reciprocal second X coordinate from r20 and store it to r190 N2020 r9000 gt r9000 1 In the first calling the pointer 1 points to r19 N2030 r191 r9000 In the first calling take out the reciprocal second Z coordinate from r20 and store it to r191 N2040 G01 Xr190 F1000 E N2050 G01 Zr191 E N2060 M99 1 1 2 3 Interface Variable This variable is correspond to input and output pin specially is used to check and control the input output pin signal of the system The interface variable is divided into input interface variable and output interface variable Input interface variable Read The system has 32 input interface variable each variable is correspond to a input signal pin the variable number r1001 r1032 is correspond to the signal pin number UI01 UI32 in ranking Attention the variable number r1000 is the integer st
237. feed holdsignalMXZ2 Chuck clamp in posi tion check RM 10 Pressure low check PRES S KAN ES Y deceleration signal DecY l o l I O 24 ground 24VGND Tool post lock in position si gn al CTCP w oD i Es a X deceleration signal DecX ls DO e er External pause SP ED AS Z IX Y positive li mit LT A A Z deceleration signal DecZ External cycle start ST S ey OI Emergency stop ESP I O 24 ground 24VGND x k ms E co Spindle analog voltage SVC U d PU pd Spindle analog voltage ground AGND as Jz oO Encoder 5V ground SVGND S ad Drive unit 5V ground 5VGND Speed position state output check AP 1 Encoder 5V SE5V a CS Y drive unit5V P5V Y zero PCY 7 7 ZT Encoder C pulse PC Ps a Y negative direction Y D raam SRE 3 P Encoder C pulse PC ES Se Y positive direction Y D Unused a o foe Encoder B pulse PB E Y pulse YP Unused NS Encoder B pulse PB ay Y pulse YP Speed position switch control AP O dE o el Encoder A pulse PA z _ 24V ground 24VGND V Ma Renae a Encoder A pulse P A E Power supply 24V 24V SDO A ee 252 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection CHAPTER THREE CNC DEVICE CONNECTION 3 1 Front Cover Communication Interface The CNC system can exchange or transmit data with a U disc through USB interface Front USB interfac
238. fications mmrrrerrrereeeeeeecnnecan ren 276 3 6 4 Connection Layout of Converter Analog Voltage urrerreeseesrensennnnnnnnn nana means 277 3 6 5 Encoder Interface Method errerrennennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnanenenas 277 3 6 6 Encoder Interface Connection Layout s tsetsersersersrrersrrsrserersersresnnsnnennsnnnnnnnnennnnnnnenne eneee 277 3 6 7 Connection Between CNC System Y and AC Servo Drive Unit rerrrrrennnnnnanananaaa nas 278 3 6 8 Connection Between CNC System Y and DAPO3 Spindle Drive Unit seere 279 3 7 X5 MPG Interface ss RA AAA A AAA 280 3 7 1 Signal Definition A 280 3 7 2 Interface Circuit Principle AAA 280 3 7 3 Connection Layout AAA 280 CHAPTER FOUR USE AND MAINTENANCE e oooooooonccccoconccccnconococononococonnoccononacocononaccconanaccconanss 281 Az Environmental CONAIION sentra ASA 281 4 Earthing idioma 281 43 Power Supply Requirements a q O 281 AA GUA E AA 281 45 Reuse it Again io 281 APPENDIssainipn pia A aaa 283 Appendix 1 CNC system electrical component symbol explanations seesseeeesseseeseeeeeseceeeee 283 Appendix 2 CNC system tool post controller circuit method layout ooooocroosso 284 Appendix 3 Interface circuit method layout PA E T E rcrros 285 Appendix 4 External control connection layout RR E ET E E E E E E E T E 288 Appendix 5 CNC system appearance installation dimension sseeseeseeeeeseeeerseeeeeeeceeeeeceeecceeeee 289 XIX CGSR I HISZ
239. g position of the tool Using program reference point function before setting the point may cause unexpected accidents Warning sosen may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Special caution The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK It cant be applied to other purposes or else it may cause serious danger MI CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual ANNOUNCEMENT This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible However operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by one due to so many possibilities that may involve with so the contents not specially stated in this manual shall be regarded as unallowable WARNING Please read this manual and a manual from machine tool builder carefully before installation programming and operation and strictly observe the requirements Otherwise products and machine may be damaged workpiece be scrapped or the user be injured CAUTION Functions technical indexes such as precision and speed described in this user manual are only for this system Actual function configuration and technical performance of a machine tool with this CNC system are determined by machine tool builder s design so functions and technical indexes are subject to the user manual from machine tool builder Th
240. g ASCII value of this key symbol The r5001 acceptable key symbol and the input value corresponding table value Input value pe G eR E E ME symbol 7 1 2 5 Display Window Register r5002 Display window register r5002 the system forbids to use this variable in the process monitor description statement Through the operation to the display window register the system can construct a window in the display screen and used to prompt the program execution step alarm etc information Explanation 1 Set the size and color of the window before opening the display window otherwise it s the system windows default 2 When the window is opened when the window size etc parameter is reinstalled the window content will be cleared automatism the new setting is effective 3 The reference of grounding and font color refers to the attached table in this chapter the corresponding table of usually used color and command value 4 In the AUTO running single block mode when there is display character window currently the key ESC is pressed the window will be closed and the program will exit the running The different value is written in the register has different meanings the system executes the relative command according to the written value Please refer the following table The r5002 execution command table Command number meaning the user information only can be displayed in the display window 0 close the display window Open
241. g USB Manual operation press emergency or reset key USB device Fail to save program in The USB is failed in saving pan USB program Check the USB device A AN not enough rest room disc to release more room catalogue failure EA A AS NAAA Fail to set specified The program in specified Check the USB device or the content catalogue can t be opened program is destroyed and must to be created over again program Stop sending program Manual operation press emergency or reset key USB C001PRO specified catalogue CO01PRO send now error USB device again the Stop receiving files Manual operation press Manual operation exit emergency or reset key receiving GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Alarm No E134 E136 E137 E142 E143 E144 E145 E147 E160 E161 E162 E163 E164 E165 E166 E167 E168 E169 E170 E171 E172 E173 E174 E175 USB program this program capacity is too large the program destroyed this program O O delete extra part delete it Program error Current program is void The current program is empty and Edit the program first so can t rename can t change the name USB program to receive The USB receiving program does No this program in the USB doesnt exist not exist equipment create this program again Not support file system in The U disc isn t FAT16 or FAT32 Suggest using FAT32 file system USB use F
242. ge prompt of the parameter value 1 Open Open the range prompt of the parameter value d3_ Diagnosis interface prompt 0 Close Close the prompt information in the diagnosis mode 1 Open Open the prompt information in the diagnosis mode Function switch _ Bit parameter P416 Password level 3 RA A A A AA d7 memorize current password level 0 do not memorize do not memorize the password level the system displays 108 Chapter Four System Operation input user password when the system enters the parameter password input window 1 Memorize memorize the parameter password level enter the previous memorized parameter setting window d6__delete all program operation in EDIT working mode 0 Permit permit to delete all programs in EDIT working mode 1 Forbid forbid to delete all programs in EDIT working mode d5_ clear all offset operations in OFFSET working mode 0 Permit permit to delete all offset values in OFFSET working mode 1 Forbid forbid to delete all offset values in OFFSET working mode d4__close drive unit enabling in JOG working mode 0 Forbid press Delete in JOG working mode forbid closing the drive unit 1 Permit press Delete in JOG working mode permit closing the drive unit d1_ Parameter display selection 0 All are displayed Both the alterable and unalterable parameters are displayed according to the parameter password level 1 Alterable items are dis
243. gram number increment is defined by P333 content The system automatically creates block number for increment according to 1 4 integer of P333 content Note 1 When the system finds that current row has no line number it will automatically create N 1000 2 When the commands M98 M97 M91 M92 M93 M94 related to block number are executed there should be no repetitive block number otherwise the system will alarm A block number can be repetitive without executing the above commands 2 4 Block A block with line number is composed of block number and many words a block without line number has no block number One block can contain 255 characters at most including space between words It is necessary to have the block number generated automatically by the system and can be modified in EDIT working mode A block can have multiple or no words When a block has many words one or more blank space must be input between words A complete block is as follows N0120 G1 X130 W 40 F50 N0120 block number G1 ready function 136 Chapter Two Program Structure X130 W 40 motion data F50 motion speed end of block displayed in the screen But each program ends after pressing ENTER Notes 1 Each word of block is separated with a blank space generated automatically by the system but it is necessary to input the blank space manually by user when this system cannot distinguish words 2 A word can be placed on any position in a
244. h included are not installed on the corresponding coordinate axis P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 0 in executing G28 the system does not check the zero signal and deceleration signal and the axis moves the middle point and returns to its zero coordinate position 2 When the machine zero check devices are installed on the corresponding coordinate axis P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 1 in executing G28 the axis rapidly moves to the machine zero from the starting point and does not go through the middle point i e the above machine zero return is the same that of Jog working mode 3 The machine zero return in G28 is referred to PROGRAMMING 4 4 Machine Zero Return in JOG working mode 4 G28 is one short G command its execution is the same that of GOO other relative parameters are referred to GOO 5 After the corresponding axes execute the machine zero return there is blue icons gt prompts following machine coordinates 6 The command and other commands cannot in the same block 178 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions 7 Z X Y only executes the single axis machine zero return Line up tool G28 U0 X rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 WO Z rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move G28 VO Y rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes do not move 4 12 G30 The 2 the
245. h step width or MPG feed in STEP MPG Handwheel working mode hp function in other working modes 18 Handwheel MPG control selection and axis selection in JOG working mode hp function in other working modes o re AXIS e 1X Z Y and MPG axis selection in JOG working mode AN SEP STEP JOG mode Switch STEP JOG mode in JOG working mode 3 3 6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key The following press keys are used to control and complete all miscellaneous function of the machine and each key symbol definition is as follows CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 5 6 Spindle rotation CW Spindle rotates clockwise View from tailstock to chuck along the spindle HO sso Spindle stop Spindle stops Y coue Cooling control Switch cooling ON OFF 3 3 7 Edit Keys ENTER key Press it after the corresponding operation is performed INPUT key Input the required content Switch character insert alter state in EDIT working mode AER Special definition in other working modes Delete character letter block or whole program in EDIT DELETE key pesaba mode Special definition in other working modes ESCAPE Cancel the current input data or exit from the working state ke exit from the current operation or setting DRY RUN in AUTO working mode HOME key Cursor moving to the beginning of the current line in EDIT working mode STEP in JOG working mode STEP Cursor moving the end
246. he G38 mode lil The spindle speed is gradually raised after starting the spindle and the Z axis then moves to the object position iv The spindle speed will gradually descend after the Z axis reaches to the object position till it is absolute stopped v And then the Z axis is performed the tool retraction by the subsequent commands vi The spindle starts reversely after performing the subsequent command and the speed is gradually raised and the Z axis moves follow with the spindle reverse direction vii The spindle speed is gradually descended after the Z axis reaches to the objection position till it is absolutely stopped vill Repeated again and again till to the subsequent command ends and then retreat from the G38 mode Notice 1 The spindle will still hold a certain deceleration time after this command is closed the spindle in this case Z axis Y axis will still moves depending on the rotation of the spindle till the spindle absolutely stops And therefore a hole at the bottom of the screw thread should be deeper than the actual needed during actual machining and its length should be determined based upon the spindle high low speed and its speed variable during tapping 2 The coordinate position cannot absolutely confirm after the G38 and subsequent commands are performed 3 Only the separated Z W filed or S MOO command can be performed in the subsequent command of the G38 the next block of the subsequent command can
247. he command for the program with the line number block skip The following is the annotation 4 3 4 Part Program Content Input and Edit Each input part program consists of many blocks and each block is composed of block number command and data The program format must meet the general programming rules and there is no prompt in program compiling and the alarm prompts are referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Alarm Message The qualified parts can be machined only according to the technology requirements and orderly input correct program contents The edit mode of the system is full screen The program edit window is displayed as Fig 4 3 EDIT 001 RW8 Ln3 Lines 11 SIZE 1KB hp1 GO X100 Pop up window Current editing program is Middle compiled successfully Fig 4 3 program edit 23 CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Display content in window area Upper top program number program capacity program length and program line quantity of current program edit cursor line and row prompt symbol of current editable character position and the system function operation prompt key hp1 Middle program edit window Pop up window display operation prompt message Note 1 Press_hp1 the system prompts Program edit help message prompt introducing all help key explanation 2 When P416_d0 is set to 1 the system forbids pressing key to edit and modify programs an
248. he parameter defines the release to be the name I O name variable backward forward clamping releasing TL Tool post CW UO12 r2012 P318 0 line up tool output P318 9 M60 customizes the command to tool change Tool post CCW UO11 r2011 P318 0 line up tool output P318 9 M60 customizes the command to tool AA Cooling ON UO10 r2010 M9 Cooling OFF UOO9 r2009 P410 A u PAIO AT spe coria made control level mode brake signal SS rotation CW CCW Spindle stop UO05 r2005 P410_d7 0 spindle control level mode S04 M44 Spindle gear UOO4 r2004 P310 lt 4 release the signal cover 0 1 2 3 channel output S03 M43 Spindle gear UOO3 r2003 P310 lt 3 release the signal cover 0 1 2 channel output S02 M42 Spindle gear UOO2 r2002 P310 lt 2 release the signal cover 0 1 channel output S01 M41 Spindle gear UOO1 r2001 P310 0 release the signal cover O channel output 4 6 5 10 Parameter List Related to Input Interface Release The parameter setting can ensure the interfaces are not used for the standard signals at the moment the interface release can be used for the general input interface the interface parameters can be defined to the released input interface Parameters related to input interface release are as follows seein o Variable Note the parameter defines the release to be the g name variable name I O name Z XIY positive limit Ul32 r1032 P404_d6 1 shield hardware limit alarm Z XIY negative limit U
249. he process monitor rule description evaluate the monitor management register r7010 r7019 then can open or close the monitor There are following working modes for opening the monitor Process mode of matter Close the opened monitor let the inspector in the dormancy state keep its task can open again and go on the monitor Open the monitor in the monitor process make the judgment according to the matter s relation expression if the condition comes into existence the process mode is as following 1 If the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable it won t impact the execution of common program command go on the monitor 2 If the inspector wants to execute the special assignment then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the special assignment 3 If the inspector want to execute transfer then close the monitor stop the current motion command immediately wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command execute the transfer Open the monitor in the monitor process make the judgment according to the matter s relation expression if the condition comes into existence the process mode is as following 1 If the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable it won t impact the execution of common program command go on the monitor 2 If the inspector wants to execute
250. he spindle control P402_d4 0 the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is close P402_ d4 1 the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is open P409 d6 0 the hydraulic chuck is outer P409_d6 1 the hydraulic chuck is inner P409_d5 1 the hydraulic chuck needs the respond check it is green when the respond signal is normal otherwise it is yellow P409_d5 0 the hydraulic chuck does not need the respond check P409_d3 0 the hydraulic chuck control signal is controlled by the level P409_d3 1 the hydraulic chuck control signal is pulse control the pulse width is determined by the time of parameter P327 P409 _ d1 0 the hydraulic chuck foot switch input is valid P409_d1 1 the hydraulic chuck foot switch input is invalid Execution process of chuck command In outer chuck mode After M10 is executed the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from M10 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the chuck clamping operation ends without needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the chuck clamping in position after it has checked the chuck clamping in position signal interface pin RM10 is at low level and RM11 is at high level in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for chuck clamping respond check overtime After M11 is executed the system outputs the chuck releasing signal f
251. herwise the thread machining precision may be affected 4 In thread cutting the photoelectric coder with 1200 or 1024 lines are generally installed to rotate with the spindle synchronously The selected coder lines must be the same as those of the actually installed coder When the coder lines are 1200 P209 should be set to 1200 when the coder lines are 1024 P209 should be set to 1024 If P209 setting is wrong the pitch will be incorrect when the thread is machined 5 When the previous block and the current one are both the thread cutting command the system does not detect the thread head signal only one per revolution but directly starts movement This function can realize the continuous thread machining E g G33 W 20 P3 The system detects 1 turn signal in thread cutting G33 W 30 P2 The system does not detect 1 turn signal in thread cutting No empty line comment line or other blocks are allowed between the two blocks 6 The command must not be in the same block with other commands It should be an independent block Example Comprehensive example as Fig 4 4 Fig 4 4 thread cutting Example Thread lead 2 5mm cutting depth 2 5mmas Fig 4 4 NOOOO GOO X125 Z5 approach to workpiece N0010 G01 X11 5 F100 tool infeed 1 mm N0020 G33 2Z 50 P2 5 the 1 thread cutting N0030 GOO X13 N0040 Z5 return to the starting point N0050 G01 X10 the 2 tool infeeding 1 5 mm NO060 G33 Z 50 P2 5 the 2 thread cutting
252. huck operation afterwards except for SINGLE PAUSE if the chuck 18 19 20 2 22 23 eee 25 40 1 During program execution the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by foot switch equals to inserting a work during the machining process It does not take up time If command in the same group is executed it is invalid the operation can be done only after the execution 2 In statement or all monitoring state the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by r5008 does not take up time 3 Sometimes the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by r5008 will be invalid for instance when M11 is being executed the operation is invalid 4 If spindle and chuck or tailstock is not interlock the operation of chuck and tailstock controlled by r5008 is valid regardless the spindle state and spindle speed 5 In program end reset emergency stop state the current command is cancelled automatically Usage 223 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Assignment to r5008 means to choose program pause and start mode usually it is used together with monitoring description see the example Example ro008 1 Program pauses immediately press CYCLE START to resume ro008 3 Pause after cycle ends press CYCLE START to resume 7 1 2 9 System Special Variable Set 1 System special variable set 1 read write in the process monitor description statement read only write
253. iciency setting 2 _ Bit parameter P420 Password level 3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved d3 Reserved KM Reserved d3_Program nesting built in cycle 0 View Window appears by Upward direction key during the Auto machining components 100 Chapter Four System Operation and the program nesting and cycle can be viewed 1 Do not view d1_ Perform the variable calculation 0 Normal Constant 1 Acceleration The system will compiled to the notes page by the performed statement command from compile when the parameter setting is regarded as the variable calculation acceleration In this case the operation time can be increased and the working efficiency can be enhanced 4 6 4 9 Relationship Between Path and Run Efficiency Parameter 1 P401_ d4 0 the cutting command executes the continuous and smooth transition and the post acceleration deceleration function is valid G01 processing P401_ d5 0 G01 has the front acceleration deceleration function G01 and G01 perform the connection transition with the best speed and the system executes the post acceleration deceleration processing when the cutting speed is high the linearity path is precise and the transition point is smooth At the moment the post acceleration deceleration function does not greatly influence the path precision P401_ d5 1 G01 does not use the high speed connection and execute the front acceleration deceleration processing and directly executes
254. id speed the actual speed displayed by the system is the resultant rapid traverse speed when two axes or more move simultaneously the actual rapid traverse speed displayed will be greater than the values set in P100 P101and P102 P400_d3 1 interpolation movement mode is executed as follows 1 Raising speed stage Raising the speed at the initial speed of P112 2 The acceleration time in the speed raising phase is P114 It means the time the initial speed P112 takes to rise to 10000 000mm min 8 The resultant speed of the rapid interpolation is 10000 000mm min The movement axes rapidly perform positioning according to the proportion and their actual speeds are limited by P100 P101 and P102 Note Ensure the tool is placed at a safe position to prevent the tools collision when GOO is executed Example Fig 4 1 G00 rapidly positioning As Fig 4 1 the tool traverses from A to B Absolute programming N0010 G00 X9 ZO Relative programming NO100 G00 U 26 W 30 4 2 G01 Linear Interpolation Command format G01 Z W _ X CU Y V _ F_ Z X Y 3 axis feed simultaneously G01 Z W X U _ F_ Z X two axes feed simultaneously The two axes can be Z X ZIY X Y do G01 Z W _ F_ Zsingle axis feed The single axis can be Z or X or Y G01 command causes the tool to move along the line from current point to X U Z W or Y V specified point at the set speed and to reach the specified end point simultaneously
255. iginal point and position to this point N0010 T11 N0100 G00 Z102 X120 l N0200 G66 Z102 X120 Store the current coordinates N0200 T22 The tool nose coordinate is uncertain after tool changing NO300 G67 X120 W10 X axis moves to 120 and Z axis move to 102 10 N0200 M02 4 21 G81 Drilling G83 Peck Drilling Common format G81 Z W R D F L Drilling can be Z X or Y G83 Z W R Q D F L Peck drilling can be Z X or Y Field and range Z W X U Y CV hole bottom position range 9999 999 9999 999 mm R Distance from initial point to R point R lt current coordinate hole bottom coordinate range 0 999 999 mm D The delay time the tool stays at the hole bottom range 0 99 999 s F feedrate range 0 001 15000 mm min L Number of repeated range 1 9999 Q each feed depth range 0 001 999 999 mm Explanation Z XIY can select any single axis Each tool retracting point in G81 G83 canned cycle is the initial point G81 and G83 are non modal commands Q in G83 indicates each cutting amount Before the second cutting the rapid feed turns to cutting feed in front of d distance broken line arrow in the figure The value of d is set by P335 The execution process of G81 and G83 commands is as follows 190 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions G8 1 drilling G83 peck drilling Initial point Initial point R point Depth of last feed D 4 22 G0681 G0683 The Drilling Cycle in
256. ined by No P326 parameter in the pulse control method t2 The spindle stopping brake delay time is specified by No P315 parameter t3 The consecutive time output from the spindle brake signal MSP is set by No P316 parameter 45 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 In pulse control mode M3 M4 M5 MSP output time sequence Executing M03 Executing M04 Executing MOS fo Lt MO3 pin tl Td M04 pin tl MOS pin MSP brake pi 2 In level control mode M3 M4 M5 MSP output time sequence it is used to other when M5 pin does not output execanng M03 executing M04 exer uung M05 M03 pin M04 pin MSP brake pi 4 4 3 2 Spindle S Command _Gear Shifting Control Prompt it is not necessary to read the chapter for the operator using the frequency spindle When the spindle does not use the frequency spindle P410_d6 is set to O and S function executes the spindle gear shifting S standard format consists of S 2 digit number 2 digit number means the spindle gear number S format Sx Sxx i Operation example Select No 2 gear spindle speed Input S O 2 ENTER the system outputs S02 and the system displays the gear state S02 Explanation 1 Lines controlled by the Actual output of spindle gear is specified by P310 P310 4 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 S03 S04 P310 3 actual output controlling points are S01 S02 S03
257. ing outer chuck clamping inner chuck in position detection Note the hydraulic chuck and tailstock controls are referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode T1 T8 Tool post position signal connecting with the tool post selecting 4 16 tool selection tool post when the tool selection is more than 8 necessarily input data in code mode into the CNC system TCP Tool post lock in position signal connects with tool post 258 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 2 3 Connection Method of Output Signal The output signal U0O1 U0O18 is used to control the relative operations of the machine the signal direction CNC to machine The signal can drive the relay and the indicator at the machine side When the output signal is connected with OV the output function is valid when it is not connected with OV the output function is invalid X1 X2 interfaces have 18 channel output interface and the output signal connection method is as the following figure 1 output signal connection e Drive sensitive load Use ULN 2803 output to drive the sensitive load at the moment connect with fly wheel diode near to the coil to protect the output circuit and reduce the interference Machine side e Drive LED Use LUN2803 output to drive LED with a serial resistor to limit the current about 10Ma through LED Machine side CNC side 424V KE e Drive filament indicator Use ULN2803 output to drive the filament indicator connect externall
258. ing G52 the system defaults to be G52 Y360 000 Relative parameter Parameter related to G52 PO27 P029 P405_d1 P405_d0 Example GOO Y20 G01 Y136 6 G52 Y100 rotary axis coordinate clearing the integer 100 Y coordinate value is 36 6 4 20 G66 Store the Current Coordinates G67 Return to the Stored Coordinates Command format G66 gt To store the current coordinate of tool nose on Z X Y axes G67 WO U0 VO Return to the G66 position That the axis does not specify in G67 is not moved Instructions X Z Y If they are specified in absolute coordinates it means the axes should rapidly traverse to those points U W V If the relative coordinates is not 0 it means the axes rapidly traverse to the relative new coordinates ZIX Y can perform rapid traverse single axis two axis or three axis movement Absolute coordinates and relative coordinates cannot be used at the same time The axis that does not move can be omitted but G67 cannot be specified alone G66 is to store the current tool nose coordinates G67 is to command the axis to move to the coordinates 189 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual G67 should be used only when G66 has been used once When G66 is used several times the latest coordinate is stored G66 G67 can only be specified without other commands The movement path of G67 is the same as GOO Example N0010 G00 Z350 X280 Y600 Define the machining or
259. ing feedrate when there is the swing in the spindle speed To gain the high machining quality it is recommended that the selected spindle speed should be not lower than min speed of the spindle servo or the converter 159 GGSK P 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 160 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions CHAPTER FOURG COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS Here describes the functions and the explanations of all G commands of the system 4 1 G00 Rapid Positioning The tool rapidly traverses to the specified position in GOO Command format GOO Z W X CU Y CV 3 axis rapid traverse GOO Z W _ X U 2 axis rapid traverse Z X ZIY X Y GOO Z W _ Z axis rapid traverse the single axis may Z X Y Field and range X Z Y absolute coordinates of end point range 9999 999 9999 999 mm U W V relative movement from starting point to end point range 9999 999 9999 999 mm Use relative or absolute coordinates the coordinates not to be moved can be omitted G00 without coordinate fields cannot be specified Explanation ZIXIY can select any single axis two axis or three axis for the simultaneous movement If the tool change command and tool offset command are in the same block with GOO the tool offset value is added to G00 movement value in order to improve the work efficiency In general the tool change and tool offset commands should be specified in the same block with GOO GOO actu
260. ing process When the specified F speed is larger than the setting value of P113 there is no speed rising and reducing process When thread cutting speed is more than P113 the system will alarm and stop thread cutting Unit mm min Linear acceleration deceleration time of cutting feed ms __ Motion parameter P114 P114 feed linear acceleration deceleration time P114defines the time spent from 0 speed to 15m min of commands such as G01 in automatic machining Unit ms Acceleration deceleration time of thread cutting ms __ Motion parameter P116 P116 defines the time spent from 0 speed to 15m min of thread cutting axis The smaller P116 value is the shorter the inconstant is When P116 is too small the stepper motor may cause the step out Unit ms G99 initial lines __ motion parameterP118 When the parameter is not O and the system executes G99 every time it checks the spindle encode lines till the lines reaches the value set by P118 i e the spindle rotates some angle to execute the other commands following G99 When the parameter setting value is 0 the system does not check the encoder lines till it executes other commands following G99 The line that the system detects is four times that of the spindle encoder E g If the lines of the encoder installed is 1200 the lines that the system detects changes between 0 4800 recurrently This parameter should be set between 0 4800 as well or the system keeps waiting because G99 com
261. input again the correct data 4 Press ENTER to confirm the operation Note 1 When the input data exceeds the parameter limit range the input data is invalid and the parameter content does not change 2 After the data is input ESC is pressed and the input data is invalid 3 Bit parameter input is as follows 1 After the required parameter which needs to be modified is selected the operator can modify the parameter bit by the left right direction key prompt the current bit explanation at the bottom screen 2 Single bit modification directly input the data which needs to modify O or 1 pressing other keys to input are invalid 8 Modifying all bit it is the same that of general parameter manual setting from left to right to input For example input 11 the parameter after the operator presses ENTER is modified into 00000011 input 11000000 the parameter after the operator presses ENTER Is modified into 11000000 4 6 3 Parameter Function Key Prompt hp1 Press hp1 in parameter window to display the direction of parameter function key prompts and then perform operation by pressing keys according to the prompts The operator can perform the communication extraction solidifying and upgrade the system software and update the whole memory according to the password level select 1 for stepper parameter initialization select 2 for servo parameter initialization select 3 for machine tool builder
262. ion At the same time the operator can press the prompt key hp1 at the right top and the detailed offset operation key The relative settings operation input formats and example descriptions are as follows all required function keys are expressed with icons all input letter keys or digit keys are expressed with underline the system prompting message is expressed with frame Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letters or digits are wrong Press to exit the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or some operation or man machine dialog The system sets 64 groups of tool offset value T01 164 each tool offset number corresponds to one group Each group separately records Z offset value X offset value Y offset value The operator can make the number of tool offset groups and the total number of used tools the same through manual tool setting The other tool offset data can only be input from the keyboard Whether the Y or X offset input is valid is set by bit parameter P405_d1 and P405 dO separately when P405_d1 0 and P405_d0 0 X and Y offset values cannot be operated which is displayed in grey on the screen Main functions in OFFSET working mode include yx Select modify clear tool offset data yw Transmit tool offset data between U disc and CNC system by USB interface yee Press OFFSET to enter OFFSET working mode as Fig 4 7 119 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi functi
263. ion Y selection X selection Z P525 E iii External MPG override MA JE 18 P526 O is xternal MPG override A PA P531 531c Lubrication inspection O A alarm P532 1 G31 G31 input check Define G31 input interface G31 function is valid P533 1 M611 M61 M62 execution i QUO JU P534 M63I M63 M64 execution ean AU P535 M65 M65 M66 execution AAA IR and 99 P536 1 M671 M67 M68 execution Se CN AS P538 1 fo 032 116 0 32 P512 lt O P513 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P514 aa gt N i Chapter Four System Operation P541 P556 P557 P558 P559 P560 P565 1 P566 1 External feedrate P X axis movement limit Y axis movement limit o 1 16 tool Used for selection check signal selection signal encode switch switch switch M57 M58execution It is used for fk4 debugging of the cutting feedrate 1 1 1 1 Is s External feedrate INH j gt Note 1 Bit parameter P409_d4 1 when the tailstock control function is invalid the tailstock forward in position check RM78 RM79 interface are invalid 2 Bit parameter P410_d6 0 when spindle S gear shifting controls gear shifting in position signal M411 M42I M431 M44l interfaces are invalid 4 6 5 8 Parameter List Related to Command Forbidden Some command names related to some parameter setting are forbidden once the parameter setting makes the command name forbidden condit
264. ion based upon their requirements When the parameter transmission is executed by U disc the U disc root catalog needs to create one file COO1PAR the parameter sending and receiving are executed in the file The file name format PAR file number 3 bit TXT 2 Standard format of TXT parameter file in U disc Refer to the format of the parameter file that the system outputs to U disc In the U disc the operator can use TXT LST text to edit the parameter file but the file name and file content must be compiled according to the required standard format to correctly send to the system Refer to the parameter file format of the system outputting as follows 1 In PC the operator should rename the parameter file name to TXT or LST suffix such as PARO99 TXT it is suggested the operator should use the TXT suffix to conveniently operate the parameter file on PC 2 The home of TXT file content must be the parameter mark CNC_GSKC001 the item must exist 3 The second line is the annotation the front must have the item must exist 4 The third line is the parameter content The parameter content must meet its standard format requirement Example P000 00000 000 Z program reference point POOO it is the parameter number its format is P number which is the parameter number The three parts are indivisible to consist of the parameter the parameter number is not correct when it lacks one
265. ion operations forbids the spindle start stop M03 MO04 05 is invalid and the system prompts the alarm message When the system executes M47H1 it outputs APO level signal 0 not detect API signal and displays the red icon CO the system can executed the other commands except for Y movement command and then executes M47 and checks When the system executes M48 it outputs APO signal 1 and checks API signal when API level is 1 the system set spindle working mode disappears in the state the system forbids Y motion operations permits the spindle start stop Y motion in AUTO working mode causes the alarm The concrete connections of APO and API signals are referred to CONNECTION Explanations for M47 1 After the system executes M47 press STOP EMERGENCE the system will exist M47 status and it is no use to press RESET 2 When the system is executing M47 press RESET or STOP EMERGENCE The system will exist M47 status 4 4 3 5 Spindle Orientation Control M87 M88 is used to control the spindle orientation The main function of M87 M88 command is 1 If the spindle transducer is with the function of the spindle orientation in any angle and the 50 Chapter Four System Operation orientation command is sent into the transducer and then the orientation signal is output with M87 command through RS232 interface based on Modbus communication treaty so the spindle orientation in any angle can be realized 2 The ori
266. ions Initial mode and modal of the system System state Initial mode Modal of the system of the system Keep til being changed Frequency conversion spindle S200 Keep till being changed speed S Spindle gear Shifting gear spindle gear SO Keep till being changed M79 tailstock run out state Set spindle speed position mode 4 1 3 2 Initial Mode and Modal of Program The initial mode is the automatic initialization setting state before the system executes the machining program i e the initial default state of the default programming word and speed word Program initialization state of the system 10 Chapter Four System Operation G command G00 G97 G98 Cutting speed 30mm min Miscellaneous function current state System coordinates current coordinates are those of the last automatic executing program or manual operation G modal is always valid till it is changed by other modal commands in the same group after the word is set After the modal meaning is set the G command may not be input again when the same function is used in the later block There are three groups of G command with modal characteristics and there is only one command of each group in the initial state Group 1 G00 G01 initial mode GOO Group 2 G96 G97 initial mode G97 Group 3 G98 G99 initial mode G98 F30 The command without modal characteristics has effect in the block and must be defined to use every time Note I
267. ions are created the system forbids all corresponding commands and functions Parameters which are related to the command forbidden are as follows Note commands are forbidden when the Command name Command function E i following are valid M41 M44 Automatic spindle gear P410 d6 0 spindle S control gear shifting shifting control S05 S16 Spindle S control P410 d6 0 and P410_d5 0 Only input SO0 S04 in spindle gear shifting output M47 M48 LG P410 d4 0 do not switch the spindle and Y M32 M33 Lubricating function Interface P506 0 Spindle rotation CCW P410 d2 1 do not use the spindle CCW signal output M10 M 11 Workpiece clamped P409_d7 1 chuck control function is invalid released M78 M79 Tailstock forward P409 d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid backward Commands related to Y PO P405 d1 0 without Y Commands related to X MO P405_d0 0 without X Pin programming command r2001 r2032 P412 d1 0 forbid the pin programming in miscellaneous function input 117 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 6 5 9 Parameter List Related to Output Interface Release The parameter setting can ensure the interfaces are not used for the standard signals at the moment the interface release can be used for the general output interface the interface parameters can be defined to the released output interface Parameters related to output interface release are as follows ee a Note t
268. is connected with the alarm output signal of a drive unit and appears Drive unit alarms the system automatically closes all feed and prompts Z X Y drive unit alarms All axes immediately stop motion and the program stops running At the moment check the drive unit and relative device to troubleshooting and the system is turned on again When there is the alarm in the course of motion there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed the system and the actual position and the operator must correct the machine coordinates In JOG working mode the system prohibits all axes moving when there is the alarm In AUTO working mode the system prohibits the program starting run when there is the alarm Relative parameters The drive unit alarm checks when P404_d5 is set to 0 P405_d4 P405_d3 P405_d2 separately sets alarm level of Z X Y drive unit 4 1 4 5 Other Alarms When the system appears other alarms Chinese characters prompts at the moment the operator can perform the troubleshooting based on PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Alarm Message 4 1 4 6 Switching off Power Supply The machine power supply is switched off immediately to avoid the accidence in the danger or other emergency cases when the machine is running Note When the coordinate axis is moving and the power supply is switched off after the machine is switched on again there may be great deviation between the displayed coordinates and the 15 CGGSRK I HIS GSK96 M
269. is not correction the operator should press ESC to exit the machining program d0__ wait for stable speed before machining the thread 0 do not wait whether the system checks the spindle speed is stable before machining thread 1 wait the system automatically checks whether the spindle speed is stable before 103 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual machining thread and waits the stable speed to machine thread The parameter is valid to G33 G32 G34 The system checks the spindle speed instantaneously when the spindle raises speed or reduces speed the system waits for the process to end and then machines the thread When the system executes immediately the thread command after changing the speed maybe the checking spindle speed function is invalid Example in S1000 stable state the system executes S200 and immediately executes G33 the system immediately executes the program for check speed being stable at the moment the system judges by mistake in S1000 stable state it is having been stability because there is the time difference between the system command and the spindle speed It should suggest that the operator should delay 0 3s between S200 and G33 When the spindle with the low speed below 10r min executes the thread cutting the system cannot have checked the spindle speed stability for a long time at the moment the parameter should be set to 0 to cancel the fu
270. itch TS Press Y and the system switches dry run automatic machining run mode In DRY working mode whether M S T is valid is set by the parameter coordinates of each axis automatically recover the previous before the Dry working mode Relative parameters in DRY Run working mode P401_d7 0 When the system executes the miscellaneous command it must output the signal check the signal which is the same that of the normal machining 1 The system does not output the signal or check the signal when the system executes the miscellaneous command P401 d 0 The execution speed of feed command is set by the program which is the same that of the normal machining 1 The execution speed of feed command is not set by the program max speed P113 of cutting feed displays the program path Note 1 The dry run key is valid when the program is executed in the initial state In the course of program execution the key is invalid and cannot be switched when the program does not end and the system has not exited the execution state 2 P401_d7 0 in DRY RUN working mode all miscellaneous command M S T are executed w the system recovers to the previous state when it exits from the dry run state 3 P401_d7 1 in DRY RUN working mode the system does not output and check the signal when it executes the miscellaneous function when the system executes T function the tool offset number is executed when the previous is T11 it become
271. ited according to the requirement of machine moving is named as program According to the sequence of command the tool traverses along the straight line and the circular arc or the spindle starts stops cooling is ON OFF The sequence of command is edited according to the technology requirement of workpiece 2 1 Character Character is the basic unit to compose the program The character includes English letters digits and other symbols English letters are address character of each command or data D E F G H I J K L MNPQRS T U VW X Y Ze Digit is the specific data of each address character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Macro If then else and or lt gt If then else select statement example If x gt y then z 0 else z 1 and Logic and or Logic or gt More than lt Less than Equal to Sign OOF a HO Start sign of program name Negative data or reduction Addition Multiplication or modification Decimal point I Division in assignment statement block skip sign in others H blank space Comment 2 2 Field A field consists of an address character and the following numerical command For example NOOO X12 8 W 23 45 Rules as follows Each field must have an address character English letter and the following number character string The invalid O of digital character string can be omitted The leading zero of command can be omitted For example G00 can be written to GO
272. itive feed The axis keeps moving until it reaches the soft hard limit If the low level of the input pin of UIO8 is detected the axis stops automatically G06 Z 181 F_ If there is a negative sign without figure behind Z it means Z negative feed The axis keeps moving until it reaches the soft hard limit If the low level of the input pin of UIO8 is detected the axis stops automatically G06 Z F If there is neither a sign nor a figure behind Z it means Z speed is changed to the set value this format only refreshes the speed instead of moving the axis G06 Z W _18 0 F_H_D_ The number followed with Z W means single feed it will be automatically stopped after executing it will automatically stopped if the inspection of the No UI08 input pin is LOW Explanations range 0 32 I can be defaulted Input the O followed decimal point with means LOW It may omit when it is set to O the system is set to 0 by default 1 means High Level F range 0 001 30000 mm min F can be omitted D_ This program can be completed after delaying at the same time the delay should be carried out Unit S H _ It should be returned after performing where it returns is determined by H the H range 00000000 11111111 The system default value is 00000000 when it is omitted H_d0 1 Return to this command start d0 priority 164 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions H_d1 1 Return the G66 memory position If H_ d1 1 the G66
273. ively each operation At the same time the operator can press hp1 at the top right to learn the parameter operation key catalog The relative settings operation input formats and example descriptions are as follows all required function keys are expressed with icons all input letter keys or digit keys are expressed with underline the system prompting message is expressed with frame Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letter or digit is wrong Press to exit the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or some operation or man machine dialog Note before the operator modifies the parameter all parameter setting values in the system must be saved save them to personal PC Once the parameter is changed by mistake or the system the system can recover by the saved data The system classifies the parameters reference point coordinate parameter motion parameter transmission parameter miscellaneous function parameter interface parameter variable initial value parameter and pitch parameter i Press FAVEIER to enter PARAMETER working mode The system pops up the window to require inputting the password the operator inputs the password or directly presses ENTER to enter the parameter window 19 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual M Datum Co Poo Z reference point 303 698 P001 X reference point 203 698 Z Driven para P002 Y
274. k zero d4__ Z deceleration signal level d3__Xdeceleration signal level d2__Y deceleration signal level 0 LOW The system decelerates to stop after it has checked the deceleration signal to be LOW in the coordinate axis zero return 1 HIGH The system decelerates to stop after it has checked the deceleration signal to be HIGH in the coordinate axis zero return d1__after the machine zero return is executed whether the machine coordinates are modified 0 Modifying machine coordinates generally it is set to 0 the system modifies the machine coordinates after it executes the zero return 1 Not modifying machine coordinates in debugging zero return function it is set to 1 to learn the zero return precision 4 6 4 3 Traverse Speed Acceleration Time Parameter P100 P108 P112 P119 Regulating P100 P116 to make the system meet the motor with the different type and the machine with the different load to improve the machining efficiency Example regulate the parameter value to the low to avoid the step out when the system uses the stepper motor properly increase the parameter value when the system uses the servo motor The detailed is referred to OPERATION 4 6 5 2 Appendix the difference between the stepper initial value and servo initial value in the motion parameter list Rapid traverse speed limit of Z X Y __ motion parameter P100 P101 P102 P100 P101 P102 confirm the rapid traverse speed of Z X Y in manual rapid and
275. l ll Notes 1 Check before acceptance LN caution e The damaged or defect product must not be used 2 Delivery and storage otic eMoistureproof measures are needed while the system is delivered and stored Never climb the packing box stand on it or place heavy items on it Do not put over five packing boxes in piles Take particular care of the front panel and the display of the system 3 Installation LN caution eProtect the system from sunlight and raindrops The shell of the system is not waterproof A Notice ePrevent dust corrosive air liquid conductors and inflammable substances from entering the system eKeep the system away from inflammable and explosive substances Avoid places where there is powerful electromagnetic interference elnstall the system firmly without vibration 4 Wiring LN Warnine eOnly qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection The connecting wires cannot be damaged Do not press or open the cover of the system with power on LN cation e The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must accord with the user manual eWet hands are dangerous to grasp the plug or the switch LN otic e The connection must be proper and firm e The system must be earthed VI Preface 5 Debugging LN coto eMake sure that the parameters of the system is correct before the system runs eNo parameter is beyond the setting limit in the manual 6 Operation
276. l System User Manual Example G30 P2 Z150 X100 return to 2 program reference point through the middle point Z150 X100 G30 P3 Z150 X100 return to 3 program reference point through the middle point Z150 X100 G30 P3 WO Z rapidly returns to 3 program reference point directly 4 13 G04 Timer Delay Command format G04 D Timer delay Field and range D Delay time unit s G04 defines the time interval between two blocks D 0 9999 999 s Explanation 1 G04 cannot be in the same block with other command except for S F command 2 The execution of the dwell time will not be affected by CYCLE START key when G04 is being performed Example Example G04 D2 5 dwell 2 5s 4 14 G96 Constant Surface Speed Control G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel Command format G96 S constant surface speed control G97 S cancel constant surface speed control Field and range S specifies the constant surface speed in G96 unit m min S specifies to cancel the constant surface speed in G97 unit r min S 0 9999 r min 0 9999 m min 0 4 multi gear spindle Explanation G96 G97 are the modal word in the same group but one of them is valid G97 is the initial word and the system defaults G97 is valid when the system is switched on When the machine tool is turning it the workpiece rotates based on the axes of spindle as the center line the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around
277. l level level Parameter sent by USB All All System software update and memory whole update A in the above table means the option uses the privilege The blank means the option has no use privilege 4 6 4 Parameter Explanation The parameters are described according to the functions and uses and their detailed definitions are the followings 4 6 4 1 Reference Point Software Limit Bit Parameter P000 P020 The reference point parameters include all important coordinate positions of machine Z X Y and the each axis motion is based on these positions Z X Y program reference point _ reference coordinate parameter P000 P001 P002 This parameter is used to set the position of program reference point In AUTO MANUAL mode the machine returns to this position after program reference point return The program reference point can be modified by inputting command in MANUAL mode or executing G50 command in AUTO mode The coordinate value of program reference point is the coordinates of the machine is not influenced by the tool offset value 2 3 program reference point of Z X Y _ reference coordinate parameter P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 The 2nd and 3rd program reference point is similar to program reference point In AUTO mode after a specified axis performs G30 it returns to 2nd or 3rd program reference point commanded by G30 For details please see to 4 10 G30 2nd 3rd Program Reference Point Return in PRO
278. l number M98 P500 Call M64 change the T44 tool number M30 Program end M61 Start to call M61 start to change tool 111 Target tool number if r1001 0 then P190 else P80 Judge the current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Changing tool time is set to be 30 seconds if r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P120 Judge the tool changing time is too long or not if r1001 0 then P130 else P110 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms if r4011 lt 2 then P140 else P134 Delay 50ms Close the tool post CW rotation r2011 0 The tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time if r4011 lt 5 then P170 else P160 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time if r4010 lt 5 then P180 else P1 74 if r1001 0 then P190 else P700 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed Judge the in position signal M99 Tool change end M62 Start to call M62 start the tool change T22 Target tool number NO220 NO230 NO240 NO250 NO260 NO270 NO280 N0282 N0284 N0290 NO300 N0310 N0320 N0322 N0324 N0330 N0340 N0350 NO360 N0370 N0380 N0390 N0400 N0410 N0420 N0430 N0432 N0434 N0440 N0450 N0460 N0470 N0472 N0474 N0480 N0490 Chapter Eight Cu
279. l to decelerate to stop moving Step 2 the coordinate axis reversely moves at the set zero return speed till the system has checked the starting point of deceleration signal to decelerate and to stop moving Step 3 when the set zero offset is not zero the system continuously moves one zero offset value Step 4 the coordinate axis continuously moves at the set zero return speed and starts checking the zero signal till the system has checked the zero signal to decelerate to stop moving Step 5 the above operations have completed the zero return motion and check processes at last the system automatically modifies the current machine coordinate into the 40 Chapter Four System Operation Zero coordinate set by the parameter Zero return mode 2 when there is the only deceleration signal without the zero signal the system executes the zero return mode 2 Because there is no zero signal the system reduces the above the Step 3 and Step 4 compared to the zero return mode 1 the system only executes the above Step 1 Step 2 and Step 5 to complete the zero return process which zero return precision is worse than the zero return mode 1 Zero return mode 3 when there is the zero signal without the deceleration signal the system execute the zero return mode 3 Because there is no deceleration signal the system reduces the above the Step 1 Step 2 and Step 3 compared to the zero return mode 1 the system only executes the above Step 4 a
280. l3 r1031 P404_d6 1 shield hardware limit alarm Y axis deceleration oa r1030 P405_d1 0 without Y P406_d5 0 without Y machine deceleration switch basal Licance axis deceleration signal hall r1029 P4035_d0 0 without X P406_d6 0 without X machine deceleration switch U16 MXZ2 External spindle feed hold UI15 r1015 P412 _d6 0 without external feed hold knob signal RM10 Chuck clamping in position Ul14 r1014 P409 d7 1 chuck control function is invalid check P409 d5 0 do not need the chuck respond check 118 Chapter Four System Operation P409 d7 1 chuck control function is invalid check P409_d5 0 do not need the chuck respond check _d4 1 tailstock control function is invalid input _d0 1 no hydraulic tailstock foot switch input _d7 1 chuck function control function is invalid input _d1 1 no hydraulic chuck foot switch input TCP Tool post locking in position UlO9 r1009 P318 0 Line up tool signal P318 9 M60 customizes the command tool change e ee re Tel Poste ton Sorat Te Too post poston signa T6 ide 008 f P3180 neupi T4 Tool post position signal T4 Ul04 ri004 P318 0 Line uptool ee ee A Tool post pornon oa T2 P318 0 ene up tool Ti tool post positon signal T1 UT 061 Pataco Lineup tool 4 7 OFFSET Working Mode OFFSET working mode the system executes the compensation to the tool offset The system prompts the corresponding intellective prompt message for each operat
281. le G7 ESP etc and the position does not confirm For example NO000 GOO X100 2100 N0010 G06 Y120 F1000 N0020 G04 D5 N0030 if r4019 2 then P0060 r4019 records the current state of Y axis If the Y axis G6 stops after reaching the programming position and the position confirms turn to P0060 N0040 G01 X30 F200 N0050 M30 NO060 G01 Z50 X51 F200 N0070 G0681 Y200 R10 D2 F500 L2 N0080 G01 X30 F200 N0090 M30 The application of the variable r4020 r4022 Variables r4020 r4022 are recorded the execution state of the M03 M10 M78 commands etc the execution of each state the completion of execution unsuccessful of execution or end in the middle way user decides whether close part output based upon these state programming r4020 indicates MO3 M04 MO5 state r4021 indicates M10 M11 state r4022 indicates M78 M79 state r4020 r4022 0 Leisure the completion of execution 1 Performing 2 Execution error waiting for trying again 3 Execution error command end leisure Example NOOOO r7000 r4021 The state of 0 monitoring inspection variable r4021 which consists of the monitoring description with the following judgment statements N0010 if r7000 0 then P1000 Ifthe chuck clamping executed r4021 0 is monitored turn to P1000 programming operation 226 Chapter Seven Statement Programming N0020 GOO Z300 X200 Firstly positioning to the initial point N0030 M10 Chuck clamping N004
282. led multi speed or variable frequency motor 3 3 1 Gear Shifting Controlling Spindle Motor Command format S01 S04 4 gear directly outputs leading zero can be omitted S00 S15 16 gear BCD code outputs leading zero can be omitted Explanation P410_d6 0 S function controls multi speed spindle motor when it controls the multi speed spindle motor it selects the direct 4 gear control signal or outputs 16 gear BCD code signal Parameter P410_d5 bit selects the output method of spindle multi step control P410_d5 0 spindle control is the 4 gear direct controlling output SO1 S04 each gear corresponds one output signal P410_d5 1 spindle control is 16 gear BCD code output SOO S15 155 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 3 2 Spindle Controlling Variable Frequency Motor P410_d6 1 S function controls the conversion motor The system outputs 0 10V DC analog voltage signal controlling inverter to realize the stepless speed regulating of the spindle motor Gear control of variable frequency spindle Command format M41 corresponding output signal SO M42 corresponding output signal S02 M43 corresponding output signal S03 M44 corresponding output signal SO4 Speed control of variable frequency spindle Command format G96 Setting constant surface cutting state G96 S_ Setting constant surface cutting state and specifying the surface speed value range 0 9999 m mi
283. little sidestep on the workpiece and X does not move 3 The tool in Z direction moves to the safe position the spindle stops rotating The system measures the diameter of cut sidestep 4 Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING and press X and the system displays Setting Workpiece Coordinate System X the operator inputs measured radius value radius programming press ENTER and the system automatically sets X workpiece coordinate 2 Setting Z workpiece coordinate 1 Start the spindle traverse the tool to cut a little sidestep on the workpiece X does not move 2 Move the tool to a safe position along with X direction and stop the spindle rotation Select a point as a reference point a fixed point on the machine is better for example the chuck surface or other reference plane so that the new workpiece coordinate system overlaps on the original workpiece coordinate system Then measure the distance from the cutting surface to the selected reference point in Z direction 3 Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING press Z and the system displays SETTING WORKPICE COORDINATE SYSTEM Z input the measured data and press ENTER the system automatically set Z workpiece coordinate Note The system workpiece coordinate system has been created after the above operations are completed Explanation 42 Chapter Four System Operation 1 Setting the workpiece coordinate system operation only modifies the tool nose coordinates of
284. lling Chuck Output Signal Command format M10 clamping workpiece M11 releasing workpiece M12 cancelling chuck output signal only some special check device can use M12 Explanation M11 is valid and M10 output is invalid when the system is turned on The parameter can set M10 M11 to be enabled disabled to be checked or not to be pulse or level control output and to be inner or outer control mode Interlock between chuck and spindle is decided by P402_d5 P402_d5 0 they are interlocked P402_d5 1 their interlock is released See OPERATION 4 4 7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function 3 1 8 M13 M14 Spindle Clamping Signal Output and Retraction The control servo spindle is clamped by external equipment in the static state using the M13 M14 command output signal and the interlocking is established between movement and clamping Only one block can be performed when programming It is on the M14 state when the system is turned on And it holds when the system is reset Code format M13 Spindle clamping signal output M14 Spindle clamping signal retraction Related parameter P509 Spindle clamping output signal SCLP parameter range 0 32 P350 Spindle clamping Releasing time ms parameter range 0 9999 P351 Servo OFF delay time ms parameter range 0 9999 The execution procedure of M13 command 142 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions The spindle clamping signal SCLP output is 0 delay the P350 ti
285. lue when there is no key pressed r5001 equals to zero waiting for the keyboard input a character waiting until the key is pressed and record it to r5001 waiting for the keyboard to input a character with cursor and character display the key isn t released the cursor clue the key is released the value is recorded to r5001 Waiting for the keyboard input a character and releasing press key Waiting for the keyboard input a character and releasing press key with cursor and character display Waiting for the keyboard input a numerical value and finished by ENTER giving up by press ESC then the input value will be zero Note When the assignment is outside 1 6 it will be ineffective Explanation R5001 assignment is the working mode for setting keyboard register the input value which is get 218 Chapter Seven Statement Programming after executed the command is stored in register r5001 it can be read or use for the conditional judge For example r5001 4 the system is waiting for the keyboard input a character it will be executed until the key is released If r5001 51 then P1500 if press 3 it turn to P1500 the ASCII value of 3 is 51 Explanation 1 In waiting for pressing when the ESC is pressed it will cancel the press key input and executes the next statement 2 The acceptable key symbol is as the below table the other key input is ineffective Notes The input value is the correspondin
286. m catalog the newly created program is taken as the current program Example Example 1 There is no 20 part program in the part program catalog creating it is as follows Press keys to input INPUT 2 0 ENTER The new program 020 has been created and the system enters 020 program edit window Example 2 There is 001 part program in the part program catalog select it is as follows Press keys to input INPUT 1 ENTER The selection of 001 part program is completed the system enters 001program edit window 4 3 2 2 Delete a Part Program Delete a part program is as follows Press INPUT key in Edit working mode 2 Input the required program number to delete by the key board 3 Press DELETE key the system prompts 4 Press ENTER to delete the part program which program number is input Press ESC not to execute the deletion operation and return to EDIT working mode Note 1 The system displays E100 the program to be deleted does not exist when there is no the program to be deleted 2 When the program which is to delete exists when it is not the current program the system deletes the program from the program list when it is the current program the system deletes 19 CGSR I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual the program from the program list and searches the program which program number is the smallest to be the current program when there is no programs the system creates one program n
287. m multi level embedding ae USB interface bidirectional transmission of programs parameters and offset between CNC and USB Communication Support for USB to download and upgrade N avs DA98 Series Digital AC Servo or DY3 Series Stepper Drive unit with pulse direction signal input CGGSRK HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Chapter Three Operation Panel CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL GSK96 multi function position control system abbreviated to system hereafter employs the aluminum alloy operation panel 3 1 LCD Display LCD display CNC man machine dialogue interface Lattice color LCD display with resolution of 800x480 3 2 LED Status Indicator LED indicator indicates the current working state of the system There are 14 function keys with LED indicators The function executed by the corresponding key is valid when LED is ON and it is invalid when LED is OFF 3 3 Keyboard Based on GB T 3168 1993 Numerical Control of Machine Symbol the system sets the following symbol function keys that complete the corresponding functions when they are pressed as follows 3 3 1 Character Keys Character keys include numbers letter and some other symbols In EDIT working mode each letter key can switch into 2 or 3 letter keys in other working mode each letter key only expresses one letter key For example and P are on one key operator directly presses the key when I or P is required and
288. m the cut end face to the selected reference point 9 Press K and the system display to input the measured data and press ENTER 6 The system prompts Input the tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number 9 Trial cutting tool setting method method 2 Operation steps as follows 1 X tool setting 1 Select the desired X axis to be tool setting by canos 2 Install the trial workpiece reliably on the machine and select a tool usually select the first one used in machining 3 Select the proper spindle speed and then start the spindle Traverse the tool in JOG 56 Chapter Four System Operation Working mode and cut a small sidestep of the workpiece 4 X does not move the operator presses and the system automatically memorizes the tool nose position and displays the tool setting icon 3 flashing and then X moves out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating Measure the diameter of the cut sidestep 5 Press K and the system displays Tool setting X to input the measured radius value radius programming and press ENTER 6 The system prompts Input the tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the o
289. mand simi AR 241 8 1 1 Customization Command Program Format a aa 241 8 2 Customization Command Store P254 E PE o e IA 242 8 2 1 Format and Debugging of Customization Command Storeroom sss eee 242 8 2 2 Explanation of Customized Command Storage aa 243 8 2 3 Customized Command Machining Example a 244 83 Footswitch in M61 comman eseeriviatarcir canica rra iia 247 34 The Foot Switch of M51 M58 Commanda smmiiarrarrinaciiaa rr raras 247 85 Call M50 M72 Function Before Machining PA o caine A A 248 86 Call M50 M70 Function by Manual 0 Key nn A A II opaenda waa qeiaen 248 CONNECTION nens 249 CHAPTER ONE INTERFACE e gt gt oooooocorccccccccocococonoocococonoococononcocococoncocococoncocococoncccocococcccocaconcccccocenenono 249 11 Rear Cover Interface Position Layout TT nn E o II ner 249 12 Total FrFaMBareriiinaass a AAA AA A 250 CHAPTER TWO INTERFACE GRAPH ecooooooooccrccncncncacococoncococococoocococonoococococncocococococcocococcccocococososs 251 CHAPTER THREE CNC DEVICE CONNECTION ecc00oooooococcnonoccncococononcocococcocococococcococococcocococosoos 253 31 FrontCover Communication Interface eme asin nara 253 3 1 1 USB Interface a ll ee ee ree 253 3 2 X1 X2 fter ace nera AAA AA A AAA 253 3 2 1 X1 X2 Interface Signal Definition Ce ci ll eee eee a a a 253 3 2 2 Connection Method of Input Signal iti ier ri li a a 256 3 2 3 Connection Method of Output Signal ii ni iii rir lin 259 3 2 4 Input Output Signal Technical Specification errr eee ee Cee eee
290. mand cannot be detected Delay time when orientation is switched to cutting ms _ Motion parameter P119 If the last command is a rapid positioning command and the current one is a cutting command the delay time set in P119 is automatically inserted between these two commands this parameter is used for preventing the taper streak on the workpiece due to the excessively fast command transition If the parameter is too large the machining efficiency may be affected In general set it between 0 100 Example 1 G00 U 50 Rapid positioning G01 W 10 F100 The command following it is a cutting command so the delay time set in P119 is 91 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual inserted before executing this command which prevents taper streak on the front end Example 2 G00 U 50 Rapid positioning S1000 G01 W 10 F100 As it does not follow the rapid positioning command directly another command separate them the delay time will not be inserted automatically 4 6 4 4 Parameters Related to Transmission and Compensation__ P200 P209 P411 Z X Y command pulse multiplication ratio _ transmission parameter P203 P205 P207 Z X Y command pulse division coefficient __ transmission parameter P204 P206 P208 P203 Z multiplication Z electronic gear numerator range 1 9999999 P204 Z division Z electronic gear denominator range 1 9999999 P205 X multiplication X electronic ge
291. matic running press and the system pops up the window to display the variable I O variable and others press ESC again and the system closes the window 2 Press y to select the required searching items and the selected item is displayed in black 3 When there are many variables are searched press to select the variable it is pointed by the pointer at the moment the macro variable cannot be changed press or Y to search the front or the latter one macro variable press or to search the variable in the page up or page down with 7 lines in each page press to exit at the moment the macro variable is displayed in black 4 In Auto initial state the common variable r100 r199 pointed with cursor can be alternated by the ENTER key 5 Press ESC to exit the display window Explanation 1 Macro variable display the running common variable edited to the program including variable number variable name variable value and state The variable value is displayed in the dynamic along the program changing in running the number and variable name are sorted from the small to the big Variable r001 r040 are displayed in brown r041 r99 in orange r100 r199 in green 2 I O variable display in dynamic the interface state of current running program Two kinds of state value of input interface variable O LOW level or 1 HIGH level the external signal valid and the pin is connected with OV in LOW it is invalid in HIGH The out inte
292. me the servo OFF signal YO3 SVF output is 0 delay the P351 time The execution procedure of M14 command Retract the servo OFF signal YO3 SVF delay P351 time retract the spindle clamping signal SCLP delay P350 time The interlocking relationship between the spindle movement and spindle clamping There is the interlocking relationship between the spindle start and spindle clamping when P410_d4 0 M13 cannot be performed when the spindle is started and the M14 then can be started the spindle There is the interlocking relationship among the spindle start Y axis and spindle clamping when P410 d4 1 The M13 cannot be performed when spindle starts and Y axis moves also during the M47 87 is performed And then the M14 state can be started the spindle or move the Y axis otherwise the system alarms E394 M13 state prohibits the Y axis movement command 3 1 9 M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF Command format M32 lubricating ON M33 lubricating OFF Explanation After the system is turned on M33 is valid and M32 output is invalid Parameter P330 sets whether the system automatically controls lubricating See OPERATION 4 4 9 2 Cooling Control 3 1 10 M41 M42 M44 M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shifting Control Command format M41 Spindle variable frequency type automatically shifts to No 1 gear M42 Spindle variable frequency type automatically shifts to No 2 gear M43 Spindle variable frequency type
293. meter The related parameter with the alarm record P417 and P418 4 8 7 3 Alarm Record hp2 Function By pressing hp2 in alarm record screen the data is transmitted by USB communication mode The user needs to select the transmission direction 1 Through USB interface The alarm record that are transmitted through USB interface are stored in folder COO1ERR in the root directory of U disc The file should be named according to the rule ERR file name 3 characters TXT 10 characters in total and the file number should not be larger than 999 4 8 7 4 The Deletion of Alarm Record Press the DELETE key in the alarm record display interface as follows The system will clear the overall records in the alarm list ENTER key Clear ESC Key Retraction The system clears the alarm records by the ENTER key in this page and then the overall alarm records are cleared after performing and return to the alarm record page simultaneously the Without alarm record prompts at the left corner of this page The alarm record will not be cleared press the Esc key and then return to the alarm record page 4 8 8 Machine Miscellaneous Function Control Operate the miscellaneous function keys on the operation panel instead of the input commands in DIAGNOSIS working mode to execute the machine miscellaneous function e y Press W The spindle rotates clockwise P410_d 7 0 LED indicator lights M3 corresponding 12
294. mping again or signal abnormal open the chuck champing resolve the chuck error in position signal is invalidation E367 When the following chuck respond Release in position signal checking alarm function is Control the chuck champing again or signal abnormal open the chuck champing resolve the chuck error in position signal is invalidation E368 When the following tailstock respond Tail stock FW signal checking alarm function is Control the tailstock going forward again signal abnormal open the tailstock going forward or resolve the chuck error in position signal is invalidation E369 When the following tailstock respond i i Tail stock BK signal signal checking alarm function is on ME AANSOEK JAI acon abnormal open the tailstock going backward O Or in position signal is invalidation E370 P319 number of tools and Foro The parameier selling PSIE ocd Set the parameter P408_d7 0 1 again tool position signal in tool changing the position number are not parameter P408_d7 0 e ree equal External start i E Key o em Check the outside startup signal and signal abnormal Eo e asc changes resolve the error to JOG or AUTO working mode ae Chuck foot switch a Se i we ae oak Check the chuck foot switch signal and signal abnormal Poe ee nen e Sem cnang s resolve the error to JOG or AUTO working mode us Tail foot switch Peco Seema ye Check the tailstock foot switch signal signal abnormal TO GASCO WIEN Me
295. n G97 Cancelling constant surface speed state G97 S Cancelling constant surface speed state specifying speed value range 0 9999 r min S According to the current state speed value or surface speed value cutting Explanation 1 In JOG and AUTO working mode the system displays the actual spindle speed S_ 2 In JOG and AUTO working mode the system displays the cutting constant surface control G96 S m or constant speed control G97 S _ r 3 Parameters are related to the spindle speed analog voltage control as follows Data parameter P305 max spindle speed of constant surface speed Data parameter P304 lowest spindle speed of constant surface speed Data parameter P300 P303 max speed of spindle in the spindle gear 1 4 corresponding to M41 M44 4 See Section 4 4 3 3 Spindle S Command Rotation Speed Control in Part I Operation for details 3 4 T function Tool Function Machining one workpiece needs several different tools The motor tool post with 4 16 tool selections can be controlled by the system To avoid the error caused by the installation or the wear and tear each tool is placed in the different position when it is cutting the workpiece the tool change and the tool compensation are employed in the programming 156 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions Tool setting operation is executed before machining receives the position offset data of each tool referred to as tool offset T comm
296. n AUTO working mode the system automatically recovers to the program initial mode when it executes the first command of workpiece program or executes the first block command after M20 or selects the middle block as the first command 4 1 4 Safe Protection The CNC system sets a perfect protection measure to prevent the operator from danger and the machine from being damaged 4 1 4 1 Hardware Limit Protection The system can check the travel limit switch installed on the machined When the machine slide moves to press the travel limit switch the system stops feeding instead of closing other miscellaneous functions and the program stops running and the system displays the hardware limit alarm information of corresponding axis After the travel limit switch alarms the system can select JOG working mode the key for axis movement which is reversed to the limited direction is pressed i e the system exits the travel limit and the travel limit switch alarm automatically disappears on the screen Explanation 1 X Y Z positive limit check shares one pin LT and their negative limit check shares one pin LT when the positive limit alarms all axes cannot move positively but move negatively and vice versa 11 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 When the travel limit switch runs across the limit block the limit signal appears the valid length of limit block signal is more than 30mm or more to avoi
297. n cutting 1 Do not check In JOG AUTO working mode after the spindle starts the system automatically check the spindle speed it prompts spindle rotation abnormality when the spindle starts abnormally When the system stops rotating accidently in cutting feed the system stops the feed interrupts the program execution and closes the spindle and alarms When the spindle works in the low speed less than 1 r min the system alarms at the moment the parameter should be set to 1 For the frequency spindle when the programming speed is less than SO the system does not check and alarm d5_ Interlock between chuck and spindle 0 Interlock when the chuck and the spindle are interlocked the chuck cannot be controlled when the spindle is rotating the chuck releases but the spindle cannot be started 1 Releasing interlock when the chuck is not interlock with the spindle starting the spindle is not influenced by the chuck state controlling the chuck is not influenced by the spindle state d4_ Chuck respond signal consecutive check 0 Do not alarm 1 Alarm the bit means whether the system real time check the chuck state and alarms when the chuck releases The control bit is valid when the chuck has the respond signal P409_ d5 1 d3__Interlock between tailstock and spindle 0 Interlock when the tailstock and the spindle are interlock the chuck cannot be controlled when the spindle is rotating the tails
298. n is 0 and then the program cycle ends Generally G80 LO must be followed with end of program command otherwise the E228 No end of program command alarm will occur after calling Example NO000 G50 X100 Z100 N0010 M3 S01 N0020 GOO X10 Z30 N0030 G22 Ld N0040 G01 W 5 F50 N0050 US W 5 NO060 if r1005 0 then P0120 184 Define a coordinate system Open a spindle and then set at the low speed Rapid position to the cycle start Program cycle starts and continues for 5 times If the No 5 input is LOW then return to the N0120 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions block N0070 G80 The end of cycle body NOO80 G26 X100 Z100 X Z rapid retracts to the program reference point NOO90 M5 N0110 M2 N0120 G80 L3 Modify the cycle times 3 times Notice G80 L and G22 cannot be returned at the same exit during the program is performed otherwise the limitless cycle may occur Refer to the following G22 Lxx G80 Lx x 4 16 G98 Feed per Minute G99 Feed per Revolution Command format G98 Fxx xxx xxx feed per minute G99 FXxxx xxv xxx feed per rev Field and range G98 FXXXXX xxx F unit mm min F define the feedrate of its following interpolation command its unit mm min G99 FXXxXXxXX X xxx F unit mmr F _ define the feedrate of its following interpolation command its unit mm r F 0 15000 000mm min 0 15000 000mm r Note 1 2 3 4
299. n read the register it can t be used for the conditional judge Example ro003 r032 display the value in r032 ro003 r03 r01 display the value of r03 adding r01 7 1 2 7 Graph Update Register r5004 Graph update register r5004 in the description of process monitor statement this variable is forbidden to use Explanation The r5004 assignment is a command to clear the process graph display area it can be seen when the graph display window is open Write the random number to r5004 clear the content of the system process graph display area Example Graph update register r5004 it is forbidden to use this variable in the process monitor description statement Note In the cycle process the last process graph isn t cleared in order to let the user observe the new process path and graph in conveniently in the ending of the process program execute the command the next process path and graph will be displayed again 222 Chapter Seven Statement Programming 7 1 2 8 Program Control Register r5008 Program control register r5008 usually used for program description during monitoring do not used in common programs If data is uncertain when reading this register it cannot be used Different values written in the register have different meanings and correspond to different functional commands Available commands in r5008 1 Pause movement stops equals to key CYCLE PAUSE press CYCLE START to resume Switch betwe
300. n speed is not reached the cutting will affect the tool life and workpiece This parameter is used to identify spindle rotation soeed reached or not For example P341 80 means only the spindle actual speed can be cut 80 120 between the 100 20 set by program If the program is S2000 the actual speed detected by system can be cut which will enter 1600 2400 otherwise you should keep waiting When P341 0 this function is disabled When P341 is not zero in MANUAL or AUTO mode the actual speed is detected automatically and displayed on the screen if the spindle speed Sxxxx is displayed in yellow it means the preset range is not reached if green it means the preset range is reached Usage This parameter is valid when inverter spindle or gear shift spindle is used When variable frequency spindle is used the system compares the programmed speed S with the actual speed When gear shift spindle is used as S represents the gear S1 S4 gear spindle rotation speed corresponds to the setting value of P300 P303 if the gear is S1 the system compares the setting value of P300 with the actual speed P341 is invalid to other gears so the cutting will not be affected by it This parameter is valid only for cutting command such as G01 G33 etc When cutting 96 Chapter Four System Operation commands are executed continuously only the first one is detected If the spindle rotation speed is displayed in yellow and the cutting is not performed
301. n the input output pin has been used by other functions the interface parameter cannot be set as the occupied Common signal name and the system prompts Parameter alarm setting input or output pin is occupied Search some pins have not been covered in DIAGNOSIS working mode which are displayed in white and whose names are displayed in the general signal names UI or UO Input output pin serial number in the diagnosis window increase from the number 1 from top to bottom from left to right Standard definition and function of interface parameter are referred to OPERATION Appendix 4 6 5 8 Interface Parameter List Example When P511 SAGT is set to 5 SAGT covers the input interface UlO5 UIO5 pin inputs the safety door check function When P506 M320 is set to 9 M320 covers the output interface UO09 UOOY pin outputs the lubricating control function 4 6 4 15 Variable Initial Value P600 P639 The initial value of variable parameter P600 P639 correspond to the variable initial value r001 r040 The concrete variable explanation is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 7 Statement Programming 111 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 6 4 16 M87 M88 Related Parameter__P342 P343 Refer to the Section 4 4 3 5 Spindle Orientation Control of OPERATION for the detailed parameter explanation 4 6 4 17 Self defined Related Parameter P344 P348 Call M50 M72 before machining _ Miscellaneous
302. nate system and program reference point set in JOG working mode Format Input G 5 1 ENTER Recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in JOG working mode 4 4 3 Spindle Control Function 4 4 3 1 Spindle Starting Stopping Control Spindle starting stopping as follows In JOG working mode the operator can directly operate the function keys on the panel or input MO3 MO4 MO5 to control the spindle rotation CW CCW and stop Feed spindle hold is invalid in JOG working mode 0 Press 5 or input M 3 ENTER the spindle rotates CW The system displays the spindle state and LED lights Key M 4 ENTER Spindle rotates along with the negative direction 44 Chapter Four System Operation HO Press 550P or input M 5 ENTER the spindle stops rotation Spindle JOG control The spindle stop key can switch the spindle JOG control state ho In the spindle stop state press 85 and the Spindle state icon is displayed in the highlight on pO the screen and the system is switched to the spindle JOG control state Press 55 again the 119 system is switched to the normal regular state In the spindle manual state press 5 the spindle rotates at the specified speed in the specified time and then stops When the specified time is too HO long the operator can press 550P to stop the rotation In the spindle manual state MDI inputting the spindle control command M03 M04 MO5 are in
303. nction Safety setting 3 _ Bit parameter 419 Password level 3 7 a8 as ae fas faz fat do d7 Whether turn OFF the spindle or not when drive unit alarm occurs 0 No When a drive unit alarm is detected the spindle is not turned OFF 1 Yes When a drive unit alarm is detected the spindle is turned OFF d6__TheM state change is 0 Not prompted The state change of spindle chuck and tailstock is not prompted in the system 1 Prompted The state change of spindle chuck and tailstock is prompted in the system During AUTO machining if you want to stop in the machining process you need to turn OFF the spindle and later turn ON it then press CYCLE START to continue Sometimes you may forget to turn ON the spindle which may cause accident Set P419 d6 to 1 can prevent such thing from happening When P419 d6 1 in the initial state of single block or stop the state of spindle M3 M4 M5 chuck M10 M11 and tailstock M78 M79 are stored in the system Press CYCLE START the system will first identify whether the state is the same with the previous one If not a pop up window is displayed prompting the changed contents You can press Y to continue or press N to exit d5 Monitoring closes when ends 0 Close When it is set to 0 the monitoring close is viewed when opening the window after the program operation is ended 1 Do not close When it is set to 1 the monitoring is still performed when opening the
304. nd Step 5 to complete the zero return process In the mode the manual operation moves the coordinate axis to a special position and then the system executes the zero return otherwise the result is not correct Zero return mode 4 the system executes the zero return mode 4 when there is neither deceleration nor zero signal When there is no machine zero check device installed on the machine the relative parameters are set to 0 at the moment when the system executes the machine zero return function it does not check the zero signal and deceleration signal till it returns to the zero coordinate position of the axis Note 1 The direction of machine zero return points to the zero return direction if this direction is positive then the axis should in the negative direction 2 In the machine zero return the rapid traverse speed of the coordinate axis is controlled by the rapid override 3 In the machine zero return the coordinate axis motion is not limited by the software limit parameter 4 Parameter related to the machine zero return is referred to OPERATION Section 4 6 4 2 5 Connection related to the machine zero return and zero return mode are referred to CONNECTION Section 3 3 Machine Zero Function and Connection 6 After the system executes the machine zero return the blue icon of the machine zero return after the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the prompt 4 4 2 2 Creating Machine Coordinate Syst
305. nd format M21 D output of No 1 user output signal is valid output LOW M22 D output of No 1 user output signal is invalid output OFF 147 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual M23 D output of No 2 user output signal is valid output LOW M24 D output of No 2 user output signal is invalid output OFF Field D signal hold time unit s O 9999 999 When D is omitted the output signal is being held Explanations M21 M22 M23 M24 have not the concrete definition specified the system and the user can specify according to the concrete requirements They separately correspond to the output signals defined by the two users and the corresponding commands can change the states of output signals User 1 user 2 output signals are defined in the interface parameter M210 M230 See CONNECTION after the output interfaces are defined Notes 1 M21 M22 M23 and M24 cannot be in the same block with other commands Each of them must be specified in a separate block 2 M21 M24 can contain parameter D when M21 M24 are executed with parameter D the time specified by D is delayed after corresponding output is executed and then the previous output is cancelled If the command has no D the output signal is being kept 3 1 17 M91 M92 M93 M94 User Input Command format M91 M92 M93 M94 UU UV VU Field P Block which skips to the target block It does not skip when
306. nd run in order to check the correctness of P254 8 2 2 Explanation of Customized Command Storage In the JOG working mode input the customization command directly when it needs to execute the hardened customization command in P254 In editing program the hardened customization command in system P254 can be used the operation is simple and convenient Using customization command format 001 execute the customization command beside the No 254 program N0010 M51 execute M51 command N0020 G04 D3 N0030 M52 execute M52 command N0040 G04 D3 N0050 M02 Explanation 1 The M50 M74 can be used in JOG working mode or other program directly only the No 254 program has hardened to FLASH otherwise the system alarm when the corresponding customization command isn t written in No 254 program but it is used in JOG working mode or other program the system alarm too 2 The operation of how to harden the No 254 program to FLASH please refer the No 254 program explanation with the detail in OPERATION 4 3 EDIT working modein this explanation notebook 3 After the No 254 program is modified it must be hardened to FLASH again otherwise the called M50 M74 command in JOG working mode or other program aren t the latest customization command after modified 4 In AUTO working mode when the M50 M74 used variable are used in main machining process must pay attention to the impaction of variable cross change to the program
307. nd the relative coordinate is relative to the movement of the current position X Y Z U V W 9999 999mm 9999 999mm P metric thread lead P 0 001mm 500 000mm E inch thread lead E 0 060 tooth inch 25400 000 tooth inch H The mark of execution method Reservation disabled H range 00000000 11111111 Relative parameters Parameters related to G32 P100 P108 P112 P113 and P114 Explanation G32 Z tapping cycle execution process Spindle rotation starts Z axis infeed tapping Close the spindle Wait the spindle to exactly stop The spindle rotates counterclockwise reverse to the previous rotation direction Z tool retraction to the starting point of the cycle 0066000 The spindle stops 1 Determine the spindle direction according to the possible tapping direction before tapping The spindle will stop after the tapping ends Restart the spindle when continuously machining 2 There is a deceleration time after the spindle is closed at the moment Z Y rotates along with the spindle till the spindle stops completely Therefore the actual bottom hole of machining is deeper than the actual required The actual depth should be determined by the spindle speed in tapping and by whether the spindle s brake is installed or not 173 CGSN I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 The system forbids executing G32 when the system is in DRY RUN mode 4 The other cautions are the same as those of G33
308. nd the system alarms in serial the connection is as follows LT i OY ot Z Y 4 1 4 2 Software Limit Safe Protection 1 Mechanical software limit safe protection The mechanical software limit safe protection is to limit machine coordinate motion range to avoid slide to exceed the motion range The mechanical software limit alarms when the machine position machine coordinates exceeds the range Releasing overtravel alarm methods reversely movement in JOG working mode negatively Chapter Four System Operation moves for positive overtravel positively moves for negative overtravel 2 Tool nose software limit safe protection The tool nose software limit safe protection is to limit tool nose coordinate motion range to avoid the tool nose to exceed the motion range The tool nose software limit alarms when the machine position tool nose coordinates exceeds the range Releasing overtravel alarm methods reversely movement in JOG working mode negatively moves for positive overtravel positively moves for negative overtravel Explanation 1 The coordinate axis decelerates to stop when the coordinates exceed the software limit range during the motion Relative parameters P009 P010 max travel of Z positive negative tool nose software limit P011 P012 max travel of X positive negative tool nose software limit P013 P014 max travel of Y positive negative too nose software limit P015 P016 max travel of Z positive
309. ndard number does not meet the parameter number standard data the first parameter parameter system specified range E018 Repeatedly input Para Check and delete the repeat NO repeatedly parameter number ata Wrong Para file formula Parameter file format can t meet Create the parameter file according the parameter file sign E021 S upgrade code proof Software promoting command Contact the supplier error checking error O O Ilegal 1 O settin Interface parameter setting E023 eg 9 exceeds the maximal I O pin Modify the I O to the specified range Pin NO out of range number E024 legal uO aung l Parameter Serum ANA n gt IAP Release this I O or use other I O pin Input pin NO occupied pin collision E025 Illegal I O setting Parameter setting and I O input Output pin NO occupied pin collision Release this I O or use other I O pin Fail to read Para Failure in SRAM saving l E030 SA Save again initialization parameter can t read Illegal character OFT Illegal character in offset number Delete the illegal character E031 of tool compensation transmission file Tool compensation NO There is no tool compensation Completing the number behind the T not standard number behind the T of tool sign in file or add the sign of offset compensation transmission file number or the offset number lack T sign OFT NO exceed 1 64 The tool offset number in tool Modify or delete the exceeded tool E034 compensation transmission file compens
310. ndicators go out and the yellow indicator lights when the program stops running without alarm 4 4 9 2 Lubricating Control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P506 M320 Lubricating controls the output signal Functional description 1 Non auto lubricating P330 is set to 0 non automatic lubricating is controlled by the command about the lubricating ON OFF In JOG AUTO working mode input lubricating ON OFF M32 M33 is valid After M32 is executed lubricating outputs after M33 is executed the lubricating output is cancelled 2 Automatic lubricating 62 Chapter Four System Operation It is the automatic lubricating when P330 is set to other than 0 The system can set Lubricating starting time and Lubricating interval time After the system is turned on it executes the lubricating for the time set by P330 then stops the output executes the cycle lubricating after the set time set by P331 Note When the system starts the automatic lubricating function P330 and P331 values are more than 1s when they are less than 1s the system takes them as 1s 4 4 9 3 Machine Electricity Delay Power on Control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the sign
311. ne or several technology operations in the course of machining part program consists of some blocks according to the machining technology orderly A block number line number is used for identifying blocks A program name is used for identifying programs 137 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Each part program consists of one program number and blocks A program contains 9999 blocks at most A block number is composed of N and the following 4 digit integer A program name is comprised of and program number 3 digit integer General structure of program is as follows Fig 2 1 Program name 020 Edit 020 Column 15 Line8 Total lines 10 Length 1IKB hpl 2008 12 12 EDIT LSL Program comment N0010 G50 X0 ZO Blank space before block F200 Skip symbol of block N0020 Gl X100 Z100 F200 N0030 G2 U100 W50 R50 F250 N0040 GO X0 ZO Block N0050 X100 Z100 Block number N0060 T0202 tool change block comment symbol and comment N0070 Gl X50 230 GO X0 ZO N0080 M30 Word Omit block number End of block Fig 2 1 Program structure A program consists of program comments blocks each block begins with block number it can be omitted follows characters words a block has block skip symbol and comments Example Program program name 012 Remark NO000 G50 X200 Z300 Blocks containing N are the blocks with a line number G00 X200 Z200 blocks not containing N are the
312. ne to work wrongly and damage the workpiece and the tool as well as injure the operator 4 Compensation function When offset is needed check the direction and the amount of the compensation Improper compensation causes the machine to work wrongly and damage the workpiece and the tool as well as injure the operator 5 Manual operation If the machine is to run in JOG working mode check the current position of the tool and the workpiece and correctly specify the moving axis moving direction and the feedrate MPG Hand wheel control with great override such as 100 rotate MPG used to call electric hand wheel then the tools and workbench will move fast which may lead the stop of the MPG However the tools and workbench will not stop immediately The high override of MPG movement may damage the machine and its tool even injure the operator 6 MPG returns to the reference point If the tool is return to the reference point make sure that the machine has been equipped with the device to detect the reference point otherwise the tool cannot reach the reference point which may damage the machine and its tool and even injure the operator IX GGSK JJ 14133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Safety Responsibility Manufacturer s Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and or controlled on design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories
313. ng PT REE REE CTE ee CEP CCE Tee eC OC eT aaa 172 46 G32 Tapping Cycle O natant RS RN 173 47 G38 Rigid Tapping Threading NE ta lense aac gla oa at 174 48 G50 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System ios 176 49 G51 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System Setting soles 177 410 G26 X Z Y Reference POIRE Reti eerren evier ee rE EAEE a AE TEENETE AS 177 4 11 G28 Return to Machine Zero Machine Reference Point A ERR 178 4 12 G30 The gnd i the ard Program Reference Point RetUr ee ia 179 4 13 G04 Timer Delay A E 180 4 14 G96 Constant Surface Speed Control G97 Constant Surface Speed Cancel 180 4 15 G22 G80 Program Part Cycle AEE E er re E E N E EE E E T AN 183 4 15 1 G80 Adds L Address Character a 184 416 G98 Feed per Minute G99 Feed per STaVelHile ite eC oe ee ee ere ree 185 417 G31 Skip tiara cana 186 418 G35 I1 O Signal Observation Command rita stead A EACEA RA 187 4 19 G52 Rotary Axis Y Axis Coordinate Clearing A EE ere ee A EE A 188 4 20 G66 Store the Current Coordinates G67 Return to the Stored Coordinates 189 4 21 G81 Drilling G83 Peck Drilling O EA 190 4 22 G0681 G0683 The Drilling Cycle WV TNE G06 MOS sisas sniesa sg ea tnue iatietaneson anaes 191 4 23 Appendix G function and lts Explanation Table table 4 2 E E E E ere eee rer 191 4 24 Appendix RNE 193 CHAPTER FIVE GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES 195 5
314. nge In executing programs the system displays the program compound check prompt when the tool nose software limit and machine coordinate software limit exceeds the setting range set by the 31 CGGSRK I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual parameter from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode 4 4 JOG Working Mode In JOG working mode the operator can directly press the function key to execute some operation and also press the letter key execute the some setting or execute some operation the system provides the corresponding prompt message for each operation The relative setting or operation input format and example are as follows the required function key is expressed with icon the required input letter or digit key is expressed with the underline the system prompt is expressed with the frame Press to clear the mistaken digit and input it again when the mistaken digit is input in the course of inputting letter or digit ESC noa Press to exit the current operation before the confirmation when the operator sets some operation or executes the input or man machine dialog process In JOG working mode the system displays in the top right Press it and the system pops up one window displaying the operation key catalog in JOG working mode press it again and the window is closed directly press other functions and the window automatically closes e Press JOG to enter JOG working mode For
315. ning teeth Check one turn signal of coder from the initial angle Z axis raises speed from the current position A G33 starting point which makes the traverse speed reach the reference speed At the moment Z moves to B the lead of AB section maybe not standard in the actual machining the front of AB section must reserve an idle distance which does not touch the workpiece the higher the reference speed is the longer AB section is The system follows the spindle speed from B to execute the cutting to C the cutting speed 169 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual changes with the spindle speed the lead of BC section is standard 4 Zreduces speed from C till D position Z W CD lead maybe not standard CD length is equal to AB section when the reference speed is lower than the initial speed raising reducing speed is not required the lengths of CD and AB are 0 Fig 4 3 G33 path Explanation 1 G33 command can machine the inch system single axis screw thread 2 In the spindle rotating clockwise the positive cutting is right hand thread and the negative is the left hand thread and the spindle rotates counterclockwise they are reverse 3 Generally the machining repeats the thread cutting many times in the same path from the roughing to the finish turning when the thread is machined The thread cutting starts after receiving 1 turn signal from the spindle coder and so the cutting points on
316. nit mm min Move field format 37 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Z W _ F_ Z moves its speed is determined by the rapid feed state when F is omitted The same as in the followings Y V _ F Y feeds Z W X U F ZIX feed simultaneously Note 1 In JOG working mode up to 2 axes move simultaneously at the currently selected manual traverse speed 2 X U Y V can be input when X Y set by the system parameter are valid Example 1 Input W MOVE W 5 2 ENTER START or ESC cancel it means that Z axis moves 5 2mmalong with the negative direction Input X MOVE X 40 ENTER START or ESC cancel it means that X axis moves to the place where the coordinate is 40 Example 2 Input Z200 U50 Z moves to 200 X moves 50 along with the positive direction its speed is not specified and determined by RAPID FEED state Input U20 W 50 F80 X positively moves 20 Z moves 50 along with the negative direction The feedrate is 80 and is influenced by the feedrate override Input F200 the set feedrate is 200 The system is switched into feed state Input FO the set feedrate is 0 the system is switched into feed state and uses the embedded speed Traverse speed explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 38 When field F is input the system will automatically switch to low speed feeding state and the speed indicator is OFF the gear of fe
317. not be adjusted in the manual mode GO9 state is memorized after the system is turned off avoid the malfunction of the feeder in manual mode 4 5 Thread Cutting Command The CNC system can execute many kinds of thread cutting function The thread function includes continuous thread cutting command G33 variable pitch thread cutting command G34 tapping cycle cutting command G32 the rigid tapping threading command G38 The machine with the thread cutting function must be installed with the spindle encoder whose lines is set by P209 In thread cutting the system moves the thread machining axes after it receives the one turn signal of the spindle encoder so the system can execute the roughing finishing many times to complete the machining of the same thread without changing the spindle speed When the thread pitch is determined the speed of the thread machining axes is determined by the spindle speed and is not related to feedrate override When the spindle override control in the thread cutting is valid and the spindle speed changes the pitch has an error because of the acceleration deceleration Therefore never attempt to adjust the spindle speed or stop the spindle in thread cutting Stopping the spindle may cause damage to the tool and workpiece The thread cutting command can only be the single axis Z X programming 4 5 1 G33 Thread Cutting Command format G33 Z W PCE Q H Z axis thread cutting G33 X U PCE Q H_
318. nt G07code format G07 Z Zsingle axis automatically feeds and the single axis can be Z X or Y G07 Without axis number which means all axes automatically stop G07 explanation 1 The definition of GO7 command The specified axis automatically stops feeding and the specified axis stops G6 motion mode 2 G07 can only contain single axis or no axis number lt can be executed in JOG AUTO working mode if G07 is abbreviated to G7 it is equivalent to G7 Manual input of G06 and G07 Take Z as an example Once the parameter allows the axis to perform G6 motion the user can input a complete G6 G7 command to control the axis in JOG working mode For example by inputting G6 Z300 18 F2 ENTER the Z starts to move The below common cases can be simplified by using the following input methods 1 Keyin IZ ENTER Equivalent to G06 Z 2 Keyin 1Z ENTER Equivalent to G06 Z 3 Key in IZ F300 ENTER Equivalentto G06 Z F300 4 Key in 1Z0 ENTER Equivalentto G07 Z 5 Key in 10 ENTER Equivalent to G07 Note The simplified input can only control the start and stop of the move axis and set the speed instead of controlling the positioning of the move axis Keying in G06 G07 in AUTO mode In AUTO working mode the user can employs the simplified input method to execute G6 G7 command before executing the program During the program executing the manual key in control is valid if the axis has executed G6 before or is exec
319. nts before programming 1 1 Coordinate Axis and its Direction The controllable axes of the system are defined as Z X and Y axis which realizes any two axis or three axis linear linkage two coordinate axes perpendicular to each other form the plane rectangular coordinate systems X Z X Y and Z Y as shown in fig 1 1 the coordinate system in this manual defines X Z axis according to fig 1 1 O X Fig 1 1 X Z rectangular coordinate system X Itis defined to be perpendicular with the rotary centerline of spindle X positive direction is the one that the tool leaves from the rotary center of spindle Z Itis defined to be coincident with the rotary centerline of spindle and Z positive direction is the one that the tool leaves from the headstock Y Refer to X and Z Y can switch with the servo spindle 1 2 Machine Coordinate System Machine Zero Machine coordinate system is reference for the system to count coordinates and is fixed on the machine Machine zero or machine reference point or mechanical zero is a fixed point on the machine Generally it is set at the position of X Z max stroke with the machine zero check device and do not use the machine zero return function or set bit parameters P406_d7 P406_d6 P406_d5 P406_d4 P406_d3 P406_d2 to 0 i e no machine zero when the machine zero check device is not installed 131 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 3 P
320. number program i e the system has not found the line number for the call or the transfer Line number repeat Repeated program line number in There is repeated program line program makes the block M96 M97 M98 number in modifying program or in the condition statement not be identified i e the program has more than two call or transfer needed line number err error check the system all sided Errors in variable NO Using the usable variable range number Edit the program again divisor is O zero command not to be zero Not assign a value to Input interface variable is read only variable can t evaluate it i e input information lost translate and edit process Buffer area file too big The editing single program is too big Modify source program Coordinate fields repeat Coordinate field repeat Delete one field of them Data format wrong Data format error such as F1r1 Gir Modify source program M r T2r or commands like Gir M1r T2r are used 203 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Alarm E228 Program hasnt end The program don t have the ending Modify source program add command command M02 or M20 or M30 the ending command A O O O E233 No user defined At first make program for the needed Write M50 program then command user defined command M50 then harden harden it it E234 Data field repeat The same field in block is input repeatedly Delete the repeat data field O O
321. o be O the system Set the P333 to be non zero value no arrange again compositor again function is invalid again 6 4 Emergency Alarm Program Alarm Table i e E200 E299 E600 E699 The type of alarm in program is divided to Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND Alarm in 202 Chapter Six Alarm Message PROGRAM CHECK two kinds 6 4 1 Alarm in Program Command i e E200 299 Alarm in program command means there is wrong command in working program and then alarm it can be eliminated by inputting the correct command and it has little relation to the parameter Alarm List in programming command Illegal command The system undefined command appears in block command list the program Illegal information The system unidentified command appears in block Input the correct command Command format wrong Input again according the block correct command format compatible appear in the same block command or line input Lack of information Input the command needed the block content according the correct format source program characters over 20 input the block Data exceeding range The value in the block is over the specified range Errors in data The data don t meet the standard Modify the is wrong data again over the range independently without others Lack of line number The specified program line number of Modify the source program command M96 M97 M98 or in the input the correct block line condition statement doesn t exist in this
322. o line numbers Record alarm __bit parameter P417 password level 2 109 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual d7 _ Record parameter tool offset alarm or not 0 Record Record the alarms in parameter tool offset mode 1 Not record Does not record the alarms in parameter tool offset mode d6 d5 d4 d3__ Record EDIT program spindle tool change alarm or not 0 Yes 1 No This parameter P417 set whether the alarm is recorded When it is set to 0 alarm is recorded in following occasions alarm should be recorded program changed emergency stop alarm in MANUAL AUTO mode Alarm messages can be divided into P417 bit P418 bit Message parameter parameter ee or not display or not Alarm parameter tool offset mode E001 as S J S Alarm in EDIT mode E101 E199 Program related alarm E201 E299 E601 E699 M03 M04 M05 start stop a stop alarm alarm in MANUAL AUTO mode E301 E499 Alarm display _ bit parameter P418 password level 3 This parameter sets whether the recorded alarm message is to be displayed or not when it is set to 0 alarm is displayed messages for program change are all displayed the displayed contents are d7__ display parameter tool offset 0 Yes Displays all alarms in parameter tool offset mode 1 No Does not display all alarms in parameter tool offset mode d6 d5 d4 d3 d0 Display EDIT program spindle tool change emergency stop in
323. o this variable automatically in executing T command O lt tool offset numbers64 The current tool position number recorder after the tool changing finished every time the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically The current tool offset number recorder after the tool changing finished every time the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically Ostool offset numbers64 instantaneous interference recorder In the AUTO working mode when the system has checked the recently press key G or M it will input the corresponding ASCII value 71 77 to r4009 and display the character on the top left corner of the screen Write random number except the 71 77 or press X key or enter the AUTO working mode the variable value will be cleared to zero Using r4009 it can increase the function of two program branch transfer used in the temporally specified man interference of machining process timer In the AUTO working mode when the variable value isn t zero each ms will reduce one automatically until the zero it can be the time for conditional judge timer In the AUTO working mode when the variable value isn t zero each ms will reduce one automatically until the zero spindle coder Read the spindle coder and it s value range among O four times of real coder LINE when the coder LINE parameter P209 is set to be 1200 the value range will be 0 4800 Reco
324. of PROGRAMMING Example 2 The different states of 2 circuit signal output can be controlled by M51 254 N1000 M51 N1010 if r151 gt 0 then P1050 N1020 r2001 1 N1030 r2002 1 N1040 M99 N1050 if r151 gt 1 then P1090 N1060 r2001 0 N1070 r2002 1 N1080 M99 N1090 if r151 gt 2 then P1130 N1100 r2001 1 N1110 r2002 0 N1120 M99 N1130 r2001 0 N1140 r2002 0 N1150 M99 It is necessary to input the command in Manual or Auto program M51 KO Cor M51 Close 2 circuit signal output r2001 1 r2002 1 The K is set to O by default if it does not exist M51 K1 Output r2001 0 r2002 1 M51 K2 Output r2001 1 r2002 0 M51 K3 It equals to K3 when K gt 3 Output r2001 0 r2002 0 152 Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions 3 1 21 2 In No 254 Program When Compiling M50 M74 commands with Parameter but not Necessary Code format M50 11 5 9 32 K1 3 6 32 M99 Field meaning I Input port signal Total 32 numbers from 1 32 followed wherein the numbers should be separated by K Output port signal Total 32 number form 1 32 followed K wherein the numbers should be 4 3 separated by Explanation In the Manual or Auto working mode the I O signal observation interface appears by Left key after this command is executed The function state of the input output port signal followed with I K can be observed in this interface If there are several pages with the content in the di
325. of inserting macro string on the program edit page is as follows Press hp1 2 key to display the macro string list on the screen 2 Select the desired contents according to the keys Example E g Press hp1 2 key then press G key program contents input r r r r Note For details about the variables and statement programming explanation refer to Chapter Seven Programming Statement 4 3 5 3 Line Number Sort Press hp1 3 in the program edit window and the system sort again the programs and the sorted block number increases in 10 times P333 value is set to 10 Note 1 After sorting the block number again the program skip error appears when the program skip command is used in programming 2 Program sorting function is invalid when P333 is set to 0 4 3 5 4 Replacing Character String Press hpi R in the program edit window and the system prompts Character string replacing window the operator can execute the operation according to the system prompts All characters which need to be replaced are replaced from the character where the cursor is to the last character 4 3 5 5 Cursor Position The system provides the character string search function i e position the content needed by the operator which is convenient for operator to search the required content Press hp1 and the system Vis ii prompts F operation functions as follows 1 Press and the cursor positions to the first page of the curren
326. ol on neral landaro Standard signal function Remark interface signal name signal name hi 6 ULOO Tool post clamping General input interface UlO9 in position signal 3 4 2 Signal Connection The connection method of common input output Ul01 Ul09 UO11 U0O12 interface accords to the X1 X2 interface connection principle above When the tool number signal is connected to the 262 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection machine external and the tool number is in position the corresponding tool number signal is connected to 24VGND 3 4 3 Function Description The tool change mode is set by P318 The tool change mode and the control time sequence are as follows 3 4 3 1 Tool Change Mode 0 When P318 0 8 the tool change mode is 0 which is applicable to the line up tool post 3 4 3 2 Tool Change Mode 9 P318 9 tool post type 9 tool change mode 9 Use M60 to execute the tool change In tool change mode 9 the system automatically calls M60 to execute the tool change when T command is executed T command execution process as follows 1 The system firstly modifies the tool number and the tool offset and counts the target tool nose coordinates 2 Modify macro variable r4005 target tool number and r4006 target tool offset number 3 Call M60 to execute the tool change programs 4 Wait M60 to be completed 5 Complete the tool change Program example The following is the program to compile the cu
327. olation traverse rapidly position in the proportion mode in GOO d1_ MPG axis selection 0 1 Keyboard axis selection keyboard axis selection is valid External axis selection the external MPG control knob is valid and the keyboard axis selection key is invalid In JOG working mode press MPG to switch MPG mode and the indicator lights and the system displays states of the external MPG control knob the axis selection knob and the movement knob The coordinates of the selected coordinate axis is displayed in highlight state dQ Feedrate selection 0 Keyboard enabled The keyboard feedrate button is enabled in the Manual Auto mode The system initialization is set to 0 1 External enabled The external feedrate is enabled in the Manual Auto mode Efficiency setting bit parameter P401 password level 3 E PET ice a d7 TMS command in DRY RUN working mode 0 Execution in DRY RUN working mode output and check the signal in executing the miscellaneous command which is the same in the normal machining Skip in DRY RUN working mode do not output and check the signal in executing the miscellaneous command d6_ feed command in DRY RUN 0 1 Constant speed in DRY RUN working mode the execution speed of feed command is set by the program which is the same in the normal machining Acceleration in DRY RUN working mode the execution speed of feed command is not controll
328. ompensation in the program In the batch machining suppose each machining 20 piece the tool 111 will fray one thread in the X direction regularly when the workpiece recorder is the integer double the program will make the tool compensation modification automatically N0010 GOO Z200 X100 N1000 r1 r4001 20 get the remainder of workpiece recorder dividing 20 N1010 if r1 0 then P1030 _ if the remainder is zero it will be the integer double of 20 N1020 M20 N1030 r6201 r6201 10 No 1 X tool offset reduce one thread N1040 M20 recycle Program Example 2 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the method of temporary press interference and call in the program Suppose the pin of UO31 and UO32 control a In the batch cycle machining when the handlers want to make the random sample to the workpiece press G key the loader collects a sample in automatically 104 N0010 GOO 2200 X100 z N0020 G00 Z180 X80 N0030 G01 2100 F200 cut outer circle N1000 if r4009 71 then H2000 lf G key is pressed in forestall then call program with H2000 as its head block number N1010 G01 X0 F200 cut off N1020 r2031 1 loader returns to original position N1030 r2032 1 N1040 M20 N2000 r2031 0 loader goes forward N2010 r2032 0 N2010 r4009 0 clear G state N2020 M99 Program example 3 In the following program it mainly demonstrates the function operation According to the elliptic parameter equation finger ou
329. on The assignment of 71 or 77 of the r4009 equals to the button input G or M same as the branch transformation 3 r4010 and r4011 cannot be assigned as negative which is meaningless if they are set to 0 Its Max assignment range is 0 9999999 that is 9999 999s and it can be regarded as read or conditional judgment For example r1 r4010 or if r4010 gt 1000 then P0020 4 Generally the r4005 r4008 is treated as tool change judgment For example it is used in 224 Chapter Seven Statement Programming the M60 self defined tool change programming Parameter P318 9 Variable number r4001 r4002 r4003 r4004 r4005 r4006 r4007 r4008 r4009 r4010 r4011 r4012 r4013 r4014 r4015 r4016 r4017 r4018 r4019 r4020 r4021 r4022 r4023 Use Workpiece counter the displayed workpiece on screen In the program execution the counter will add 1 in auto when it meet a M02 or M30 or M20 Time counter workpiece processing time unit ms Spindle rotate speed recorder the system checked current rotate speed unit r min Spindle program rotate speed recorder in execute the S command the system will input the variable for automatism program rotate speed at first Target tool position number recorder the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically in executing T command The target tool offset number recorder the system will input the tool offset number t
330. on Position Control System User Manual OFFSET OFFSET No Z X Y 01 0001 111 0001 111 0001 111 02 0002 222 0002 222 0002 222 03 0003 333 0003 333 0002 222 0000 000 0000 000 0000 000 Fig 4 7 OFFSET working mode 4 7 1 Tool Offset Value Search The tool offset value search e search the required tool offset value as follows Method 1 scan The operator can search the concrete content of each tool offset value in OFFSET working mode Press l Y to search the previous or the next tool offset value Press i 5 to search the offset value on the previous page or the next page and there are 7 lines in each page Method 2 search P offset number ENTER 4 7 2 Input Tool Offset Data by Keyboard Key X Z Y field range 8000 000 mm 8000 000mm Input tool offset data method by the keyboard absolute input and relative input as follows Absolute input of tool offset data 1 Select OFFSET working mode t 0 I le 2 Press i l to move the highlight to the required tool offset number or use the search method to find out the required tool offset number press to move the highlight to the required Z offset value X offset value Y offset value 3 Press INPUT or directly input the required data 4 Input the required data by keyboard Press to cancel the mistaken input and input the correct again 5 Press ENTER to confirm the input save the input data to the current selected too offset number parameter area
331. on examples of deceleration signal travel switch NPN proximity switch it is suggested that the user should use the travel switch the concrete connection example is as follows Machine zero return direction E Travel switch Dog installed on the machine slider A Pa va pr fo 24V GND to deceleration signal Fig 3 1 Deceleration signal to the travel switch Machine zero return direction Metal inductive block installed on the machine carriage Fig 3 2 Deceleration signal to NPN proximity switch 2 When the bit parameter P407_d7 P407_d6 P407_d5 P407_d4 P407_d3 P407_d2 is set to O the machine zero return is positive the deceleration signal LOW is valid The following is the connection example of the deceleration signal and zero signal the one turn signal of servo motor is taken as the zero signal when the system is connected with the servo motor 261 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 24VGND Machine side Deceleration signal DecX DecZ Dec Y CNC side Normally open contact Fig 3 3 Deceleration signal connection 24VGND Machine side or Servo Z ignal ero signa Disk motor PCX PCZ PCY CNC side Normally open One turn signal contact of servo motor Fig 3 4 Zero signal connection 3 4 Tool Exchange Control Function and Connection 3 4 1 Tool Exchange Control Signal Definition Relative interface signals of too change contr
332. on input signal and directly executes the next step M41 M44l input signals are defined by the interface parameters The system delays P312 frequency spindle gear shifting time 2 and outputs the spindle analog voltage according to the current gear based on P300 P303 corresponding to gear 1 4 and the gear shifting ends Speed control of frequency spindle When the machine uses the frequency spindle S controls the speed The spindle standard format consists of S 4 digit digital 2 digit means the spindle gear number There are 2 methods to 48 Chapter Four System Operation input the spindle speed input 1 S sets the fixed speed of the spindle r min when S is not changed the spindle speed is not changed which is called Constant speed control 2 S sets the tangent speed m min of the tool relative to the workpiece outer which is called constant surface speed control In the constant surface control the spindle speed changes as X tool nose coordinate value changing in cutting feed The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING Constant Surface Control G96 Constant Surface Speed Control Cancel G97 Command format G96 Set the constant surface speed cutting state G96 S___ _ set the constant surface speed cutting state and specify the surface value range 0 9999 m min G97 cancel the constant surface state G97 is modal G97 S _ cancel the constant surface state and specify the speed value range 0 9999 r min
333. oolant in pressing reset key 0 Close after the reset key is pressed the system closes M03 M04 M08 M32 output signal 1 Do not close after the reset key is pressed the system does not close M03 M04 M08 M32 output signal d1_M function alarm 0 Terminating program program terminates when M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx alarm 1 Prompt selection the system prompts whether the operator tries again when M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx functions alarm When the system meets P401_d3 0 substep execution for many commands in one block and P403_d1 1 prompt in M function alarm the trial again function is valid The system alarms and terminates the machining programs when the relative commands have not been completed The trail again commands include T chuck control M10 M11 and tailstock control M78 M79 When the system executes these commands it has not checked the corresponding valid input signals and has not completed the command operations in the limit time the system prompts whether the operator tries again The system is in pause state when it prompts the trial message at the moment the operator should check the relative input signal and execute the troubleshooting After the failure is resolved the operator presses R key execute again the command which is just now failure After the re execution is completed the system is in pause state and the operator presses CYCLE START to continuously the machine When the re execution
334. orking Mode ssssrrrrrrrrrrrereeeeeeeeennnnnnennnnn 78 4 5 12 Display of M Command Execution State in AUTO MANUAL Mode sseerrererrrerereeeeee 78 4 5 13 Operations in AUTO Mode vvrssss sssssssseesseessssessesssssensesensenensenensenansenanseneseesesensenensenansesanas 78 4 5 14 The External Feedrate Knob in Auto Manual Mode eeerersnacaccnnancnnnanancancnaananos 78 46 Parameter Working MO E a T E A E A A AA SAA 79 4 64 Parameteor Overvjeyy ne resrtcaredananasrnns carnada AICA AAA aeiia Eaki 80 46 11 Parameter Privilege A a EE E E E na hun teens E E nasinee seca ataene nd oan E E 80 46 1 2 Entering Operation LAV E E saute enetas torannaceaa ema unswearnniins co cae datnansenge shaun E tea tasonneweet 81 46 13 Parameter Management EA A A 81 46 2 Parameter ModificatiOnN cc ee 82 4621 Parameter S Carchi cin nd a A A A A A RD 46227 Parameter Modification ninas a cebu AA a 83 46 3 Parameter Function Key Prompt hp1 AS 83 46 3 1 Parameter Communication and Standard Format o oororrornonnannnnono nono nononononoconconcccnonncnncooo g4 4 6 3 2 Parameter Draw and Solidifying A 85 46 3 3 System Software Upgrade and Memory Update ON 86 46 3 4 Functional Command Privilege Sand tots na dab a rare stra DA seas lars E E A naan cian E g7 4 6 4 Parameter Explanation erererrererennnnnnnensnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenennnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenramasnnennos 87 4 6 4 1 Reference Point Software Limit Bit Parameter POOO PO020 sssssssssssssssssr
335. otation axis control Control servo spindle Flexible and convenient programming with statement programming function USB interface communication to get the convenient and fast operation Y SMS Ss SN S Least command unit 0 001mm command electronic gear ratio 1 9999999 1 9999999 Automatic gear shifting of all kinds of spindle Backlash compensation tool length compensation function Tapping function Course monitoring function Cutting metric inch straight thread variable pitch thread SN KN NS Ne ON Full screen part programs editing capable of storing 255 machining programs No 253 program up to 4MB Big screen color LCD color configuration is selected by the parameter MSTF state real time display in machining Multi level operation password for convenient device management Parameter backup function Parameter offset data communication function Bilateral communication between CNC and USB CNC is upgraded by USB SN NS Ae NS OR GGSK JJ 11133 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Chapter Two Technical Specifications CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 GSK96 Technical specifications Controlled axes X Y and Z The three axes are respectively set as the linear axis or rotation axis control simultaneous controlled axes interpolation axes 2 axis linear interpolation or 3 axes X Y and Z Interpolation X Z Z Y or X Y two axis linear interpolation X Z of any single axis
336. otion speed is determined by the spindle speed and the pitch the axis motion direction is determined by the pitch sign as follows When P is positive and the spindle turns CCW the coordinate axis moves negatively when the spindle turns CW the coordinate axis moves positively When P is negative and the spindle turns CCW the coordinate axis moves positively when the spindle turns CW the coordinate axis moves negatively Note 1 When the speed in tapping is too fast or there is the limit alarm the system automatically exits the tapping and alarms 2 The pitch P is expressed with the metric range 0 001mm 500 000mm the negative sign is added to the front of the range i e right hand or left hand tapping 3 Z X Y axis manual tapping speed is restricted by parameter P100 P101 P102 respectively 65 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 5 AUTO Working Mode In AUTO working mode the relative setting or input format and example descriptions are as follows the required input letter key or digit key are expressed with the underline the system prompts the message is expressed with the frame g In AUTO working mode the system displays at the top right Press it and the system pops up the operation key catalog in AUTO working mode press it and the window closes directly press other function keys and the window automatically closes e Press AUTO and the system enter AUT
337. otor is in working mode 4 4 1 8 Coordinate Axis Motion Alarm Prompt In executing the axis motion when the current motion axis meets the tool nose coordinate software limit points tool nose software limit point the axis cannot continuously move and moves reversely and the system displays the alarm prompt When the axis meets the machine coordinate software limit point it only moves reversely But the manual zero return function is not control by the software limit value range Notice The system can be prompted the limit alarm information when the motion axis reaches to the soft limit point in the JOG or Single step mode When Z X axis moves inputting command in the key field movement mode if the specified value exceeds its range the system prompts limit alarm information instead of executing Whether the mechanism and cutter soft limit alarm are enabled is set by parameter P404_d4 P404 d3 39 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 4 2 Creating Coordinate System 4 4 2 1 Creating Machine Coordinate System Machine Zero Return Machine Reference Point Return Machine zero Machine coordinate system fixed on the machine is the reference coordinate system for CNC counting the coordinate position After the system is installed the operator should firstly create the machine coordinate system The reference point of the machine coordinate system is called machine zero or machine reference point or ma
338. ough this system adopts standard operation panel the functions of the keys on the panel are defined by PLC program ladder diagram It should be noted that the keys functions described herein are for the standard PLC program ladder diagram For functions and effects of keys on control panel please refer to the user manual from machine tool builder This manual is subject to change without further notice Preface Suggestions for Safety The user must carefully read the suggestions for the system before installing and operating the system The user must follow the suggestions of the system to ensure that the person is not hurt and the equipments are not damaged The user must follow the related suggestions for safety described in the user manual and must not operate it until the manual is read completely The user must follow the suggestions of safety described in the user manual from the machine manufacture The user can operate the machine or compile the program to control the machine after completely reading the manual and the one from the machine manufacturer Graphic symbol Caution Operation against the instructions may cause the operator serious injuries Alarm Wrong operation may injure the operator and damage the system Warning Improper operation may result in damage to the machine as well its products Important information CGSR I Hist GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manua
339. parameter P344 Firstly solidify the 254 program to call the self defined command Secondly input the desired call self defined command in the parameter P344 and then call this command before the program machining is performed Call M50 M72 after machining _ Miscellaneous parameter P345 Firstly solidify the 254 program to call the self defined command Secondly input the desired call self defined command in the parameter P345 and then call this command after the program machining is performed Enter the Auto call M50 M72 Miscellaneous parameter P346 Firstly solidify the 254 program to call the self defined command Secondly input the desired call self defined command in the parameter P346 and then call this command when the system enters Auto working method Retreat from the Auto call M50 M72 _ Miscellaneous parameter P347 Firstly solidify the 254 program to call the self defined command Secondly input the desired call self defined command in the parameter P347 and then call this command when the system is retreated from the Auto working mode Call M50 M72 by manual 0 key _ Miscellaneous parameter P348 Firstly solidify the 254 program to call the self defined command Secondly input the desired call self defined command in the parameter P348 and then directly call this command by 0 key in the manual working interface 4 6 5 Appendix Parameter List 4 6 5 1 Reference Parameter List No value backup 3
340. parameter P4097 parameter Modify parameter P4097 d7 chuck Eo oe E341 When the spindle and chuck are Stop the spindle the operate the Spindle doesn t locki h other u h k stop no tail ocking each other don t operate the tailstoc i tailstock without stopped the spindle E342 Forbid function of The parameter set tailstock control Modify the parameter P409_d4 tail stock forbidden E343 The system cannot check the valid o ee l Check the chuck clamp selection signal M10 no respond chuck champing in position signal l l is in normal or not RM10 in controlling chuck champing E344 The system cannot check the valid E Check the chuck releasing selection M11 no respond chuck releasing selection signal oe l signal is in normal or not RM11 in controlling chuck releasing E345 the system cannot check the valid M78 no respond tailstock going forward in position Check the tailstock signal is in normal signal RM78 in controlling tailstock or not going forward E346 The system cannot check the valid M79 no respond tailstock going backward in position Check the tailstock going backward signal alarm 79 in controlling signal is in normal or not tailstock going backward The non frequency The system can t execute the spindle constant surface speed command G96 or gear shifting command M41 M44 in non frequency spindle E348 The program is not Program error execution is l Modify the program resolve error ready forbid
341. peration panel There is the corresponding intelligent prompt message for each operation At the same time the operator can press the prompt key hp1 at the top right to learn the operation key list in EDIT working mode The relative setting or operation key format and sample descriptions in the user manual are as follows meanings and uses of all required functions are described at the beginning of the corresponding chapter all required letter and digit keys are expressed with underlines the system prompt messages are expressed with borders In executing some setting or input or man machine dialogue press ESC key to exit the current ESC operation before key is not pressed Main functions in Edit mode include yw select create rename copy and delete part programs yw input insert modify and delete the content of the selected part program yx transmit part programs between U disc and the system by the USB interface yx compile and save program input variable and macro character string D Press EDIT to enter the EDIT working mode The EDIT working mode includes two main windows program catalog search window and program edit window The program catalog search window is as Fig 4 2 EDIT Current program No 920 Program length 1KB hp1 Name A Name size remark new Namel size remark new 000 1KB G00 XO 919022 KB G50 Middle wait 0 020 LKB G00 Openning U disc Please Pop up window Middle bottom Program count
342. perator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon 2 Z tool setting 1 Select the desired Z axis to be tool setting by ce 2 Start the spindle again traverse the tool to cut a end face of the workpiece 3 Z does not move the operator presses Sd and the system automatically memorizes the tool nose position and displays the tool setting icon 3 flashing and then Z moves out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating 4 Select one point as the reference point measure Z distance from the cut end face to the selected reference point 5 Press K and the system display Tool setting Z to input the measured data and press ENTER The system prompts Input the tool offset number XX it automatically presets one offset number and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is consistent with the input Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset number The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified offset number the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon Explanations 1 In tool setting icon flashing the operator can execute the spindle start stop the coordinate moving in tool change the system a
343. pindle shift or rotation speed GO8 G90_F function AAA M32 Lubrication ON Chuck clamping Tailstock forward M41 M42 M43 M44 Spindle changes the 1 2 3 4 shift M03 M04 Spindle open M08 Close the coolant Cutting commana Spindle close Lubrication OFF Turien o ICI EN IC EEN Example N1000 T11 MO3 M10 GOO X50 MO8 The execution sequence of sub step M10 M03 M08 T11 GOO All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the sum of single command execution time Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block 197 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual P401_d3 1 synchronism P401_d2 0 forbid rapidly jumping block to execution In the synchronous execution Refer to the table 5 1 If there is the cutting command in this block then the M S T commands before the cutting command will simultaneously performed after it is completed the cutting command is then performed and then simultaneously execute the following M S T commands If the GOO command in this block then the M S T command before the GOO command will simultaneously perform with the GOO command The next block can be performed until the overall commands are completed The commands which are not relative each other are almost executed simultaneously are not executed orderly The system automatically orderly executes M command which is interlock according to the parameters Example
344. played Only the alterable parameters are displayed according to the parameter password level dO_ modify machining programs in EDIT working mode 0 Permit program lock function is invalid permit modifying the machining program on the operation panel in EDIT working mode 1 Forbid program lock function is valid forbid modifying the machining program on the operation panel in EDIT working mode otherwise the system alarms Y axis reverse reset coordinates Reference coordinate parameter P027 Z axis reverse reset coordinates Reference coordinate parameter P028 X axis reverse reset coordinates Reference coordinate parameter P029 When Y axis is used for spindle or worktable reverse control the reversed coordinate should be set within the range of this parameter For example when Y axis performs 360 degree reverse rotation PO27 should be set to 360 000 when Y axis moves its tool nose coordinate and machine coordinate vary between 0 359 999 When P027 is zero this coordinate reset function is invalid the range of setting is O 9999 d value in G83 __ auxiliary parameter P335 This parameter determines the d value in G83 The initial value is 2mm refer to the G83 command of Section 4 21 in PROGRAMMING for details Program line number automatic interval __ auxiliary parameter P333 This parameter determines the increment between two adjacent block numbers automatically generated in EDIT working mode i e the difference between the tw
345. pleted and the system stops CYCLE STOP Press CYCLE START to continuously execute the program after the cycle is completed and the system pauses Pause 1 Press CYCLE PAUSE and the system pauses in executing the command After the system responds each motion axis decelerates to stop which is displayed on the bottom left 2 In pause state press CYCLE START and the system recovers the program to continuously execute the left press ESC the program exits and the system returns to the auto Initial state and the pointer points to the first block of the current program Special notice 1 After the pause the system can control the spindle the chuck and the tailstock before CYCLE START is pressed ensure the spindle is started the chuck and the tailstock have been ready otherwise which maybe damage the machine and hurt the persons 2 When the system follows the blocks for the spindle machining thread in executing G32 G33 G34 the press key is invalid 3 For details about the pause or single block stop function refer to Section 8 2 2 Explanation of Customized Command Storage in OPERATION Single block stop 72 Chapter Four System Operation 1 In continuously executing the program press SINGLE and the system is switched to the single block execution mode and when the current block is executed the system displays Single block stop 2 After the single block stops press CYCLE START and the program continuously runs
346. previous spindle is being rotated hold MO3 MO4 output signal and orientate along with the rotation direction 4 If M87 command is with H1 the command execution is completed otherwise the next step is executed 5 Delay for 10ms the orientation finish signal YI2 is detected 6 Command execution is completed Execution process of M87 Without parameter for M87 1 Detect the orientation finish signal Y12 2 Command executing is completed Executing process of M88 Exit the state if it is in M87 orientation mode 1 Cancel MO3 MO4 signal and delay for 6ms 2 Cancel the orientation enabling signal YO2 and delay for 6ms The above steps are skipped if it is in M87 orientation mode Explanations 1 After executing M87 the orientation enable signal YO2 and the spindle CW CCW signal MO3 MO4 still hold so CCW signal will be automatically switched off when M87 output CW rotation is executed continuously 2 In the orientation state no matter whether the current spindle is rotated or not the spindle CW CCW indicator lamp on the panel will be ON based on the output CW CCW signal 3 After executing M87 the spindle is orientation mode the spindle is forbidden to switch on Press emergency stop button the system exits the orientation mode and it does not after pressing the resetting key 4 During executing M87 the system will exit M87 orientation mode if the resetting or the emergency stop key is pressed 5 During comm
347. pu 2 EJE X pulse positive terminal Xpu Z pulse negative terminal Zpu ae ae X pulse negative terminal Xpu X Z drive power ground OV a X Z drive 24V Z drive unit alarm Zam ae na X drive unit alarmi Xalm 251 GGSK I 418 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 2 Interface Table II X 1 input output female A cee lt 4 Spindle analog voltage SVC N O Spindle analog voltageground AGND TES Chuck ciam pM 10 Cooling ONM 8 E Not be defined by standard2 U02 Cooling OFF M 9 D gt U Chuck release M 11 male pe is L W Not defined by standard 1 U01 pame AMS Signa y y Spindle gear output4 S04 S pindle CW M3 FO 300 I O 24V 24V pupa M 3 vy io Spindle gear output3 S03 e Sia AN Tailstock backward M 79 Pra Ma os Spindle gear output2 S02 pe 2 T ailstock forward M 78 Spindle stop M 5 Spindle gear outputt S01 is Sue Geode pe geet I O 24V 24V PaB ca 7 col 1 0 24V 24V CS XA SS I O 24V 24V I O 24V ground 24VGND El SE h I O 24 ground 24VGND Hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input point TPS ES a I O 24 ground 24VGND a bad oN Feed hold signal MXZ 1 o oe _ Chuck release in posi tion check RM 11 Hydraulic tailstock pedal switch input point SHL oF A F S pindle
348. put interface signal definition is defined by the parameter and changing the corresponding setting of the parameter can change the definition of output interface signal Example Setting P511 SAGT to 1 means SAGT covers input interface UlO1 and the system UIO1 pin 123 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual inputs safety door check function In the first line of the leftmost column of the diagnosis input page is displayed the SAGT diagnosis information Setting P506 M320 to 18 means M320 covers the output interface UO18 and system UO18 pin outputs lubrication control function In the second line of the third column from left of the diagnosis input page is displayed the M320 diagnosis information 4 8 5 Output Interface Operation Function Move the cursor by the direction key to the required writing output signal press 1 or O to change the output signal value where the cursor is when it is different with the current value it is displayed in red and it is the same with the current value it is displayed in yellow Note When the diagnosis output interface operation is used in the system debugging the parameter password level is more than 2 to perform the operations 4 8 6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Check The system can check and display the pulse per rev of the spindle encoder and the check result automatically displays the encoder lines The encoder lines mean the pulse per rev of
349. r System Operation P512 Dalm Feed device alarm check signal Functional description 1 When the system checks the signal in M20 it automatically stops and alarms 2 If the EOB is M02 and M30 commands instead of M20 and the then feed equipment alarm function is disabled 4 5 7 Modifying Offset in Program Run The system pops up the window to modify the offset value in machining and the operator must be careful 4 5 7 1 Modifying Offset Method in Program Run Modifying offset method 1 In automatic running press OFFSET and the system pop up the window to display the modifying offset press it again and the system closes the window 2 Press E y or to select the required modification tool offset number press and to select the required modification tool offset and the detailed operations are referred to OPERATION 4 7 OFFSET Working Mode 3 Press INPUT to input data Press ENTER to replaces the previous data Press ALTER to add on the previous data Press ESC to cancel the input data 4 Press OFFSET or press ESC to exit the offset display window after the input is completed Note 1 During data inputting you can switch to AUTO mode display page and when you switch back the original input data that have been stored by pressing key ENTER remain the same you can continue to input data 2 In offset display window pause modifying feedrate override operations are valid in AUTO working mode In pause the syst
350. r are not in the proper position and red indicator is flickering only when the emergency stop alarm is released and above execution is repeated or after system power on can the system resume the normal state 4 During emergency stop if the output signal of MDLY interface remains the same interface control signals other than MDLY spindle cooling lubricating are set by parameters If P403_d3 is 0 then only output signals for spindle cooling and lubricating are turned off if P403_d3 is 1 all interface control signals including chuck and tailstock signals are turned off 5 After the emergency stop alarm is cleared in AUTO mode the system will exit from dry run state if it was in MANUAL mode the system will turn from rapid traverse state to feed state if the set F value is not changed the spindle analog voltage output remains the same except for that other functions of the system are in initial state 6 After the emergency stop alarm is released time counting of the low pressure detection function and auto lubricating control function are restarted Special Attention 14 1 The standard emergency stop function is actually to set the output signals to ON or OFF It can be like this In MANUAL AUTO mode when emergency stop button is pressed the standard emergency stop is executed in addition M74 user defined command is also executed it is executed only when there is already a M74 command in the system This
351. r having found tool signal N2010 r4010 500 tool post CCW being locked after delaying 500ms N2020 if r4010 gt 0 then P2020 delaying wait N2030 r4010 1000 set the CCW locking time N2040 r2011 0 CCW locking N2050 if r4010 gt 0 then P2050 wait the CCW locking N2060 r2011 1 stop CCW M99 complete the tool change tool change failure N3000 r2012 1 Stop tool post rotation after alarm N3010 00S check tool selection signal overtime N3020 r5002 110001 set the window width to be one line N3020 r5002 130168 font color to be red N3030 r5002 1 N3040 r5002 1000 display alarm message N3050 M97 P3050 tool change failure wait to manually stop the machining program N3060 M99 In the above No 254 program is written to the system FLASH and the detailed operation is referred to Program 8 2 Customizing Commands and after the user sets the parameter related to the tool change mode 9 the system executes the T to realize the required tool change function in the manual tool change or the machining program refer to the Self defined Command Achieve Example in Section 8 2 3 of PROGRAMMING 264 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 5 X3 Motor Interface The system can be matched with the drive units of the reaction stepper motor the compound stepper motor or AC servo motor by the motor drive unit interface X3 Standard Standard signal name Signal direction signal name explanation XALM X drive unit
352. r not use large removable storage devices exceeds 8G on other USB interface otherwise it will cause damage to system hardware or removable storage devices 5 When the U disc operation is fail the user should press RESET and insert the U disc to operate it again 5 1 2 USB File Catalog Requirements In USB communication for transmitting the different data the system requires the USB file names are different and the user creates the file name in the U disc catalog as follows 129 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Wee el Part program Parameter data Offset data eee upgrade Name category File name in U disc root COO PRO CO01PAR CO0010FT CO01DATA catalog File name in folder CNCxxx TXT PARxxx TXT OFTxxx TXT DATAxxx TXT p ame category File name in U disc root File name in U disc root catalog File name in U disc root catalog C001MEMO COO1ERR COO1RAM File name in folder MEMOxxx TXT ERR xxx TXT RAMxxx TXT 130 Chapter One Programming Fundamental PROGRAMMING CHAPTER ONE PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL The automatic machining of CNC machine is the course of edited part programs automatically running The programming is defined that the drawing and the technology of machining workpiece are described with CNC language and are edited to the part programs Here describes the definition of command and the programming mode of CNC part programs Please read carefully these conte
353. r workpiece programming 6 5 Alarm Table in JOG OR AUTO Working Mode i e E300 E499 The Alarm type in JOG and AUTO is divided to Alarm in executing relative operation and The relative Alarm in executing statement two kinds 206 Chapter Six Alarm Message 6 5 1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations i e E300 E399 Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting No E302 Check Z axis drive unit resolve the Z driver unit alarm Z drive unit alarm failure to power on again E303 Check t X axis drive unit resolve the X driver unit alarm X drive unit alarm l 3 failure to power on again E304 Y driver unit alarm Y drive unit alarm NECK Y AXIS UVE WNI TESOVE ME failure to power on again E305 Positive hardware A PRU X or Z negatively moves in JOG working as X or Z positive limit switch is closed limit alarm mode till the alarm is released E306 Negative hardware X or Z negative limit switch is closed or Z X or Z negative limit switch is closed tiens closed XorZ Fe eal moves in JOG working limit alarm Fe eal till the alarm is released E307 Z machine coordinate Zm exceeds X or Z positively moves in JOG working Z machine ae se are limit wee the positive software limit alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to value P015 zero again release the alarm E308 X O coordinate Zm exceeds X negatively moves in JOG working machine the positive aid ea alarm mode or set the machine coordinate to eee limit
354. r3 5 r5002 49 r3 send the character 6 which has deflected 5 position with 1 to the display window r5002 2001 the display window displays alarm 001 Expression of character string In the block one of the below two expressions can be used to input the character string 1 Common expression Format serial number blank S display character string Example when the character string 00 want to display 1 9 please press the key to choose the need repeated working procedure the block content is as following N5000 00 S 1 9 please press the key to choose the needed repeated working procedure N5010 r5002 1000 display the set O character string r5010 2 ASCII code decimal expression Format serial number blank D character code blank character code blank character code Example when the 04 character string displays 1 9 GongXu the block content is as following 220 Chapter Seven Statement Programming N5000 04D 49 95 57 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58 N5010 r5002 1004 display the fourth character string Explanation 1 the serial number must be two digit figure the range is from 00 to 99 total 100 set character string and the lowered two digit command must correspond with the serial number then it can display the content of this character string 2 Behind the S blank the system treats the content as character string it can t add the note behind the character string 3 E
355. rameter sets control chuck Chuck control disabled prohibit call the M12 the prohibition Parameter sets control tailstock Tailstock control disabled prohibit call the M80 the prohibition GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Troubleshooting Modify P409 d7 to be effective or change the program command Modify P409 d7 to be effective or change the program command Modify P412_d1 to be effective or change the variable corresponding input chip pin or change the program command Modify P412_d1 to be effective or change the variable corresponding input chip pin or change the program command or modify parameter P318 9 Change the position parameter P404 d2 to be allowed or change the program to don t include motion command Modify P404_d4 1 or change the program command Modify P404_d4 1 or change the program command Modify P404_d2 1 or change the program command Modify program Modify P405_d1 1 or change the program command Modify P319 or change the program command Modify P410_d6 1 or change the program command Set the P532 to be effective or change the program command Modify P405_d0 1 or alter workpiece programming Modify P419_d2 1 or alter workpiece programming Modify P419_d1 or alter workpiece programming Modify P419_d3 1 or alter workpiece programming Modify P409_d7 0 enabled or alter workpiece programming Modify P409_d4 0 enabled or alte
356. rd the chuck execution state the read resolution range 0 3 Record the tailstock execution state the read resolution range 0 3 The storage position from the M86 data receiving Property Read write Read Read read Read write Read write Read Read Read write Read write Read write Read Read Read Read Read Read Read Read Read Read Read Read For the written variable the assignment is a command to modify the parameter in the same time the variable has kept its assignment and it can be read or condition judgment Example 225 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual if r4008 1 then P0060 If the current is No 1 tool offset it turns to POO60 if r4001 1000 then P1500 If the process number equals to 1000 it turns to P1500 if r4009 71 then P0050 If the current special transfer function key is G it turns P0050 to execute The application of the variable r4017 r4019 The variable r4017 r4019 are separately recorded the GO6 current state of the Z X Y axis This variable can be used for the Read Conditional judgment or Monitoring description For example r4017 records the current state of Z axis r4017 1 Z axis G6 is moving 2 Z axis G6 stops after reaching the programming position and the position confirms 3 Z axis G6 stops after inspecting the signal and the position does not confirm 4 Z axis G6 abnormally stops for examp
357. rdinate system with three axes 4 9 G51 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System Setting Command format G51 Explanation G51 must be specified in an independent block lt cannot be in the same block with other commands Recover the workpiece coordinate system and reference point set in Jog operation mode When the workpiece coordinate and the program reference point set in Jog operation mode are replaced after G50 is executed use G51 to recover them After recovering the system uses the previous workpiece coordinate system and program reference point in Jog and Auto operation modes till they are replaced 4 10 G26 X Z Y Reference Point Return Return to the program reference point through the intermediate point at rapid traverse rate by GOO Command format G26 Z W X U Y V Z X Y axis rapidly traverse to the return reference position by the middle point simultaneously G26 Z W _ Z rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point and other axes do not move G26 Y V _ Y rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point and other axes do not move Field and range X Z Y Absolute coordinates of middle point U W V Relative movement from the starting point to middle point X Z U W Y V 9999 999mm 9999 999mm Explanation 1 After the command is executed all specified coordinate axes move to the point defined by G50 They move the program reference point defined in the
358. rdinates of machines LA Have None Use the deceleration signal to return to machine zero O None Have Use zero signal to return machine zero Return to zero coordinates set by the parameter no None None z machine zero Without zero zero return key is 0 Disabled When the system has no machine zero it is invalid to press Machine Zero Return key on the panel but program G28 zero return is still valid 1 Enabled When the system has no machine zero it is valid to press Machine Zero Return key on the panel The system returns to the machine zero according to the 4th zero return mode When there is neither a machine zero switch and block nor a deceleration switch and block installed on the machine the system returns to the machine zero i e returning to the zero coordinates set by parameters when there is no machine zero according to the 4th zero return mode Zero setting 21 _ bit parameter P407 password class 1 A AA O ii A d7 _Zzero return direction d6__Xzero return direction 89 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual d5__ Y zero return direction 0 Positive when the deceleration switch is installed on the positive end of the coordinate axis it is set to 0 and the system positively moves the check zero 1 Negative when the deceleration switch is installed on the negative end of the coordinate axis it is set to 1 and the system negatively moves the chec
359. rdware limit alarm 0 Check the hardware limit alarm function is valid 1 Shield the hardware limit alarm function is invalid d5_ drive unit alarm 0 Check the drive unit alarm function is valid 1 Shield the drive unit alarm function is invalid d4 mechanical software limit alarm 0 Valid the mechanical software limit alarm function is valid 1 Invalid the mechanical software limit alarm function is invalid d3__ tool nose software limit alarm 0 Valid the tool nose software limit alarm function is valid 1 Invalid the tool nose software limit alarm function is invalid d2 254 program limit 0 Forbidding motion command M50 M 74 blocks forbid all G command except for 105 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual G04 1 Permitting 1 M50 M 74 are the user customized commands The block permits G commands according to the program format to compile programs d1_ hardware limit alarm level 0 LOW the hardware limit alarm LOW is valid 1 HIGH the hardware limit alarm HIGH is valid dO0__254 program solidifying limit 0 Forbidding forbid modifying and solidifying No 254 program i e forbid modifying the customized command 1 Permitting permit modifying and solidifying No 254 program i e permit modifying the customized command Whether the system permits modifying the solidified program and then solidifies is determined by the machine manufacturer 4 6
360. re it is better to put any number within the data range The execution procedure of M86 command Send information based upon the ModBus communication agreement if the communication is failed send it again The following prompt information may be generated during the execution of the command 1 Abnormal connection An abnormal response occurs after sending a signal it may be either the error of the equipment number or address or the abnormal response from other interference 2 Fail to connection without response Without response signal after sending signal it may be the circuit malfunction or the incorrection of the baud rate 3 Retrying connection The system is retrying to send Note 96 system does not lead out RS232 interface it is necessary to use a special tool leading it This operation should be performed by the qualified personnel Example The following control program is compiled based upon a V amp T frequency converter controlling by GSK928TEa and refer to this program when there are multi frequency converter the alteration equipment number is corresponding to the system 254 NOOOO M51 N0010 M86 P1 J32768 Q10 H1 Read the data of the No 1 equipment 32768 address to the r4023 Q is disabled during reading data N0020 r20 r4023 Save the read address content N0030 r200 2000 The top speed S2000 of the motor N0040 r201 100 The corresponding frequency 100HZ of the top speed
361. reference point coordinates the coordinates change and the actual tool nose does not 5 Press DELETE to start the drive unit So the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are corrected simultaneously 4 4 2 4 Setting Program Reference Point In the machine coordinate system the operator should confirm one position where the tool change can be executed safely when the tool post stops here and where the workpiece is installed conveniently The program reference point can be set when the tool post stops at the position which is called the program reference point Program zero The program reference point coordinates are relative to the machine coordinate system Format Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING press 0 and the system displays Setting program reference point at the moment press ENTER the system confirms Z X Y to be the program reference point When the operator sets again the workpiece coordinates after setting the program reference point the previous reference point coordinates do not change in the new workpiece coordinate system at the moment the operator should set again the program reference point The initial value of the program reference point is X 150 Z 200 After the operator sets the program reference point the program reference point return 43 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual command G26 and the program zero return operation by the sys
362. rface variable state when the system output 0 the external forms the conductive loop when the system output 1 the system is in high resistance and the external cannot form the conductive loop 76 Chapter Four System Operation r1001 r1032 are the input interface states r2001 r2032 are the output interface states 8 groups to display the first line displays the first group r1008 r1007 r1006 r1005 r1004 r1003 r1002 r1001 and others is in order reason by analogy 3 Others search the executed block quantity the spindle wave range in the thread machining program nested call layers and program cycle in executing subprogram 4 Before the system does not start the machining program macro variabler100 r199 can be modified manually the modification method is to select the required modification macro variable the operator presses ENTER to input the value to change presses ENTER again and the modification is completed 4 5 9 Program Reference Point Return in AUTO Working Mode The function is valid in initial state of AUTO working mode After the system sets the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point it starts the machining program when the machine slider stops any position At the moment the first movement command of the machining program must be in GOO must execute X Z absolute coordinate positioning In the condition press program zero return or G command and the system can return the se
363. rogram Reference Point In machine coordinate system the operator should set a position where the tool post stops the tool changed is executed safely and installing workpiece is convenient Program reference point is set when the tool post stops at the position which is called program reference point or program zero Program reference point coordinate is relative to machine coordinate system Once the reference point is defined the tool can return to the reference point by executing the reference point return function in JOG working mode or AUTO working mode Even if the system is switched off the reference point still exists If the stepper motor is employed there is slight error caused by the motor vibrating after the system is switched on again Execute the reference point return again to avoid the error The program reference point is automatically set to X 200 Z 200 without setting the program reference point after the system is switched on for the first time 1 4 Machine 2nd 3rd Program Reference Point In the machine coordinate system the operator can also set the 2nd 3rd program reference point Their functions are similar to the program reference point and the system has corresponding commands to move the worktable to the 2nd 3rd program reference point 1 5 Workpiece Coordinate System The workpiece coordinate system is defined that some point on the workpiece is considered as the coordinate origin to create the coordinate s
364. rom M11 pin the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter and the chuck clamping operation ends without 58 Chapter Four System Operation needing the respond check signal when needing the respond signal the system waits the chuck releasing in position after it has checked the chuck releasing in position signal interface pin RM11 is at low level and RM10 is at high level in the set time P329 M responds check time specifying otherwise the system prompts Alarm for chuck releasing respond check overtime In inner chuck mode after M10 is executed the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from M11 pin after M11 is executed the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from M10 pin which is opposite to the output pin in the outer chuck mode and others are the same Besides using commands the external foot switch also can control the hydraulic chuck The system switches the chuck clamping releasing by M10 M11 when the foot switch is stepped once Chuck foot switch releases before the system is switched from other working mode to JOG or AUTO working mode otherwise the system alarms Time sequence of hydraulic chuck control signal output 1 M10 M11 output time sequence in pulse control mode Executing M10 Executing M11 Executing M10 Input signal O i E t1 t1 M10 pin i l M11 pin tl t1 M10 M11 signal output hold time is set by P327 in pulse con
365. room P254 mainly includes the M50 M74 command which is formed by statement and block the system will make the special translate and edit in translating and edition 8 2 1 Format and Debugging of Customization Command Storeroom Format P254 program format N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N1000 N1100 N2000 N2100 N3000 N3100 M98 P1000 M98 P2000 M98 P3000 M02 M50 M99 M51 M99 M52 M99 gt No 254 program starts execution Call M51 command Call M52 command the start of M60 the end of M50 the start of M51 the user customized M51 content the end of M51 the start of M52 the user customized M52 content the end of M52 The debugging steps of customization command storeroom is as following 1 Edit the user need customization command according to the above customization command storeroom program format 2 Debug the program by single block mode in AUTO working mode 3 After debugged the program harden the program in EDIT mode press the key hp1 5 the machine manufacturer confirm if it s allowed to modify the hardened program and harden again it also is to set the position parameter P404_d0 1 4 The system prompts that after the P254 translating and harden succeed press ESC key 242 Chapter Eight Customization Command Programming Explanation After the No 254 translating and harden succeed it also can input the customization command in P254 in JOG working mode a
366. s T13 after T33 is executed the system recovers to the previous after it exits from the DRY RUN working mode 4 In DRY RUN working state all macro command and M50 M74 are normally executed after w the system modifies the offset and the system exits from the DRY RUN working mode the tool nose coordinates of corresponding tool offset number are changed 68 Chapter Four System Operation 5 The workpiece counter does not automatically add 1 in DRY RUN working mode 4 5 2 3 Running a part Program from the First Block After entering AUTO working mode the system enters the initial state and the program pointer points to the first block of the current program and CYCLE START key is pressed to start the program to automatically run The being executed block displays and flashes in poor color the first line is the executed block and the 3 line is to be executed when the machining program is the conditional command the skip or call target is not well defined and the 3 line may not be displayed 4 5 2 4 Running a Part Program From a Specified Block In some special conditions it is necessary to start to run from some block in a part program This system allows starting any one block of current part program It is valid in initial state Steps to select a block 1 Press INPUT and the system pops up the program browse window displays the current program and the pointer points to the first block of program 2 Pressing
367. s itself and executes the initialization e The system loads and checks parameters eo O interface initialization The system loads and checks the operator programs Note 1 Must not press any keys on the system panel when the system is turned on Press RESET key when the system enters the press key test window at the moment CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 1 2 Power Off The system is turned off as follows 1 The power switch of the CNC is turned off 2 The power switch of the machine is turned off Check before the system is turned off 1 X Z Y are in the stop state 2 Miscellaneous function spindle cooling OFF 3 Turn off the power supply Note 1 The system should be checked itself and initialized when it is turned on at first it is completed by the machine manufacturer and the operator cannot execute the operation otherwise the parameter set by the machine manufacture will lose 2 Operations related to turn off the machine power supply are referred to the operator manual machine manufacturer 4 1 3 System Program Initial and Modal 4 1 3 1 The Initial State and Modal of the System The initial mode of the system is defined to be a special initial state of all functions set by itself when the system is turned on all auxiliary functions do not execute the actual output The modal of the system is defined to be their kept states after the system executes all funct
368. s the same to the execution of G00 in AUTO mode When P400_d3 0 the movement is performed separately The resultant speed displayed on the screen is larger than the maximum rapid traverse speed of each axis When P400 d3 1 the movement is in interpolation mode and these two axes move simultaneously at a proportional speed and stop at the same time The movement parameters and slope of the distance will be taken into consideration so as to ensure that there is no stall during the movement Different slopes may correspond to different rapid traverse speed 9 When the feedrate override is 0 and the system is in low speed feeding mode or F field exists movement is forbidden Press ENTER a prompt ffeedrate override is O will be displayed till the override is adjusted to other value 10 The input of F field is specified by G98 command G99 command cannot be input in the a system Call field execution The system automatically saves the last 8 times executed command record in inputting field moving E Press and the system pops up the window list record the operator can input according to the digit serial number to modify or directly execute the operation 4 4 1 7 Drive Unit Enabling Control Set P416_d4 to 1 continuously press DELETE twice in the overall Manual and AUTO modes and the drive unit is closed and the motor is in free state Press DELETE in the drive unit closing state and the drive unit is started and the m
369. se the key and then execute the next block then P1000 Ifthe character 1 is input executes P1000 then P2000 lf the character 2 is input executes P1000 then P3000 _ lf the character 3 is input executes P1000 then P600 If the character 0 is input executes P1000 ending N0510 if r5001 49 N0520 if r5001 50 N0530 if r5001 51 NO540 if r5001 48 N0550 M97 P500 N0600 M02 N1000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 1 N1020 G01 Z50 X10 F2000 N1030 G00 Z100 X100 i N N a 221 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual N1040 M97 P200 N2000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 2 N2020 G01 2120 X50 F2000 N2030 GOO Z100 X100 N2040 M97 P200 N3000 r5002 r5001 display the keyboard input character 3 N3010 G01 Z160 X90 F2000 N3020 G00 Z100 X100 N3040 M97 P200 N4000 the note can t be added behind the character string N4000 the character string can be written finally it won t impact the execution speed N5000 04 D 49 95 51 32 71 111 110 103 88 117 58 N5010 05 SINPUT N5030 06 S total three working procedure 7 1 2 6 Display Value Register r5003 Display value register r5003 in the description of process monitor statement this variable is forbidden to use Explanation The r5003 assignment is a command to display this value it can be seen when the display window is open the data is uncertainty whe
370. seseseseseens 87 4 6 4 2 Parameters Related to Zero Return Function __P021 P026 P109 P111 P123 P125 P406 P40V coocccccccoccccnnnonnnoconononanocononnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnonnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnss 88 4 6 4 3 Traverse Speed Acceleration Time Parameter P100 P108 P112 P119 90 4 6 4 4 Parameters Related to Transmission and Compensation _ P200 P209 P411 92 4 6 4 5 Parameters Related to Spindle Cooling P300 P317 P326 P329 P341 P350 P351 P410 ReRRe Ot RRRERR OO OSSRERE SO OOSEEOOOOOSSOCOOOOSSSOOOOOOOOOOOOSOOOOSOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOSOOOOOOOSSSOOOOOOCOOOOOOOOOOCOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOSEOOOOOOOOSS 93 4 6 4 6 Parameters Related to Tool Post _P318 P319 eccccconcncncnnnononononononononononononononononanonnnos 97 4 6 4 7 Parameters Related to Chuck and Tailstock _ P327 P328 P409 cocoooomococononananannnnn nos 97 4 6 4 8 Run and Efficiency Bit Parameter __ P400 P401 P420 cococcccccccccccccncnacccncanacanannnncncononos 98 4 6 4 9 Relationship Between Path and Run Efficiency Parameter ooocccccrccccccccnanananacononananono 101 4 6 4 10 Safety and Debugging Bit Parameter__ P402 P404 P419 coccccccccncccccnonacacanononananonos 101 46 411 Motor Drive Bit Parameter Es PAD sr aan 106 4 6 4 12 Parameters Related to Other Interfaces _P412 P33D P3BB cocooroncccncnanananannnna noo 107 4 6 4 13 Auxiliary parameter __ P413 P418 P333 P335 PO27 P0O29 coorooocoomorcanorancnnnnrnass 108 46 414
371. splay window then view the I O signal function state by the Up Down page key 3 2 M81 M82 M83 M84 User input output condition control M81 M82 M83and M84 are a group of condition control commands based on input output signal state Representations of signal point level and holding time are for example 18 1 Q17 0 R18 0 D5 etc 1 Letters Q R represents input signal output signal and output signal state respectively two states when 0 is output conducted circuit is formed externally when 1 is output it means high impedance state conducted circuit cannot be formed externally D represents signal holding time 2 The integral part after letters represents signal points corresponding input signal Ulxx or output signal UOxx pin the range is 1 32 point 3 0 behind the decimal point represents low level 0 can be omitted as it is default value 1 represents high level 4 D signal holding time unit s range 0 9999 999 when D is omitted output signal remains the same 5 Relevant parameter bit parameter P412_d0 M81 M82 M83and Mg84are affected by this parameter 153 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 2 1 M82 Output Control and Detection Code format Example M82 Q17 0 UO17 pin outputs low level conducted M82 Q17 1 UO17 pin output high level high impedance M82 Q17 0 D3 UO17 pin outputs low level and output cancelled after delay time D M82 Q17 0 18
372. sponding numbers are consistent with its corresponding M commands For example modify P348 to 51 then the M51 can be called by the O key in the manual interface Notice 1 If only the parameter is set instead of solidifying the corresponding self defined command in the No 254 programming then skip it 2 Due to the additional Call is added and the machining efficiency may be affected after this function is used 248 Chapter One Interface CONNECTION CHAPTER ONE INTERFACE 1 1 Rear Cover Interface Position Layout gt lt 0000000 ooO0o0 0000 er S Po TOOL POSE O INPUT OUTPUT Fig 1 1 rear cover interface layout Explanation e X1 Input output 44 pin D type female socket CNC receives machine signal CNC signal outputs to machine interface e X2 Tool pose 15 pin D type male socket input output interface e X3 Motor 5 pin D type female socket interface of X Z drive unit e X4 Spindle 26 pin D type female socket spindle coder spindle inverter and Y drive unit interface e X5 MPG 9 pin D type female socket connect with MPG e X6 Input power supply green 4 pin female socket the power supply box has been connected to the system X6 interface the user only connects with 220V power supply e Power supply box Adopt GSK PB or GSK PC2 their connecting terminals are different GSK PB is adopted in Fig 1 1 It supplies GND 5V 24V power 249 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi fun
373. ss 53 445 Manual Tool Change Comtrol cr 54 446 Manual Tool Setting Operation AAA 55 4 4 7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function erererrerenenenennnnnnannnnanonnnnenenenenenenensnsnrnrnrnnnnannnnonss 58 448 Hydraulic Tailstock Control FUN CtON cerro 60 4 4 9 Other Option Functions oes etereeeeeeetetteeeetenanseneneeenenansenenteneneenansnneneateneansenennenennananens 62 4491 Thre GColor indicator Controlar aria iO 62 4492 Lubricating CONTO inner AAA AAA AAA 62 4493 Machine Electricity Delay Poweron CONTO essa di 63 4494 External MPG Operation A o e o A a aelne nea aaa quieas 63 4495 Safety Door Check FUNCION monica natal 64 4 4 9 6 Pressure Low Alarm Check FUNCION emitan ares 64 4 4 10 Searching Run Message in JOG Working Mode ereeercercnencnnnnnnenannonenenannnnnnenanennnnos 64 4 4 11 Appendix rr RR nrnnnnnnnes 64 4411 1 MDI Input Controlling M Command Table MD hciec certo ccsenstncccssctirauseasesttataassvsomassanantedteaasen 64 4 4 12 Spindle Turn Function nn 65 45 AUTO Working nn gg o er ee eee 66 4 5 1 System Working Mode in AUTO Working Mode ererrncesccnnnnnnonnanancnnenensnanancnneneneness 67 45 2 Function Key Operation inAUTO Working MOG rt tcsstrsseeeeseccceeeeeesennneeeeeeeeeenesannnnnanaeeeens 67 4 5 2 1 SINGLE Execution and CONTINUOUS Execution Switch reeset teeter tere teens 67 4522 Dry Run and Machining pee Ri ee ada 68 4523 Running a part Program rom the Firei BOCK ernir ec er eee 69 452 4 Running
374. stock control pulse time ms 1 __ auxiliary parameter P328 When the tailstock is the pulse control mode the parameter defines the durable time of tailstock execution command M78 M79 outputting pulse signal Unit ms Chuck tailstock __ bit parameter bit parameter P409 password level password level 1 pee ae A A AN E E E 0 Valid the system has the hydraulic chuck control function 1 Invalid the chuck control function is invalid forbids M10 M11 d6_ chuck clamping mode 0 Outer the hydraulic chuck is outer mode 1 Inner the hydraulic chuck is inner mode Executing M10 M11 is referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode d5__ chuck respond check 97 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 0 Do not check 1 Check when the system needs the respond check input interface RM10 and RM11 are separately taken the clamping and releasing in position signal input d4 tailstock control function 0 Valid the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function 1 Invalid the system forbids M78 M79 without the hydraulic tailstock control function d3_ chuck control output 0 Level control M10 M11 output in level mode 1 Pulse the hold time of M10 M11 in pulse control mode is determined by P327 d2 tailstock control output 0 Level control M78 M79 output in level mode 1 Pulse the hold time of M78 M79 in pulse control mode is determined by P328 d1__ hydraulic chuck foot s
375. stomization Command Programming if r1002 0 then P340 else P230 The current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Set the tool change time 30 seconds if r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P270 Judge the tool change time is too long or not if r1002 0 then P280 else P260 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 Close the tool post CW rotation r4011 50 Set to delay 50ms time if r4011 lt 2 then P290 else P284 Delay 50ms r2011 0 Tool post CCW rotation r4011 r40 Set the tool post CCW rotation time if r4011 lt 5 then P320 else P310 Check the tool post CCW rotation time r2011 0 Close the tool post CCW rotation r4010 100 Tool post CCW rotation in position delayed time if r4010 lt 5 then P330 else P324 Tool post CCW in position delayed time if r1002 0 then P340 else P700 Judge the in position signal M99 Change tool end M63 Start to call M63 start the tool changing T33 Target tool number if r1003 0 then P490 else P380 The current tool is consistent to target tool or not r2011 1 Close the tool post CCW rotation r2012 0 Tool post CW rotation r4010 r39 Set the tool changing time to 30s if r4010 lt 5 then P650 else P420 Judge the tool change time is too long or not if r1003 0 then P430 else P410 Judge the tool position signal r2012 1 Close the CW rotation r4011 50
376. stomized command to realize the tool change mode 9 operation applied to the general electromotive turret tool post The tool signal circuit quantity separately corresponds the tool quantity defined by P319 each signal line corresponds to one tool number and the valid level of the tool signal is LOW level Other tool signals are invalid when a tool signal is valid Example P319 4 the tool signals are as follows Note 1 in the table stands for HIGH O for LOW 254 M98 P1000 4tools setting tool signal 14 T3 T2 T1 separately in r1004 r1001 M02 263 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual N1000 M60 N1010 r1 14 1 tool signal 1110 N1020 r2 13 2 tool signal 1101 N1030 r3 11 3 tool signal 1011 N1040 r4 7 4 tool signal 0111 N1050 if r4005 1 then r5 r1 target tool number saved tor5 N1060 if r4005 2 then r5 r2 N1070 if r4005 3 then r5 r3 N1080 if r4005 4 then r5 r4 look for target tool number N1090 r2012 0 tool post CW searching for target tool position N1100 r4010 10000 set max time CW to be 10m N1110 r6 r1000 read 32 input signal to r6 N1120 r7 r6 and 15 read tool signal r1004 r1001 to r7 N1130 if r7 r5 then P2000 searching for tool number N1140 if r4010 Ojthen P3000 alarm for CW overtime N1150 M97 P1110 continuously check tool signal tool post lock N2000 r2012 1 stop tool post rotating afte
377. surface speed and X coordinates value is more than the max spindle speed set by G50 S_ After the system is switched on max spindle speed limit value is P305 max spindle speed of constant surface speed Max spindle speed limit value defined by G50 S_ is reserved before it is defined again and its function is valid in G96 Max spindle speed defined by G50 S_ is invalid in G97 but its limit value is reserved Relative parameters Main parameters related to G96 G97 P410_d6 P304 P305 P410_d6 setting determines whether the system executes the constant surface speed control in G96 Min and Max speed limit P304 P305 of constant surface speed control Note 1 The system issues E272 S value cannot be 0 in G50when G50 SO is programmed 2 The constant surface speed function can actually control the spindle speed only when the variable frequency spindle is used i e bit parameter P410_d6 1 If the gear shift spindle is used the constant surface control cannot be performed even if G96 command is specified 3 The constant surface speed control can be performed anytime when executing G00 G01 the constant thread speed control is invalid during thread cutting when executing G32 G33 G34 when X coordinate is changed in G50 or executing the tool offset the spindle speed adjustment is valid in the next command 4 Min max speed of constant surface speed control is set by P304 P305respectively 5 The rotary axis in the constant
378. surface speed must be set in Z axis X 0 of the workpiece coordinate 181 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 6 G96 is modal command When G96 is valid the single S command is taken as the new surface speed data 7 In DRY RUN mode the constant surface speed control is valid Whether the single S command is executed in Dry run is controlled by P401_d7 P401_d7 0 T M S command is executed in DRY RUN P401_d7 1 T M S command is not executed 8 The constant surface speed control is invalid to get the constant spindle speed in thread cutting 9 In G96 when the system defaults S word the system automatically counts the surface speed as S value according to the current spindle speed the last speed is taken as the current speed when the spindle does not start or the spindle initial speed is taken as the current speed when the system is switched on just now and X absolute coordinate value of tool nose 10 In G97 when the system defaults S word the system automatically counts the speed as S value according to the current constant surface linear speed and X absolute value of tool nose 11 In AUTO operation mode if the initial state of the program execution is G96 the system automatically changes G96 into G97 after CYCLE START key is pressed The constant surface cutting is valid in machining the arc and straight line in the course of machining 12 In the Manual working method G96 is enabled when
379. sword level 2 Resor Revere Renewed torn enel Removed aT Reaver __ backlash compensation mode 0 Low speed 1 ZIXIY executes the backlash at the low speed the low speed value is P103 P104 P105 1 Fast 1 ZIXIY executes the backlash at the fast the fast value is P100 P101 P102 4 6 4 5 Parameters Related to Spindle Cooling __ P300 P317 P326 P329 P341 P350 P351 P410 Spindle configuration __bit parameter P410 password level 1 a e 88 ea as az n prevea d7 spindle controlling output 0 Level the system level output controls the spindle M03 M04 M05 cooling MO8 MO9 1 Pulse the system pulse output controls the spindle MO3 M04 MO5 cooling MO8 MO9 P326 is the pulse width d6__spindle S control 0 Gear shifting the spindle is the gear shifting spindle and the system uses S to execute the gear shifting forbid M41 M44 1 Frequency the spindle is the frequency S is the spindle speed M41 M44 gear Il For details see Section 4 4 3 2 Spindle S Command Gear Shifting Control and Section 4 4 3 3 Spindle S command Speed Control d5__S gear shifting output 0 Direct the control signal of spindle gear is to directly output SO1 S04 forbid SO5 S 15 93 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 Encoder the control signal of spindle gear is the encode output SO0 S15 the parameter and P310 spindle gear control covered lines
380. t P318 to 0 and there is no tool change signal output in selecting the line up tool post 3 When the tool change is failure or is interrupted in the tool change reset emergency stop the system confirms the tool is in the unconfirmed position and prompts the tool number flashing in red at the moment the operator cannot start the machining program the system can recover the normal state when it executes one successful tool change operation and it is turned on again 4 For the tool change mode of M60 self defined command refer to Section 3 4 Tool Change 54 Chapter Four System Operation Control Function and Connection in this manual 4 4 6 Manual Tool Setting Operation Machining one workpiece needs several different tools Because of the tool installation and tool shape deviation its tool nose position is not complete consistent and has some offset when each tool rotates to the cutting position Tool setting is called that the system automatically memorizes the Offset to the specified tool Offset number After the tool setting the operator is only based on the part drawing and machining technology to compile the workpiece program without considering the tool deviation and only specifies the corresponding Offset number in the tool change in machining program The offset table can record 64 groups of tool offset each tool offset number corresponds to one group from 1 64 Each group separately records Z offset X offset Y offset
381. t first set up the pointer variable and let it point to a certain specified common variable then make the read written operation to it or use for judgment otherwise alarm 2 In setting up the pointer variable the value range of is from 1 to 199 It is to say it can point r1 to r199 when it s exceeded it will alarm 3 The statement about setting up or changing the pointer variable only can be written in a separate section otherwise alarm the expression in the right side of pointing symbol can be the addition and subtraction operation between two of them 4 The pointer variable only can be used in the numerical value operation can t be quoted by the data field like G etc command such as Ur9000 alarm 5 In the statement of assignment conditional judge to evaluate the pointer variable expresses to evaluate the common variable which is pointed by it however reading the pointer variable expressed to read the value of the common variable which is pointed by it The use of pointer variable Program demonstration In the following program Z X axis will store the coordinate of the position to the common variable in moving each position it totally has stored 10 set coordinate then take out them one by one and go back to the initial position by the original path The following is come true by the pointer variable NO000 G00 2200 X200 N0010 r9000 gt 1 expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001 216 Chapter S
382. t program 29 CGGSRK I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 Press and the cursor positions to the last page of the current program 3 Press F input the character which is needed to search of the current program press ENTER the cursor positions the character o 4 Press to search the character of current program according to the system prompt The system prompts Searching is completed and there is no character string when there is the character which is needed to search of the current program 4 3 5 6 MPG Controlling Cursor Moving After the system is connected with MPG the operator presses MPG rotates MPG to control the cursor movement when the MPG key LED is light on the operation panel Press MPG repeatedly MPG operation is invalid when MPG key LED is OFF The concrete MPG connection is referred to CONNECTION 4 3 6 Part Program Compiling The system provides hp2 compiling command key to compile part programs check the syntax error logic error of programs and coordinate data overtravel according to part program execution path to reduce the alarm error in Auto mode and improve the safety of executing part programs Press compiling command key and the system orderly checks and compiles part programs from the first line block and creates convenient target command according to the execution path When the system finds out the mistaken operator programs it stops the compiling displaying the mistaken
383. t program reference point After G command is executed the machining is continuously executed the system must use GOO two axis absolute coordinate to position simultaneously to get the correct machining After the system returns to the program zero by manual press key it automatically points to the first block of the program At the moment press CYCLE START and the system starts running the fist block 4 5 10 System Reset and ESP Signal Processing in AUTO Working Mode In Auto operation mode the system enters the Reset state by pressing Reset key See Section 4 1 4 7 Reset Operation in Part Operation For details about the emergency stop signal in Auto operation see Section 4 1 4 3 Emergency Stop Alarm in Part I Operation Note 1 Before releasing the emergency stop alarm first confirm the fault has been removed 2 Pressing down the emergency stop button before Power On and Power Off can reduce the surging to the equipment 3 Re perform machine zero return after releasing the emergency stop alarm to ensure the coordinate position is correct if the machine is not equipped with the machine zero it is forbidden to perform machine zero return 4 The external emergency stop is valid only when bit parameter P404_d7 is set to 0 T CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 4 5 11 Regulating LCD Brightness in AUTO JOG Working Mode The function is valid in the initial state in AUTO working mode
384. t r7000 r7009 are the description to monitor O 9 according to the program execution path the latest description is effective 2 The operator of assignment description statement only can be one of or and otherwise alarm 3 the conditional judge statement is allowed to make the assignment description such as if r5004 3 then r7000 r1001 r1002 it is the legal statement 4 system rule if the r7000 r7009 appears in the left conditional expression of if conditional statement it is to say that s the conditional description to O 9 monitor The call can t be used in then else only assignment or transfer 5 The descriptions both assignment and if condition should be generated in pair if there is no 231 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual assignment description or evaluate a non monitoring variable then r7000 0 if there is no if conditional description it s allowed but with little signification and without monitor function 6 In the if condition description the system can t execute the description statement immediately but wait for the corresponding serial number monitor function opened then starts the monitor 7 If the assignment meets the requirement it s not the conditional transfer behind but the common variable evaluated such as if r7 000 100 then r3 r3 1 the monitor won t close 7 3 2 Start and Close of Process Monitor After making t
385. t that the point in ellipse are moving along the ellipse path by short line 229 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual approaching method The parameter equation of ellipse is X 50 sin a Z 100 cos a because the X is diameter program so X 100 sin a 103 N0010 GOO ZO XO N0020 GOO Z200 X200 N0022 G00 Z190 X110 confirm the start point of G01 path N0030 r1 0000 the initial value of r1 is 0 N0040 r12 100000 sin r1 100000 the angle sine value multiplies 100000 N0050 r13 100000 cos r1 100000 the angle cosine value multiplies 100000 NO060 r12 r12 110000 finger out the relative difference of ellipse start point path and G01 start point N0070 r13 r13 190000 N1000 r2 100000 sin r1 The angel sine value multiply 100000 giving to r2 N1010 r3 100000 cos r1 The angel cosine value multiply 100000 giving to r3 N1020 r2 r2 r12 N1030 r3 r3 r13 N1040 G1 Xr2 Zr3 F500 Moving along the ellipse path N1050 if r1 360000 then P1080 Ifthe angel equals to 360 then exit N1060 r1 r1 1000 the value of r1 pluses 1000 angel pluses 1 N1070 M97 P1000 cycle N1080 M02 7 3 Process Monitoring and Execution The common part program is executed according to the designed path one by one in advance it can t make the prompt response for the real time happened matter in the command executive midway In the system there are ten inspectors which are numbered according to 0 to 9 turn call
386. tailed connection method is referred to the corresponding drive device user manual Notice When the stepper motor is used it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405 d 7 d 0 X motion parameter P100 P116 and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode Y The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system otherwise cause that the motor steps out owing to the external interference CNC system the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference 268 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 5 5 Connecting Between CNC and Drive Unit of Reaction Stepper Motor Connection layout between CNC and GSK DF3 X connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable System i DF3 drive unit Wou N i P Single phase i a CPS 1 n 0 AC220V o XApu P lh 5 d Xdirr DIR amp PR 13 Idii MIRA EE p aal 45 FREF E V otor power supply o 7 d Xen FREE 19 O COM o Ek Reaction Y i R stepper motor Metal shell Y O Metal shell T Z connection layout Less than 15m shielded cable i System DF3 drive unit mie CP L gt Single phase 4 CY Zpu CP 2 g AZdirt DIR 3 PE ia hits DIR A U 7 e 5Y FREE g
387. te the system in Manual Auto and Diagnosis operations but the user can press RESET key to remove the alarm window and switch the control to Edit Parameter or Tool Offset operation mode If the emergency signal is not cancelled in Edit Parameter or Tool Compensation operation press RESET key to remove the alarm window then it is available to operate system 13 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual There is the ESP in the movement there may be great deviation between the coordinates displayed the system and the actual position and the operator must correct the machine coordinates When emergency button is pressed there are a series of procedures to be handled 1 During emergency stop the system stops all feed and terminates program execution the spindle stops rotating cooling and lubricating function is turned OFF 2 During emergency stop the system automatically sets the internal stored chuck and tailstock states to M11 and M79 After the emergency is released when the foot switch of chuck or tailstock is pressed for the first time the states become M10 M78 3 During emergency stop if such commands as tool exchanging tailstock chuck gear changing is being executed the execution should be stopped immediately cancel the tool post CCW CW signal tailstock signal and chuck signal are depends on parameter setting at this time the system assumes that the tool post chuck tailstock and gea
388. tem panel return to the point no matter what the machine slide stops anywhere 4 4 2 5 Program Reference Point Return Must confirm the program reference point position before the operator executes the program reference point return otherwise the unexpected result brings In JOG working mode the operator directly press the function key to execute the operation After the key is pressed the corresponding coordinate axis rapidly returns to the program reference point When Z X Y axis conversion indicator lights up that means X or Y is being executed PROGRAM By pressing Lackey Z Y or X rapidly returns the Z Y or X program reference point from the current point The Z X Y axis conversion indicator lights up that means X or Y is being executed Note 1 Generally each axis should stop at the program reference point in waiting for the machining 2 After the system executes the program reference point return the green icon of the program reference point return before the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the prompt 4 4 2 6 Recovering the Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point In JOG working mode the workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point have been set In AUTO working mode when all executed blocks include G50 the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point have been changed The operator can use the following operations to recover the workpiece coordi
389. tem uses M97 to continuously runs till the program ends The results of method 1 and method 2 are the same 3 1 14 M97 Program Transfer Command format M97 P program transfer Field P Transfer to block number The leading zero of the block number can be omitted Explanation M97 commands the program to transfer from the block to the program specified by P Block number specified by P should exist in the block otherwise the program alarms E215 line number miss The block number specified by P cannot be M97 block itself Generally the death cycle must not be created in M97 Example N0030 GOO X100 N0040 M98 P0060 NO050 M97 P0090 NO060 G01 U2 N0070 W 5 NO080 M99 NO090 M02 Execute N0050 to directly do NO090 instead of N0060 3 1 15 M98 M99 Subprogram Call and Subprogram Return Command format M98 Pxxxx Lxx M99 Field P Block which is in subprogram Leading zero of the block number can be omitted L Call times of subprogram Omit L or it is called one time when L is 1 Lis 1 9999 Explanation Some fixed sequence which appears repetitively in the program is taken as a subprogram so it can be called instead of being compiled when it needs again When M98 calls the subprogram and there is M99 in the execution of the subprogram the subprogram call ends and the program returns to the main program to call the next block The subprogram generally follows M02 M30 of the main program and the last
390. ter P200 P201 P202 The parameter defines the backlash value of Z X Y mechanical transmission Unit mm There are backlash clearances in the lead screw the decelerator and other driving device which cause the error in the repeated motion of tool post To avoid the error set P200 P201 P202 which make CNC system automatically compensate the error when the machine changes its moving direction Measurement method of mechanically driven backlash taking example of Z 92 Chapter Four System Operation 1 Select the proper feedrate in JOG working mode 2 Install the dial indicator on the proper position of the machine move the tool post to the probe of the dial indicator and set its pointer to zero 3 Select STEP working mode with the step size 1 0 mm 4 Press Z axis coordinate axis movement key to move the tool post to the dial indicator and make it point to zero when rotating one circle 5 Press Z axis coordinate axis movement key to move reversely and the pointer of dial indicator turns around The pointer cannot return to zero because of the backlash At the moment D value between the pointed position of pointer and zero is Z backlash value Notice 1 Repeat the above mentioned operations many times to gain the exact measurement value 2 The measurement method of X backlash is the same 3 Z X Y backlash compensation speed is to compensate with the speed set by P411_d1 Precision compensation __bit parameter P411 pas
391. ter P209 setting e Voltage 5V 276 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection 3 6 4 Connection Layout of Converter Analog Voltage Analog spindle interface SVC can output 0 10V and the circuit is as follow plo oT E e pul o oo O s D O O JIJIDAUO 18 AGND CNC sid ae Machine side The connection cable between the system and the converter should use the shield cable 3 6 5 Encoder Interface Method Encoder 3 6 6 Encoder Interface Connection Layout PP ineecoeaeet Less than 15m shield cable a sigg A ho Pa i A OV OV A 8 de son a ont ee pes O O 6 LB MEL PC J ov wil PA O Bt 7 eee The connection cable between the system and the spindle encoder must use the shielding cable which should be connected with the socket shell When the spindle encoder output signal is not the differential output mode PA PB PC cannot be connected at the moment the anti interference ability of the encoder output signal reduces It is suggested that the system should use the spindle encoder with the difference output mode 217 GGSK I 14134 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 3 6 7 Connection Between CNC System Y and AC Servo Drive Unit Connection layout between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit Less than 15m shield cable
392. the Check the tailstock and then remove the E382 l i tailstock does not tailstock does not already fault ready spindle in M87 mine ier ne Gnenialionis comde perform the spindle command after state or not p retreating from the M87 state M87 M88 M87 M88 function is still closed M87 M88 function Z axis movement is Z axis movement is restricted by Check wh lher he semai connection E385 restricted by external control It is specified by signal is normal external control parameter P538 l X axis movement is X axis movement is restricted by Check wheter he exlemaitconmnecion E386 restricted by external control It is specified by signal is normal external control parameter P539 l Y axis movement is Y axis movement is restricted by external control parameter P540 g E388 inspecting the I l l inspection signal signal is normal signal overtime Do not perform the M13 M14 if the Do not operate the uy 0 eran ine Spindle in bik ed Firstly perform the M88 and then E383 orientation state regardless Perform the M13 M14 after stopping the E389 l Spindle in the M03 M04 state spindle does not spindle stop Fail to perform the The spindle start and Y axis IS M13 M14 during interlocked with the spindle Set the bit parameter P410_d4 0 or it E390 clamping when P410_d4 1 Forbid only can be performed after the Y axis els oo oi performing the M13 M14 command in the Y axis movement state
393. the CNC machine its electricity part installation debugging motion performance debugging coordinate system creation and tool preparation are completed in JOG working mode The system should be performed the essential analyzing and pre inspection combining the user parameter list and cutter compensation value etc after entering the Manual page which will close the manual operation function and display the alarm information if the Manual operation may be generated a severe unexpected results during pre inspection In this case modify the parameter based upon the alarm information and then correctly perform the Manual operation The system provides many part program execution mode The operator can execute many necessary settings in JOG working mode before run to get the safe machining process 9 Main function in JOG working mode including yx Coordinate axis moves in JOG mode STEP mode and MPG mode yx Coordinate axis moves in absolute movement mode relative movement mode yx Create machine coordinate system workpiece coordinate system yx Spindle chuck cooling tool post and other miscellaneous function operation yx Tool setting operation yx Machine real time state display pop up real time alarm 32 Chapter Four System Operation JOG window display is as Fig 4 4 i window 0289 850 Left top Right middle FDIT Fig 4 4 JOG working mode window area display content Upper top display manual feed operation mod
394. the G06 Mode Code format G0681 Y V R D F L Drilling Z X Y single axis allowed G0683 Y V R QOD FL Peck drilling Z X Y single axis allowed Explanation The drilling cycles both the G0681 G0683 and G81 G83 are identical which are the drilling cycle in the G06 mode it is not occupied the time during performing Refer to the G81 G83 command for details 4 23 Appendix G function and lts Explanation Table table 4 2 GOO X U Z W Y V single 2or3axes Rapid traverse Initial G G01 X U Z W Y V F single 2 or 3 axes Linear interpolation Modal G Can only be X Y or Z single axis manual input is executable G06 Z W 18 0 F stops automatically after finishing the distance G06 Z 18 0 F Positive moves soft hard limit stop alarm G06 Z 18 0 F Negatively moves soft hard limit emergency stop alarm G06 Reset can continue execution stops at emergency stop the same for X Y axis 18 0 If the low level of UlO8 pin is detected the execution automatically stops 18 1 If the high level of UlO8 pin is detected the execution automatically stops G07 Z Z automatically stops the same for X Y axis One shot G G06 motion mode command One shot G G06 automatically stops G07 Without axis number which means all eg command stops automatically 191 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual G08 X1 Z1 Y1 X Z Y are in G6 mode One shot G G08 The 1
395. the axes and the instantaneous speed in the circle tangent direction is called cutting surface speed for short surface 180 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions speed There are different surface speed for the different workpiece and tool with different material When the spindle speed controlled by the analog voltage is valid the constant surface control is valid The spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates of programming path in the constant speed control If the absolute value of X absolute coordinates adds the spindle speed reduces and vice verse which make the cutting surface speed as S command value The constant speed control to cut the workpiece makes sure all smooth finish on the surface of workpiece with diameter changing Surface speed spindle speed x X x Tr 1000 m min Spindle speed r min X absolute value of X absolute coordinate value Unit mm TT 3 14 In G96 the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates value of programming path in cutting feed interpolation In G96 constant surface speed control Z coordinate axis of workpiece system must coincide with the axes of spindle rotary axis of workpiece otherwise there is different between the actual surface speed and the defined one In G96 G50 S_ can limit max spindle speed r min The spindle actual speed is the limit value of max speed when the spindle speed counted by the
396. the circle of machining workpiece are the same when repeating the thread cutting many times the spindle speed must not be changed at the same time otherwise there is the error of thread cutting 4 The thread machining cutting speed is controlled by P113 max cutting feedrate when the above speed exceeds the max feedrate the system alarms It is suggested that the thread machining cutting speed should be less than 3000 mm min when the speed is too big the motor cannot response to cause the confused thread tooth Thread feedrate format is as follows inch thread speed Nx25 4 E metric thread speed NxP N speed unit r min max speed is less than 2000r min P thread lead unit mm it is switched into the metric unit to count when it is the inch thread 5 In thread cutting start and end the lead is not correct because of raising reducing speed so the commanded thread length should be longer than the actual required length Generally length in the raising speed gt 1 3 mm 6 The pitch P E is the pitch of the thread axis Note 1 Start the spindle before machining the thread otherwise the system keeps waiting all the time not system crash 2 In the course of thread cutting the feed hold key and the feedrate override are invalid the feed stops as the spindle stops 3 As soon as the spindle starts do not machine the thread because of the unstable spindle speed 170 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions ot
397. the encoder The spindle speed means the current spindle actual speed unit r min Explanations 1 When the spindle is not started the displayed spindle speed is zero 2 On initial page in DIAGNOSIS mode when the spindle is started if the checked encoder lines are not consistent with the P209 spindle encoder lines the system prompts Diagnosis check prompts the encoder lines are not consistent with the parameter 3 When the spindle encoder rotates synchronously with the spindle i e when the spindle rotates one circle the encoder rotates one circle otherwise the checked spindle speed is not consistent with the actual value 4 Check the diagnosis encoder PA PB and the counter signal by R key This function is used for the miscellaneous diagnosis when the encoder malfunction occurs If the PA and PAB signals 0 1 are displayed alternately when the spindle rotates and the counter counts circularly which means the PA and PB signal are normal 124 Chapter Four System Operation 4 8 7 Diagnosis hp2 Function Press hp2 in DIAGNOSIS screen the following prompt is displayed Key 0 See alarm message Key 1 See color code Key 2 Go to keyboard test Key 3 See CPLD pulse number Key 4 See version info Key 5 Memory import export Key ESC Exit Key 0 To see alarm message display alarm record Key 1 To see color code Display 256 colors and codes for example 00 is black FF is white Key 2
398. the exit coordinates and inlet coordinates of the cycle body to get the same cycle program and machining contour and the different machining path every time 183 CGGSR IT INS Example 20 GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 30 _ 20 N50 25 er End point 1 N60 7 Neo dl N50 Fig 4 9 N50 NEO Start point Machining the workpiece as Fig 4 9 cycle programming with G22 G80 as follows NO000 N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 N0050 NO060 N0070 N0080 NO090 N0100 N0110 Rapidly position to the starting point of the cycle X positively cuts 5mm Z negatively cuts 5mm X Z rapidly retracts to program reference point G50 X50 Z100 Define a coordinate system M3 S01 Start the spindle set to the low speed M8 Cooling ON GOO X10 Z30 G22 L3 Program cycles three times G01 W 5 F50 Z negatively cuts 5mm F 50mm min U5 W 5 G80 End of cycle body G26 X50 Z100 M5 Stop the spindle M9 Cooling OFF M2 End of program The above example is programmed according to the actual shape The programming method in Fig 4 9 is applicable to the roughing like forging and casting which can sharp the raw material with high efficiency and improve the machining efficiency 4 15 1 G80 Adds L Address Character The times of the program cycle can be changed by the G80 L command L resolution 0 9999 L 0 means that the program cycle times of the modificatio
399. the max speed of the machine P300 P301 P302 P303 are invalid when the spindle multi gear switching controls the spindle Unit r min Lowest speed of spindle with constant surface __ auxiliary parameter P304 The parameter defines the lowest speed in the constant surface cutting the calculation formula according to the constant surface cutting speed Surface speed spindle speed X tr 1000 X unit mm spindle speed unit r min X in the formula is the tool nose coordinate value on X axis When X is less than some value and the calculated spindle speed is less than P304 value the spindle speed keeps P304 speed to execute the machining Max spindle speed with constant surface speed __ auxiliary parameter P305 The parameter defines the max speed in the constant surface cutting the calculation formula according to the constant surface cutting speed Surface speed spindle speed X tr 1000 X unit mm spindle speed unit r min X in the formula is the tool nose coordinate value on X axis When X is more than some value and the calculated spindle speed is more than P305 value the spindle speed keeps P305 speed to execute the machining 94 Chapter Four System Operation Thread smooth speed borderline __ auxiliary parameter P306 The system has two methods in machining thread high speed and low speed machining P306 is the borderline of the two machining speed unit r min Generally P306 should be more than 100 P306 300 befor
400. tialization operation the system matched with DA98 series drive unit should execute the servo initialization the system matched with DY3 series drive unit should execute the stepper initialization The main differences of the initial parameter of the servo and the stepper are X motion parameter and others are the same The differences of servo stepper initialization value are referred to the motion parameter list in the appendix The initial parameter does not meet all machines and the machine manufacturer should modify the spindle the tool post and other parameters according to the detailed configuration of the machine To avoid the parameter loss the system should execute the solidifying command i e the modified parameter is solidified to the system FLASH storage to backup the FLASH storage without the battery has the permanent save function When the current parameter loses the system extracts the solidified parameter to recover it The system pops up the dialog box of relative operations about the parameter draw solidifying and the operator executes the option operation according to the corresponding dialog box The parameter draw command includes stepper parameter initialization servo parameter initialization and machine manufacturer parameter draw Explanation 1 Before executing the parameter solidifying operation the system should check the corresponding parameter and the system prompts the alarm message to require the 85
401. ting the standard ESP alarm d0__ miscellaneous function input pin macro programming 0 Donot permit forbid the statement programming to the defined standard input signal pin execute the statement programming to the UI pin displayed in the diagnosis window 107 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 1 Permit permit executing the statement programming to all input signal pin Automatic lubricating start time s _auxiliary parameter P330 The parameter defines the lubricating start time Unit s Automatic lubricating interval time s __ auxiliary parameter P331 The parameter defines the automatic lubricating time interval unit s Durable pressure low alarm time s __ auxiliary parameter P332 The parameter defines the hold pressure low alarm time Unit s 4 6 4 13 Auxiliary parameter P413 P418 P333 P335 PO2 7 P029 Window language _ bit parameter P413 password level 2 d7 Chinese English 0 Chinese display in Chinese 1 English display in English Communication interface _ Bit parameter P414 Password level 2 d7 d6 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved d7 Baud rate selection d6 0 enabled d7 0 d6 0 9600 1 19200 d7 1 d6 0 19200 d6__Baud selection Priority d7 0 d6 1 38400 1 38400 Display screen __ Bit parameter P415 Password level 3 d7 Parameter screen prompt 0 Close Close the ran
402. tion tri color indicator control and the system does not arrange the fixed pin for these functions The factory can arrange it on any unused pin Simply speaking the serial number of Common Signal Name of the unused pin is enabled after registering at the Interface Parameter of the parameter working mode The signal added in the Interface parameter column is displayed signal name with green in the diagnosis working mode For example if the cutter is the 4 station dynamic tool post and then the signal UlO5 input is disabled Set the parameter P511 to 5 which becomes the detection signal SAGT of the safety door when the safety door detection is performed the system is then inspected the UlO5 signal That is X2 connects the 14 pin The value of the input interface signal r1001 r1032 can be read by statement programming however not all output signal pins can be read only the pin UO displayed on the diagnosis interface can be performed the statement programming when bit parameter P412_d0 0 If the defined output signal pin is to be programmed which the alarm may occur For example variable r1005 is read UlO5 that is the detection of the X2 interface pin number is 14 LEVEL Both the No 15 pin of the X1 interface and the No 9 pin of the X4 are regarded as signal spindle analogue voltage positive SVC which are shared with the identical function Both the No 30 pin of the X1 interface and the No
403. to their name size remark and last distribution 4 3 2 Selection Creation Deletion Rename and Copy a Part Program Select create delete rename and copy part programs Note 1 The system executes most 000 254 programs 255 program names The system prompts E160 input program error when the executed program name is more than 254 2 There is no part program or the system is not used firstly the system automatically creates and selects 000 program as the current program When there are programs the system sorts the program according to part program quantity and program names in the last Chapter Four System Operation power off 3 The system supports many input the leading zero cannot be input Example inputting 003 program Press INPUT input 0 O 3 also input 03 or input 3 4 3 2 1 Selecting and Creating a Part Program The operations to select a part program or create a new program are as follows Press INPUT key in EDIT working mode 2 Input the required program number by the board key or input a program number which is not in the program catalog list as the new program number 8 Press ENTER key 4 Select or create a part program display the content of the part program and the system enters the program edit window Note 1 When a program is selected it is changed by the above steps it cannot be changed once it is confirmed 2 When a program number which is not exist in the part progra
404. tock releases but the spindle cannot be started 1 Releasing interlock when the tailstock is not interlock with the spindle starting the spindle is not influenced by the tailstock state controlling the tailstock is not influenced by the spindle state d2 Tailstock respond signal consecutive check 0 Do not alarm 1 Alarm the bit means whether the system real time check the tailstock state and alarms when the tailstock releases The control bit is valid when the tailstock has the respond signal Setting P519 P520 d1 Automatic MPG control 0 Invalid using MPG to control rapid feedrate override is invalid in AUTO working 102 Chapter Four System Operation mode 1 Valid using MPG to control rapid feedrate override is valid in AUTO working mode do Automatic MPG mode 0 Mode 1 use the mode 1 to control MPG rapid feedrate override 1 Mode 2 use the mode 2 to control MPG rapid feedrate override Mode 1 and 2 are referred to OPERATION Section 4 5 AUTO Working Mode Safety setting 2 _ bit parameter P403 password level 3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved d3 d2 jdt do d3__M output during ESP 0 Only spindle and cooling are turned off When the emergency stop alarm is valid the system only turns off the signals of the spindle coolant and lubricant 1 All are turned off When the emergency stop alarm is valid the system turns off all the auxiliary function output signals d2 Spindle and c
405. tput UO05 UO009 signal to control the preparation work before the feeder is completed the feeding when it is detected the UI05 signal 001 N0010 r7000 r1005 Input signal state of r1005 by 0 monitoring inspection N0020 if r7000 O then r2005 0 If monitoring r1005 is 0 then UOO5 outputs 0 N0030 gt r5008 101000 Delay 1 second N0040 gt r2009 0 UOO9 outputs 0 N0050 gt r5008 100500 Delay 500 millisecond NO060 gt r2005 1 UOO5 outputs 1 235 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual N0070 gt r5008 100300 Delay 300 millisecond N0080 gt r2009 1 UOO9 outputs 1 NO090 gt r7010 0 Close 0 monitoring NO100 r7010 1 Open 0 monitoring by method 1 N0200 GO X100 Z100 N0210 GO X50 Z50 Positioning to the initial point N0220 G1 X48 N0230 G1 Z0 F100 N0240 G1 X2 F100 N0250 GO X100 Z100 Return to the position point N0260 M30 N0010 N0090 are the monitoring description statement which is depicts the signal control procedure of the signal control NO200 N0260 are the main programmings of the machining workpiece N0100 will automatically carry out the feed preparation as long as the r1005 signal becomes to 0 during performing the main programming after it opens the 0 monitoring Explanation 1 This function is the extension for the process monitoring and the process monitoring function is regular and never changed
406. transistor of electric switch is conducted the output voltage should be more than 23V when the transistor is turn off 2 When the input function is valid the input signal is connected with 24VGND when it is invalid the signal is not connect with 24VGND 3 When the output function is valid the signal is connected with 24VGND when it is invalid the signal is in high impedance state It is suggested that the input output cable should use the shield cable and the shield layer is connected with the plug metal cover and the machine to improve the anti interference ability 3 3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection Relative interface signal of machine zero return is as the following table X1 X2 X4 interfaces 1 X1 interface DECZ Z deceleration signal DECX X deceleration signal DECY Y deceleration signal Ne is Bit parameter P406 d7 P406 d6 P406 d5 P406 d4 P406 d3 P406 d2 set the machine zero 3 X4 interface return mode 260 Chapter Three CNC Device Connection Bit parameter setting O means there is no deceleration signal or zero signal bit parameter setting 1 means there is the deceleration signal or zero signal There are four zero return methods and their detailed parameter setting methods are referred to Operation Parameter Working Mode the detailed zero return execution process is referred to Operation JOG Working Mode Connection example 1 The followings are the two kinds of connecti
407. trol mode 2 M10 M11 output time sequence in level control mode Executing M10 Executing M11 Executing M10 M10 pin M11 pin Note 1 When the hydraulic chuck control is valid the system defaults the chuck releasing after power on or emergency stop the first control input of chuck is valid and the system outputs the signal of chuck clamping 2 When it is the interlock protection between the chuck and the spindle in the spindle running the system forbids operating the chuck otherwise it alarms in the chuck releasing the system forbids starting the spindle otherwise it alarms 3 In automatic continuous run the foot switch operation is invalid no matter what the spindle rotates 4 When the chuck operation is failure or interrupted reset emergency stop the system takes the chuck is in the unconfirmed position prompts the chuck flashing in red M10 or M11 at the moment the system cannot start the machining programs the system recovers the 59 CGS I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual normal state when the chuck operation is executed once again or the system is turned on again 5 The chuck respond signal consecutive check P409d5 1 is to continuously check whether the chuck abnormally releases in the normal or machining state If the above is set the alarm P402_d4 1 the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when the chuck releases in machining 6 When the chu
408. ts with OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M92 check the state of No 1 user when the state is invalid input terminal cuts off OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M93 check the state of No 2 user when the state is valid input terminal connects with OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed M94 check the state of No 2 user when the state is invalid input terminal cuts off OV skip to the block specified by P otherwise the next block is executed 3 1 18 M47 M48 Set Spindle Working State Command format M47 M48 Explanation See Section 4 4 3 4 Setting Spindle Working State for details 3 1 19 M86 Send an Information Based Upon the ModBus Communication Agreement Code format M86 P J Q H Field meaning and its range P Equipment number 0 99999 J Address 0 99999 Q Allow using the r1 r199 variable in this filed the resolution range of Q is 9999999 9999999 H 0000000 11111111 H_d0 O Write the data Q to equipment 1 Read the content from the equipment address to the r4023 149 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Explanations 1 Do not input the execution in the manual mode 2 When the equipment address content is read the Q value is disabled But the Q value cannot be omitted otherwise the system may alarm and therefo
409. tton control M51 M58 command 8 5 Call M50 M72 Function Before Machining This system can be output the signal and supplied by external monitoring based upon the 3 essential points shift the Auto interface from others shift to other interface from the Auto one start and end machining The achieved method firstly the corresponding M command can be solidified in the No 254 programming and then modify the parameters P344 P347 the corresponding numbers are consistent with its corresponding M commands For example modify P344 to 51 and then call the M51 For example If P344 Call before machining is set to 50 then perform M50 before executing the 1 machining programming each time If 345 Call after machining is set to 51 then perform M51 before the end command M30 M02 M20 are executed If the program is retracted in the halfway it will not be performed If P346 Enter the Auto Call is set to 52 then shift to the Auto interface each time from others As long as no alarm occurs call and execute the M52 If P347 Retreat from the Auto Call is set to 53 then shift to the other interface from the Auto one As long as no alarm occurs call and execute the M53 The range of parameter P344 P347 is 0 255 the system initialization is O 8 6 Call M50 M70 Function by Manual 0 Key The achieved method firstly the corresponding M command can be solidified in the No 254 programming and then modify the parameters P348 the corre
410. uck releases in machining 61 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 6 When the tailstock signal cancels M80 the tailstock state M78 or M79 is displayed with the underline i e M78 or M79 4 4 9 Other Option Functions Option function is the non standard pin input output control When the system needs some function the operator defines its pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with the wirings The detailed interface parameter definitions are referred to OPERATION 4 6 Parameter Working mode the detailed wiring connection is referred to CONNECTION Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection Warning Pin definition must be performed by the machine manufacturer the improper definition maybe damages the system and the machine electricity 4 4 9 1 Three Color Indicator Control When the system needs the function the operator should define its output pin in the interface parameter and correctly connects with wiring the system output the signal in the corresponding pin P502 LMP3 Green lamp program run signal indicator 3 P503 LMP2 Yellow lamp Alarm lamp control signal 2 P504 LMP1 Red lamp alarm lamp Alarm lamp controls signal 1 Functional description 1 The tricolor light control is valid in JOG AUTO working mode 2 The green indicator light means the program normally runs 3 The green indicator goes out and the red one lights when the system alarms 4 The red and green i
411. ulse control mode ari M78 CMS M79 executing M78 Input signal M78 pin M79 pin t1 M78 M79 output hold time is set by P328 in pulse control mode 2 M78 M79 output time sequence in level control mode Executing M78 Executing M79 Executing M78 M78 pin M79 pin Note 1 When the hydraulic tailstock control is valid the system defaults the tailstock backward after power on or emergency stop the first control input of chuck is valid and the system outputs the signal of tailstock forward 2 When it is the interlock protection between the tailstock and the spindle in the spindle running the system forbids operating the tailstock otherwise it alarms 3 In automatic continuous run the tailstock control input is invalid no matter what the spindle rotates 4 When the tailstock operation is failure or interrupted reset emergency stop the system takes the tailstock is in the unconfirmed position prompts the tailstock flashing in red M78 or M79 at the moment the system cannot start the machining programs the system recovers the normal state when the tailstock operation is executed once again or the system is turned on again 5 w The tailstock respond signal consecutive check is to continuously check whether the tailstock abnormally releases in the normal or machining state If the above is set the alarm P402_d2 1 the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when the ch
412. ulti function Position Control System User Manual actual position and so the operator must execute the machine zero return or other ways to regulate the machine coordinates to ensure that the displayed coordinates are the same as those of the actual 4 1 4 7 Reset Operation When the system outputs abnormally and the coordinate axis moves abnormally the operator RESET should press to make the system be the reset state as follows 1 All axis motions decelerate to stop 2 Whether M function spindle cooling output is valid is set by P403_d2 3 The automatic run ends the modal function and state keep 4 When the system is in G00 G97 G98 state both F value and spindle analog voltage output keep unchanged 5 The system terminates the operation in progress and returns the control to the initial interface of the current operation mode Special attentions 1 The standard Reset function executed by the system is the function of turning on or turning off the system output signals uniformly The following function can be set In Manual Auto operation after Reset button is pressed and the system executes the standard Reset function the system executes an additional M73 custom command only when in Manual Auto operation mode and when there is a solidified M73 command in the system the execution is available This function is applicable to some special machine components and is used when only some of the output signals
413. umber 000 as the current program Example Example delete 003 operation is as follows Input by the press key INPUT 3 DELETE ENTER The 003 program is deleted from the components program storage area 4 3 2 3 Deleting All Part Programs Clear the program area in the program catalog search window and all programs in the system are deleted as follows 1 Press INPUT in the part program catalog search state 0 2 Input by the key board 8 Press DELETE the system prompts Enter delete all programs Esc escape the deletion 4 Press ENTER to delete all part programs press ESC not to execute the deletion operation and return EDIT working mode Note The system creates a program number 000 as the current program after all part programs are deleted P416_d6 sets whether all the programs can be deleted in EDIT operation mode 4 3 2 4 Renaming a Part Program The program name of the current program is renamed as another new one The new is taken as the current program is as follows 1 Press INPUT key 2 Input the program number which is not in the program list press ALTER and the current program number is rewritten to the input program number Note When the input program exists the system prompts E166 required renaming program already exists Example Example the current program 000 is renamed to 005 as follows Press key input INPUT 5 ALTER And the renaming is completed 20 Chapter
414. unication if the communication is overtime or the received Modbus is with the normal information cycle and try it again after some time 6 In M88 state the detection command M87 is invalid Alarm and information during executing M87 M88 command Two following alarms occur during executing M87 M88 command 1 E383 The spindle is forbidden to operation in M87 state 2 E384 M87 MB88 function can t be used The following information occurs during executing M87 M88 command 1 Normal connection After sending the signal the receiving responds abnormally the reasons are the parameter P343 setting is wrong or the abnormal response caused by the other interference 52 Chapter Four System Operation 2 Not connected no response After sending the signal the response signal is not received it may result from the line fault or the incorrect communication baud rate 3 Connecting again The system tries to send again Spindle State Prompt 1 MO3 MO4 state is displayed in red It means the spindle orientation command is executing During executing M87 Q H1command the actual orientation may be completed 2 MO5 state is display in blue It means the current is in the orientation state and the spindle orientation has already completed 3 The spindle is displayed in the normal color It means it has already exited the spindle orientation state Note 96 system does not lead to RS232 interface it should be tak
415. urn H_d1 1 the pitch even increases or reduce after the spindle rotates some angle Explanations Differences between G34 and G33 1 When the previous and the current blocks are all shared with G34 command both of them are needed to check the thread head signal at the beginning of the cutting 1 rev 2 Bit parameter H definitions in G34 and G33 are different 3 G33 is used to machining the constant pitch thread and G34 to machining variable pitch thread others are the same Refer to G33 for details In G34 R is the pitch incremental value or reducing value per revolution of the spindle R P2 P1 R with the direction P1 gt P2 the pitch decreases when R is negative P1 lt P2 the pitch increases when R is positive as Fig 4 5 When the pitch becomes negative or exceeds the permitted range due to the decrease increase of R the system will pre count the increase decrease path in advance and the system alarm may occur 172 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions Starting point of ma Fig 4 5 variable pitch thread 4 6 G32 Tapping Cycle Command format G32 Z W P E H_ Zaxis tapping G32 X U P E H_ Xaxis tapping G32 Y V P E _ H_ Y tapping only single axis feeds Field Z W X CU Y V end point coordinates of tapping or tapping length Z X Y is separate X Y absolute coordinate W U Vis separate Z X Y relative coordinate the user only uses one of the relative and the absolute coordinate a
416. ut and Retraction mmrrrrrrrrmnnnnanenenananaass 142 3 1 9 M32 M33 Lubricating ON OFF AS 143 3 1 10 M41 M42 M44 M43 Spindle Automatic Gear Shifting Controleer 143 3 1 11 M78 M79 M80 The Output Signal of Tailstock Forward Backward and Cancellation PCr errr Tee ee eee eee a Sa 144 3 1 12 M95 Workpiece Counting errrrercererennnnnnnonannnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnss 144 3 1 13 M96 Cycle Execution Call AA 145 3 1 14 M97 Program Transfer errreerenencecnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nen nnnn nn nnn cnn rre cnn en nnnnnnmnnnnnanenss 146 3 1 15 M98 M99 Subprogram Call and Subprogram Return sssssssrssrrsrrrsrrrssnensnnnennnnnnnnnnnn 146 XVI Contents 3 7 15 1 M99 Increase Address Character aras lia iaa 147 3 1 16 M21 M22 M23 M24 User Output Control rrerrrsrnennnnnnnnnanonnanonnnnnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnnnns 147 3 1 17 M91 M92 M93 M94 User Input rererrerernnnnnnenonnnannnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnennnnnonnennnnnonnensnsnsnnensos 148 3 1 18 M47 M48 Set Spindle Working State e ererereenenenenennnnonnnnenensnnnnnononnnnsnnananannnnss 149 3 1 19 M86 Send an Information Based Upon the ModBus Communication Agreement 149 3 1 20 M87 M88 Spindle Orientation Control o EEL 151 3 1 21 M50 M74 Self Defined Command A 152 31211 M50 M74 With Field Kirai A E SS 152 3 1 21 2 In No 254 Program When Compiling M50 M74 commands with Parameter but not Necessary A A A Bes
417. ut interface can be get For example R2002 0 expression of outputting 0 to UOOZ2 pin the outside can form the conductive loop R2016 1 expression of output 1 to UO16 pin in the high resistance the outside can t form the conductive loop r2007 r8 confirm the UOO7 output state by the content of r8 zero or non zero If r2016 1 then P0100 if the output of current UO16 is read to be 1 it will go to P0100 Explanation 1 Only the output pin which is released by the standard function definition allows to the variable assignment output because of the system limitation otherwise alarm it only can make the statement program to pin with UO in the diagnosis interface when it makes program to the defined input signal pin it alarms 2 In the system boot strap and power on beginning the system will set r2001 r2032 to be 1 the outside can t form the conductive loop 7 1 2 4 Keyboard Scan Register r5001 Keyboard scan register r5001 value range 32 digits without sign The different numerical value which is written by register has different meanings the system executes the relative command according to the written numerical value Please refer the below table The gathered table of r5001 executing keyboard scan commands the system forbids to use this variable in the process monitor description sentence Command No keyboard scan once 1 When the key is pressed the r5001 equals to the input va
418. ut output interface variable special variable in system inner register variable of key scan command register variable of showing command register variable of command process monitor process monitor management variable pulse signal pulse signal monitor management variable etc Different variable has different function and purpose its explanation and value range are different too Following is the instruction in classify a 11177 EMIR E pointer variable ra00 TDA o input interface variable root ero3z A a system variable 400114023 r6001 r6006 r6101 r6164 r6201 r6264 process monitor variable r7000 r7009 process monitor management r7010 r7019 variable pulse signal monitor variable r7100 r7103 pulse signal monitor management r7110 r7113 variable variable transfer register variable r7900 7 1 2 1 Common Variable The variable number range of common variable is from 001 to 299 the total is 299 pieces The common variable is used to store a data which can participate in operation and also be quoted by data field of G command etc 213 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual The data value range of command variable 999999999 999999999 common variable reference In the workpiece program the system uses the variable to change the data field value Only the common variable can be used like this Format lt address gt ri means to treat the variable value as field
419. uting G6 and the manual key in control is invalid if the axis has executed other commands other than G6 before In some cases you can also used G8 command to set whether it is valid or invalid G08 command format G08 Z1 X0 Y1 Can be set to single axis two axis or three axis mode GO08explanation The definition of G08 command It means whether G06 can be executed manually after single block stop or pause in the following program 1 behind the axis number means the axis enters G6 mode and 0 means this axis forbids G6 mode 166 Chapter Four G Commands and Functions E g G8 Z1 In the following program Manual execution of G6 G7 is allowed for Z axis until it meets other motion commands G8 Z0 Inthe following program manual execution of G6 G7 is not allowed for Z axis until the other G6 command is met Integrated example In the example below the Y axis is the servo rotation spindle the program completes the outer circle turning and then indexes to drill two holes finally cuts off the workpiece NO000 G00 Z100 X100 ZIX return to the start point N0010 G06 Y F1000 The spindle rotates at the speed of F1000 N0020 G00 Z90 X50 Z X approach the workpiece N0030 G01 Z50 F30 Turns the outer circle N0040 G01 X51 F100 X retracts N0050 GO7Y Spindle stops NO060 M21 Unit head is in position N0070 G00 Z75 Y10 Z moves to the first hole position and the spindle rotates to 10 degree at the same time NO080 G0
420. utomatically cancels the tool setting icon and does not memorize the previous tool setting point 2 Without the tool setting icon appearing the operator directly presses K and the system takes the current point as the tool setting point 3 When Y axis is valid refer to the Z tool setting steps for the Y trail cut tool setting mode Note 1 When the system uses the optical tool setting instrument it must not start the spindle to place 57 CGS I H13 E GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual the tool setting point to the intersection of tool setting instrument other operations are the same 2 The system automatically creates the tool offset which can be displayed and modified in OFFSET working mode Refer to OFFSET working mode 3 When the system uses the line up tool setting if the tool is placed at another side of the workpiece and the measured value along X direction during trial cutting and tool setting is the negative 4 4 7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function Chuck operation In JOG working mode input M10 M11 to control the chuck clamping releasing Input M 1 O ENTER chuck clamps The system displays the spindle state Input M 1 1 ENTER chuck releases Input M 1 2 ENTER cancel the chuck control signal use M12 for special chuck device Relative parameters P409_d7 0 the system has the hydraulic chuck control function P402_d5 0 interlock between the hydraulic chuck control and t
421. valid The spindle manual speed is specified by P309 the manual rotation time is specified by P308 and the spindle stops and LED indicator is OFF when the manual time ends When parameter P308 is 0 the spindle JOG function is disabled Interlock between the spindle starting stopping and chuck P402_d5 0 interlock relationship between the hydraulic chuck control and the spindle control 1 When the chuck is released the system forbids starting the spindle otherwise the system alarms Chuck released do not open the spindle 2 When the spindle rotates the system forbids the chuck operations otherwise the system alarms Spindle does not stop do not operate the chuck Interlock between the spindle starting stopping and tailstock P402 d3 0 Interlock between the tailstock control and the spindle control The system forbids operating the tailstock when the spindle is rotating otherwise the system alarms The spindle does not stop and the system forbids operating the tailstock Spindle starting stopping execution process and signal output time sequence Note Select the spindle control output signal by P410_d7 When P410_d7 is set to 0 the spindle controls the level output When P410_d7 is set to 1 the spindle controls the pulse output The time sequence between the spindle brake signal MSP and the spindle starting stopping signal as follows Wherein t1 The hold time of M3 M4 M5 signal output is determ
422. value For example Fr003 when r003 equals 15000 its function is same to F15 command Zr010 when r010 equals 2500 its function is same to Z 2 5 command K r 010 when r010 equals 2500 its function is same to K2 5 command S r 003 when r003 equals 2000000 its function is same to S2000 command For example N0010 r001 3700 N0020 r002 150000 N0030 GOO Z100 X80 N0040 G01 Ur001 Fr002 same to U 3 700 F150 000 command function N0050 G01 Wr001 N0060 M02 Explanation 1 The variable value doesn t include decimal point the variable value is get from representative value riding 1000 when it is replaced to the coordinate etc field with decimal point the variable value divides 1000 then the coordinate date including three decimal is get 2 In the command symbol G M T the variable can t be quoted Gr003 can t be used for program 3 The field of program line number i e P Q etc can t quote variable 4 The field L showing times and field H showing location sign can t quote the variable 5 Only the common variable can be quoted by command field otherwise alarm 6 When the program is in AUTO working mode when the variable is used in main program and also the transferred subprogram i e M50 M74 command please pay attention that the variable in the intercross using and changing of main program and subprogram will impact the result of program running The characteristic of common variable When the system executes the progr
423. ved 4 4 1 3 MPG Control e Press Me to switch from MPG mode to JOG or STEP mode and the indicator ON means it is selected MPG movement The system receives the pulse signal generated by the manual pulse generator handwheel or MPG to control the movement of coordinate axis The user can control the slight movement of the coordinate axis by rotating the MPG preset each movement of scale of MPG The MPG dial rotates one case and the coordinate axis moves one step width The step width has three gears 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm which can be switched circularly according to the STEP REGULATION preset MPG coordinate axis Press MPG then the coordinate of the selected coordinate axis is in the high light state Then press Z X Y SWITCH key to circularly select X Y or Z as the axis controlled by MPG Rotate MPG after the required coordinate axis is selected and the selected axis moves according to MPG rotating Rotate CW MPG and the coordinate axis moves positively Rotate CCW MPG and it moves negatively Note 1 The MPG speed should be less than 5 r s otherwise the motor will not stop even if the MPG stops that will cause inconsistence in the slider movement distance and MPG scale 2 In MPG mode all the functions related to the axis moving including JOG or STEP movement function program zero point return and machine zero point return are invalid 3 In MPG mode when axis movement related functions are executed and the r
424. verse state Rapid override Wu Rapid override is divided into the four gears 25 50 75 and 100 OVERRIDE increases to Uuh one gear till 100 ROEE reduces one gear till 25 Z X Y actual traverse speed P100 P101 P102 x rapid override Manual operations influenced by rapid override and feed override are as followed JOG MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is ON it is influenced by the rapid override when it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override STEP MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is ON it is influenced by the rapid override When it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override INPUT FIELD MOVEMENT operation when the speed indicator is ON it is influenced by the rapid override when it is OFF it is influenced by the feedrate override Program reference point return operation it is influenced by the rapid override machine zero return operation it is influenced by the rapid override Note 1 Firstly select the rapid override and press the coordinate axis movement key in JOG working mode 2 Select the rapid override in STEP working mode and regulate the rapid override in the course of movement and the traverse speed changes 36 Chapter Four System Operation 4 4 1 5 Low Speed Feed Speed Selection ALM Press Por and the speed indicator is OFF which is the selected low speed feed state System embedding feedrate When the input field F is 0 the system uses the embed
425. witch input 0 Do besides using the command to control the hydraulic chuck the operator can use the external foot switch to control the hydraulic chuck 1 Do not d0__hydraulic tailstock foot switch input 0 Do besides using the command to control the hydraulic tailstock the operator can use the external foot switch to control the hydraulic tailstock 1 Do not 4 6 4 8 Run and Efficiency Bit Parameter__ P400 P401 P420 Run setting _ bit parameter P400 password level 3 Record as asjas a3 Resoned arja d6_ spindle gear memory 0 Invalid the spindle gear M41 M44 cannot be memorized in JOG and AUTO working mode it is M41 after power on again 1 Valid the spindle gear M41 M44 can be memorized in JOG and AUTO working mode it is the previous gear before last power off after power on again d5__ spindle in AUTO working mode 0 Controlled by the key In AUTO mode no program running state pressing the spindle CW spindle stop key is valid 1 Not be controlled by the key In AUTO mode pressing the spindle CW spindle stop key is invalid d4__MPG 0 1mm step width 0 Valid select the big override x0 1mm gear to rotate the MPG in JOG working mode 98 1 Chapter Four System Operation Invalid cannot select the big override x0 1mm gear to rotate the MPG in JOG working mode d3__ rapid position mode 0 1 Alone traverse each axis rapidly positions separately in GOO Interp
426. xecuted but the system does not detect whether the orientation is completed the system can execute other commands and then detect M87 Detect whether the orientation is completed or not the next one is executed if it is completed M88 Cancel the orientation signal and retract from the orientation state Explanations 1 M87 Q means the combination of two commands M87 Q H1 and M87 2 The range of Qis 360 000 360 000 0 is positive and 360 000 equals to 0 3 The code before Q is just represented the rotation direction during the spindle orientation and the index is calculated based on the absolute value of Q 4 The variable of r1 r199 is allowed to use in Q field M87 M88 Command Execution Process The executing process of M87 Q or M87 Q H1 is as below 1 Based on ModBus communication treaty the message is sent and delay for the time set by P342 The step is skipped if P343 is 99999 or the message is sent which is same as that of Q numerical value if the communication is not successful sending is operated again 51 CGGSRK I HIS GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual 2 The orientation enabling signal YO2 is sent and then delay for 10ms 3 If the spindle is in M05 state output based on Q code When Q20 MO3 signal is output when Q lt 0 M04 signal is output If the spindle does not with CCW signal M04 CW signal MO3 is output no matter whether the direction is positive and negative If the
427. y one preheat resistor to reduce the current impact and the preheat resistor value is referred to the condition that the indicator does not light eee Machine side ULN2803 output 2 OUTPUT STANDARD SIGNAL e The output standard signal are driven by ULN2803 transistor max load instant current 200mA 259 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual When the signal is enabled the transistor is connected and the public terminal is 24V e The machine side is connected with the relay and other inductive load the spark suppressor which is near to 20cm must be used The serial current limiting resistance must be used when the machine side is connected with the capacitance load e The output standard signal M8 M9 M3 M4 M5 M10 M11 M78 M79 can be set to the level control mode or pulse control mode by the bit parameter M4 MSP standard signal is set by the parameter to execute the output the time sequence of the signal output is referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode e The output standard signal S01 S02 S03 S04 M41 M42 M43 M44 gear shifting execution process and time sequence of signal output are referred to OPERATION JOG Working Mode e Output standard signal TL TL output to control the tool post CW CCW 3 2 4 Input Output Signal Technical Specification e Voltage 24V e Max load instant current of output signal is 200mA Notice 1 The output voltage should be within 1V when the
428. y the parameters according to the actual conditions of the machine The system displays the selected parameter number in highlight after the parameter is selected 4 6 2 1 Parameter Search The parameter search is to search the required parameter as follows Method 1 Select the required parameter in the parameter window M reference parameter X motion parameter Z transmission parameter S auxiliary parameter T bit parameter U interface parameter W variable initial value Example select M reference parameter press M to enter the reference parameter window y g Press or I to move the highlight display to the parameter number which needs to search the bit parameter press i to left or right move the cursor to select the different bit and the bit definition of the selected bit changes 82 Chapter Four System Operation Method 2 Directly position to the required parameter as follows Press P and input the required parameter number which needs to search and then press ENTER The system displays the parameter in highlight Example for searching P208 firstly input P and then input 2 0 8 press ENTER and the parameter P208 has been found 4 6 2 2 Parameter Modification Modifying the parameter as follows Search the parameter to modify it according to the above parameter search method 2 Press INPUT and input the parameter data or directly input the parameter data 8 Press to delete the mistaken data and
429. ysis In program edit window the program compiling error creates two types of alarm Program alarm and Program compound check alarm The program compiling is completed successfully there is no the above alarm Program alarm there are mistaken commands in programming to cause the alarm and the correct command is input to clear the alarm which is not related to the parameter setting Program compound check alarm program command check causes the alarm which is resolved by the setting of all auxiliary parameters and interface parameters to analyze the program and then by modifying program and parameters to clear the alarm Example Program alarm example In compiling program press hp2 and the alarm display is as follow Program alarm Error E206 Missing message Program N0100 G32 Z300 Position Z Program compound check alarm example Press hp2 and the current edit program compiling is completed successfully when the system is switched from EDIT working mode to AUTO working mode the alarm display is as follows Program compound check alarm Error E610 Have illegally used M78 The command function is invalid 4 3 6 3 Program Compound Check Prompt After the program is compiled the program is executed in AUTO working mode when there is no error The system displays the program compound check prompt as follows 1 Tool nose coordinate software limit machine coordinate software limit exceeding ra
430. ystem Its axes are separately parallel with X Z axis in the same direction After the workpiece coordinates is created all absolute coordinate values in programming are the position values in the workpiece coordinate system Generally Z workpiece coordinate system is set on the rotary center of workpiece According to the actual condition in programming define the workpiece coordinate origin i e the programming origin in the workpiece drawing and the coordinate origin of CNC system command The workpiece coordinate system is created by setting a workpiece coordinate 1 6 Positioning and Interpolation Function The motion control mode that only controls the motion end point of one axis or multiple axes and the motion path during the movement is called the positioning control Interpolation is defined as the two dimension plane contour formed by the resultant path of 2 axes moving at the same time also called Contour control The move axes controlled in interpolation are called the link axes whose move amount move direction and move speed are controlled simultaneously during the whole movement to form the desired resultant motion path The system is a two axis linkage system whose link axes are X and Z and it has the linear interpolation function 132 Chapter One Programming Fundamental 1 7 Programming Coordinate Programming coordinate is for workpiece coordinate system GSK96programming uses absolute coordinates X Z Y fields
431. ystem cannot execute G32 in Deleted G32 then execute the program in DRY DRY RUN working mode in DRY RUN working mode E322 Before G34 thread machining the G34 Screw pitch is pitch is changing and it exceeds the Modify the machining program out of range permitted range or be a negative value when the end point is reached Coordinate flow The coordinate exceeds the top ne ee ee me alarm value of allowance data direction Boe Tool post Anar 100 ange compleico is Check the target tool selection signal is tool selection number isn t the target alarm in normal or not number E336 No changing tool ehantiarica The parameter set the tool changing Modify the forbidden tool changing No changing tool 9 forbidden parameter P403_d7 E323 E337 In tool post rotation CCW time in Check the target tool selection signal is Detect tool post ie l i tool change it can t Ct the tool in normal or not or delay the time for tool signal overtime nie selection number changing in properly E338 Forbid starting the spindle when the Chuck doesn t Execute the chuck clamping operation to l chuck is released in spindle and l clamp no spindle clamp the workpiece chuck locking each other E339 Spindle doesni When the spindle and chuck are p locking each other don t operate the Stop the spindle then operate the chuck stop no chuck spindle without stopped the spindle E340 Forbid function of The Eo oe set chuck control Modify
432. ystem enters the parameter window in other working modes and the parameter password input window is displayed as follows 1 Modify P416_d7 0 2 Press the menu key in any working modes except for PARAMETER working mode 3 Press PARAMETER to enter the parameter password input window 4 Directly input the operation privilege password 5 Press ENTER after the input is completed and the system enters the operation level corresponding to the password Set P416_d7 to 1to memorize password Parameter save The successfully modified parameters are automatically saved to the system and all parameters are saved when the system exits from the parameter window entering the window in the other working mode by press key When the system is turned on every time it reads the saved parameter data When the saved data in read exceeds the range it is rewritten to the minimum in the range and the system prompts it The read parameter in disorder in power on the system prompts whether the previous solidified parameter is read when the parameters have not been solidified the system prompts to select the stepper servo parameter to execute the parameter initialization and to save them to the system The main differences between the stepper and servo parameter are the different motion parameter values 4 6 2 Parameter Modification The system parameter has been initialized before the factory delivery The operator can modify and regulate correspondingl
433. ystem issues the Program Compound Check Alarm but does not lock the program execution 3 The system executes the tool setting operation based on the trial cutting mode or fixed point 4 5 6 7 8 mode in Jog operation mode Refer to the Section 4 4 6 Manual Tool Setting in Part Operation When executing T command firstly change the tool to the tool number specified by T command then execute the offset value of T command At this time the system modifies the tool nose coordinates To enhance working efficiency please specify T command and GO command in the same block E g GO X100 T0202 When T command is specified in the same block with G00 G01 command in AUTO working mode the tool change process is firstly executed then the tool is moved after adding the tool offset value to the coordinate of X Z or Y in G00 GO1 command The traverse speed is the rapid traverse speed in GOO and is cutting speed in G01 Only when G0 G1 is in the same block with tool offset command can the tool offset be added to the command value for execution Special rule When the tool type is 9 T command automatically calls M60 command 157 GGSK I 415 F GSK96 Multi function Position Control System User Manual Therefore T command must be specified in an independent block It cannot be in the same block with other commands Otherwise an alarm occurs 3 5 F function Feedrate Function It defines the feedrate of tool cutting i

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User manual  GAV/SAV/UAV Unità esterne multi  FCR-E40 取扱説明書  IBM System Storage & TotalStorage DS3400 Single Controller  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file